SCOPE OF SUPPLY OF TERMINALS AND

INSTALLATION SERVICES BY THE CONTRACTOR

1
 INDEX

1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE ............................................................................................... 10

2 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................ 11
3 OVERALL PROJECT DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 12
4 LANGUAGE .................................................................................................................. 14
5 PROJECT LOCATION .................................................................................................. 15
6 PROPERTIES OF THE PETROLEUM PRODUCTS ..................................................... 17
7 DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING SYSTEM ............................................................... 18
7.1 POCL ...................................................................................................................... 18
7.1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................ 18
7.1.2 PROCESS ......................................................................................................... 18
7.1.3 ELECTRICITY.................................................................................................... 26
7.1.4 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL ................................................................... 26
7.1.5 FIREFIGHTING .................................................................................................. 30
7.1.6 PIPING ............................................................................................................... 32
7.2 MPL ............................................................................................................................ 32
7.2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 32
7.2.2 PROCESS ......................................................................................................... 33
7.2.3 ELECTRICITY.................................................................................................... 44
7.2.4 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL ..................................................................... 45
7.2.5 FIREFIGHTING .................................................................................................... 48
7.2.6 PIPING ................................................................................................................. 50
7.3 JOCL .......................................................................................................................... 50
7.3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 50
7.3.2 PROCESS ............................................................................................................ 51
7.3.3 ELECTRICITY ...................................................................................................... 57
7.3.4 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL ..................................................................... 58
7.3.5 FIREFIGHTING .................................................................................................... 61
7.3.6 PIPING ................................................................................................................. 63
8 LIST OF DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED ..................................................................... 64
9 DOCUMENT ORDER OF PREFERENCE ..................................................................... 65
10 DESIGN BASIS ............................................................................................................. 66
11 GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS OF WORKS ..................................................................... 67
11.1 POCL........................................................................................................................ 67
11.1.1 CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 67
11.1.2 MODIFICATIONS FOR TRUCK LOADING ....................................................... 70
11.1.3 MODIFICATIONS FOR WAGON LOADING ...................................................... 74
11.1.4 MODIFICATIONS FOR DRUM LOADING ......................................................... 76

2
 11.1.5 MODIFICATIONS FOR JETTIES LOADING AND UNLOADING
OPERATIONS .................................................................................................. 77
11.1.6 MODIFICATIONS IN PUMPING STATIONS ...................................................... 77
11.1.7 MODIFICATIONS IN LEVEL GAUGE AND INVENTORY SYSTEM .................. 80
11.1.8 INLETS OF STORAGE TANKS (DOUBLE BLOCK & BLEED VALVES) ......... 81
11.1.9 VALVES MOTORIZATIONS .............................................................................. 82
11.1.10 FLOW METERING SYSTEMS ......................................................................... 83
11.1.11 OPERATION SEQUENCIES AND MODES ..................................................... 85
11.1.12 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM ................................................................................ 88
11.1.13 EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT ................................................................... 94
11.1.14 GENERAL ELECTRICAL MODIFICATIONS ................................................... 95
11.1.15 PRODUCT CHANGE IN STORAGE TANK AT PADMA TERMINAL ............. 100
11.2 MPL ........................................................................................................................ 101
11.2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 101
11.2.2 MODIFICATIONS FOR TRUCK LOADING ...................................................... 104
11.2.3 MODIFICATIONS FOR WAGON LOADING .................................................... 107
11.2.4 MODIFICATIONS FOR DRUM LOADING ....................................................... 108
11.2.5 MODIFICATIONS FOR JETTIES LOADING AND UNLOADING
OPERATIONS ................................................................................................ 110
11.2.6 MODIFICATIONS IN PUMPING STATIONS .................................................... 110
11.2.7 MODIFICATIONS IN LEVEL GAUGE AND INVENTORY SYSTEM ................ 112
11.2.8 INLETS OF STORAGE TANKS (DOUBLE BLOCK & BLEED VALVES) ........ 114
11.2.9 VALVES MOTORIZATIONS ............................................................................ 114
11.2.10 FLOW METERING SYSTEMS ....................................................................... 116
11.2.11 OPERATION SEQUENCIES AND MODES ................................................... 118
11.2.12 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM .............................................................................. 120
11.2.13 EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT ................................................................. 127
11.2.14 GENERAL ELECTRICAL MODIFICATIONS ................................................. 128
11.2.15 PRODUCT CHANGES IN STORAGE TANKS AT MEGHNA TERMINAL ..... 133
11.3 JOCL ...................................................................................................................... 134
11.3.1 CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 134
11.3.3 MODIFICATIONS FOR WAGON LOADING .................................................... 139
11.3.4 MODIFICATIONS FOR BARREL LOADING ................................................... 140
11.3.5 MODIFICATIONS FOR JETTIES LOADING AND UNLOADING
OPERATIONS ................................................................................................ 141
11.3.6 MODIFICATIONS IN PUMPING STATIONS .................................................... 142
11.3.7 LEVEL GAUGE AND INVENTORY SYSTEM .................................................. 144
11.3.8 INLETS OF STORAGE TANKS (DOUBLE BLOCK & BLEED VALVES) ........ 145
11.3.9 VALVES MOTORIZATIONS ............................................................................ 146
11.3.10 OPERATION SEQUENCIES AND MODES ................................................... 149
11.3.11 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM .............................................................................. 152
11.3.12 EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT ................................................................. 159
11.3.13 GENERAL ELECTRICAL MODIFICATIONS ................................................. 160

3
12 CONTRACT DESIGN PHILOSOPY ............................................................................ 167
12.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 167
12.2 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING CRITERIA .............................................................. 167
12.2.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 167
12.2.2 EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................... 168
12.2.3 OPERATIONS ................................................................................................. 169
12.2.4 PLANT CONTROL SYSTEMS IN JOCL, MPL AND JOCL TERMINALS ........ 169
12.2.5 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 170
13 DESIGN AND DETAIL ENGINEERING ...................................................................... 171
13.1 FEED ENGINEERING VALIDATION ...................................................................... 171
13.2 HAZARD AND OPERABILITY ANALYSIS (HAZOP) ............................................. 172
13.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE......................................................................................... 173
13.4 DETAILED ENGINEERING .................................................................................... 173
13.4.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ...................................................................... 173
13.4.2 ENGINEERING EXECUTION PLAN ................................................................ 174
13.4.3 SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................. 174
13.4.4 CONSTRUCTION SITE SURVEYS .................................................................. 174
13.4.5 DOCUMENTATION IDENTIFICATION AND FOLLOW UP SYSTEM .............. 174
13.4.6 PLOT PLANS .................................................................................................. 175
13.4.7 PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS ............................................. 175
13.4.8 EQUIPMENT LISTS ......................................................................................... 176
13.4.9 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND DATA SHEETS .......................... 176
13.4.10 ROTATING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................... 177
13.4.11 EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANTS ............................................................... 177
13.4.12 PACKAGED EQUIPMENT ............................................................................. 178
13.4.13 PIPING ........................................................................................................... 178
13.4.14 CIVIL / STRUCTURAL / ARCHITECTURAL .................................................. 179
13.4.15 PLANT ELEVATIONS AND BENCHMARKS ................................................. 180
13.4.16 GEOTECHNICAL STUDY .............................................................................. 180
13.4.17 SITE PREPARATION..................................................................................... 181
13.4.18 DRAINAGE .................................................................................................... 181
13.4.19 PILING ........................................................................................................... 181
13.4.20 TRENCHES .................................................................................................... 181
13.4.21 CONCRETE PAVING OF PROCESS AREAS ............................................... 182
13.4.22 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS AND STRUCTURES .............. 182
13.4.23 STRUCTURAL DESIGN ................................................................................ 182
13.4.24 STRUCTURAL STEEL................................................................................... 182
13.4.25 STEEL STRUCTURES................................................................................... 183
13.4.26 PAINTING AND COATING ............................................................................ 183
13.5 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS ................................................ 183
13.5.1 FIRE AND GAS DETECTION SYSTEM........................................................... 184
13.5.2 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION ........................................................................... 184

4
 13.5.3 FIELD INSTRUMENT ROOMS ........................................................................ 185
13.5.4 DRAWINGS AND OTHER DOCUMENTATION ............................................... 185
13.5.5 CALCULATIONS ............................................................................................. 186
13.6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 187
13.6.1 POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION/METERING/CONTROL/ALARM AND
MONITORING ................................................................................................ 188
13.6.2 ENGINEERING DESIGN CALCULATIONS ..................................................... 189
13.6.3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS CODES, STANDARDS AND
DOCUMENTATION ........................................................................................ 189
13.6.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ASSEMBLY STANDARDS ............................ 189
13.6.5 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT NUMBERING SYSTEM ...................................... 190
13.7 DELIVERABLES TYPICAL LIST............................................................................ 190
14 PROCUREMENT ACTIVITIES .................................................................................... 192
14.1 MATERIALS SUPPLY, LOADING, SHIPPING AND UNLOADING. ....................... 192
14.2 PROCUREMENT MANAGEMENT ......................................................................... 192
14.3 MATERIALS INSPECTIONS .................................................................................. 194
15 CONSTRUCTION........................................................................................................ 195
15.1 ENVIRONMENTAL, SAFETY, AND HEALTH ........................................................ 195
15.2 CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES ....................................................... 195
15.3 INSPECTION .......................................................................................................... 197
15.4 CONTRACTOR TEAM ........................................................................................... 197
16 MECHANICAL COMPLETION, PRE-COMMISSIONING, COMMISSIONING &
START UP .................................................................................................................. 198
16.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 198
16.2 DEFINITIONS ......................................................................................................... 198
16.2.1 SYSTEM .......................................................................................................... 198
16.2.2 SUBSYSTEM ................................................................................................... 199
16.2.3 SYSTEM PACKAGE........................................................................................ 199
16.2.4 SYSTEM PRE-COMMISSIONING ................................................................... 199
16.2.5 FUNCTIONAL TESTS ..................................................................................... 199
16.3 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PHASES OF COMPLETION ..................................... 199
16.4 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION, SEQUENCING AND TRACKING .............................. 200
16.4.1 DEVELOPMENT OF SYSTEM PACKAGES ................................................... 200
16.4.2 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND SEQUENCING ............................................ 201
16.4.3 DEFINITION OF SUBSYSTEMS ..................................................................... 201
16.4.4 ENGINEERING DRAWINGS MARK UPS ........................................................ 202
16.4.5 ENGINEERING DRAWING DATA ................................................................... 202
16.5 SYSTEM COMPLETION SCHEDULING ................................................................ 203
16.6 SYSTEM PACKAGE IDENTIFICATION AND PREPARATION .............................. 204
16.7 SYSTEM PACKAGE PROGRESSING ................................................................... 205
16.8 CONTRACT MASTER PUNCH LIST ...................................................................... 206
16.8.1 SYSTEM PUNCH LIST .................................................................................... 206

5
 16.8.2 PREPARATION OF PUNCH LISTS ................................................................. 206
16.8.3 REVIEW OF PUNCH LISTS ............................................................................ 207
16.9 MECHANICAL COMPLETION ............................................................................... 207
16.9.1 SYSTEM MECHANICAL COMPLETION ......................................................... 208
16.9.2 NOTICE OF SYSTEM MECHANICAL COMPLETION ..................................... 209
16.9.3 NOTICE OF TERMINAL MECHANICAL COMPLETION ................................. 210
16.10 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................ 210
16.10.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 210
16.10.2 READY FOR TERMINAL COMMISSIONING ................................................. 211
16.10.3 DOCUMENTATION........................................................................................ 211
16.10.4 COMMISSIONING CREW .............................................................................. 212
16.10.5 COMMISSIONING PHASES .......................................................................... 213
16.10.6 UTILITIES / CONSUMABLES ........................................................................ 213
16.11 START UP ............................................................................................................ 214
16.11.1 READY FOR START UP ................................................................................ 214
16.11.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .................................... 215
16.11.3 START UP PHASE ........................................................................................ 215
16.11.4 START UP AND INITIAL OPERATION ......................................................... 215
16.11.5 START UP ACTIVITIES ................................................................................. 216
16.11.6 START-UP CERTIFICATE ............................................................................. 217
16.11.7 OUTSTANDING WORK ................................................................................. 217
16.12 RELIABILITY RUN ............................................................................................... 218
16.13 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TESTS .............................................................. 219
16.13 1 DETAIL PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST PROTOCOL ....................... 219
16.14 PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE ............................................................................ 220
16.15 TERMINAL HAND OVER ..................................................................................... 220
16.16 FINAL ACCEPTANCE.......................................................................................... 220
16.17 WORKS AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE .............................................................. 221
16.18 DECOMMISSIONING MANUAL ........................................................................... 222
17 CONSTRUCTABILITY ................................................................................................ 223
17.1 CONSTRUCTABILITY PROGRAM ........................................................................ 223
17.2 HEAVY LIFT AND TRANSPORTATION PLAN ...................................................... 223
18 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT ............................................................................. 224
19 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ................................................................................... 225
19.1 PRELIMINARY WORKS AND CIVIL WORKS........................................................ 225
19.1.1 DEMOLITIONS ................................................................................................ 225
19.1.2 FOUNDATIONS AND SOIL MOVEMENTS ..................................................... 225
19.1.3 CONTROL ROOM AND CONTROL ACCESS BUILDINGS ............................ 226
19.1.4 PUMPS’ BUILDINGS FOR THE FIRE EXTINCTION SYSTEM ....................... 226
19.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTING .................................................................................. 226
19.3 PIPE SUPPORTS ................................................................................................... 227
19.4 MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................................................. 227

6
 19.5 FACILITIES AND ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT ........................................................... 227
19.5.1 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM IN 400V .................................................... 227
19.5.2 UPS SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 228
19.5.3 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR ELECTRIC ASSEMBLY.................................. 228
19.5.4 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM ........................................... 229
19.5.5 GROUNDING SYSTEM ................................................................................... 230
19.5.6 PROTECTION AGAINST ATMOSPHERIC DISCHARGES ............................. 230
19.6 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL .................................................................. 230
19.6.1 FIRE & GAS SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 231
19.6.2 SECURITY INTEGRATED SYSTEM (SIS) ...................................................... 231
19.6.3 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PCS) ........................................................... 231
19.6.4 TERMINAL MANAGER SYSTEM (TMS) ......................................................... 232
19.6.5 INVENTORY TANK SYSTEM (ITS) ................................................................. 232
19.6.6 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING SYSTEM (ERP) ................................ 233
19.6.7 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ........................................................................ 233
19.7 MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY ................................................................................... 234
19.7.1 PROJECT STRATEGIES FOR CONSTRUCTION AND ASSEMBLY ............. 234
19.7.2 EXECUTION OF CIVIL WORK ACTIVITIES .................................................... 234
19.7.3 FEATURES OF THE EXECUTION OF MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY ............... 235
19.8 ORGANIZATION OF PREFABRICATION AND MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY ........ 235
19.8.1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................... 235
19.8.2 ASSEMBLY CONSIDERATIONS .................................................................... 236
20 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE OWNER STAFF TRAINING ACTIVITIES .......... 238
20.1 PERSONNEL TRAINING PLAN ............................................................................. 238
20.1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................ 238
20.1.2 TRAINING PACKAGES ................................................................................... 239
20.1.3 TARGET AUDIENCE ....................................................................................... 242
21 MAINTENANCE AND MATERIAL STOCK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS .................... 243
21.1 MATERIAL STOCK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ...................................................... 243
21.2 MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ........................................................... 243

7
 FIGURE INDEX

FIGURE 1 –TERMINALS LOCATION ..................................................................................15

FIGURE 2-EXISTING AND PROPOSED RAIL TANK LOADING FACILITY IN PADMA
TERMINAL...........................................................................................................................75
FIGURE 3 – MONITORING TANKS.....................................................................................91
FIGURE 4 - FLAME DETECTOR SPACING ........................................................................92
FIGURE 5- EXISTING AND PROPOSED RAIL WAGON LOADING FACILITY IN MEGHNA
TERMINAL.........................................................................................................................108
FIGURE 7- MONITORING TANKS ....................................................................................124
FIGURE 8- FLAME DETECTOR SPACING .......................................................................125
FIGURE 9- EXISTING AND PROPOSED RAIL WAGON LOADING FACILITY IN JAMUNA
TERMINAL.........................................................................................................................140
FIGURE 10- MONITORING TANKS WITH TWO DTS INSTRUMENTS FOR FULL
REDUNDANCY ..................................................................................................................156
FIGURE 11-FLAME DETECTOR SPACING ......................................................................157
FIGURE 12- RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PHASES ..........................................................200

8
TABLE INDEX

TABLE 1 - PADMA TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS ...........................................................20

TABLE 2 – PADMA TERMINAL PUMPS............................................................................21
TABLE 3 – MEGHNA NORTH TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS ..........................................34
TABLE 4 – MEGHNA NORTH TERMINAL PUMPS ............................................................36
TABLE 5- MEGHNA SOUTH TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS ............................................39
TABLE 6– MEGHNA SOUTH TERMINAL PUMPS .............................................................41
TABLE 7- JAMUNA TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS ..........................................................52
TABLE 8- JAMUNA TERMINAL PUMPS ............................................................................55
TABLE 9- TANK TRUCK LOADING - PADMA....................................................................72
TABLE 10- RAIL TANK LOADING – PADMA .....................................................................74
TABLE 11- BARREL LOADING – PADMA ........................................................................76
TABLE 12- MESUREMENT MODELS ................................................................................85
TABLE 13- FOAM CHAMBERS FOR TANKS .....................................................................89
TABLE 14- SEAL TYPES FOR TANKS...............................................................................90
TABLE 15- TANK TRUCK LOADING – MEGHNA SOUTH & NORTH ..............................105
TABLE 16– BARREL LOADING – MEGHNA SOUTH BARREL LOADING – MEGHNA
SOUTH ..............................................................................................................................109
TABLE 17- MESUREMENT MODELS ..............................................................................117
TABLE 18- FOAM CHAMBERS FOR TANKS ...................................................................122
TABLE 19- SEAL TYPES FOR TANKS.............................................................................123
TABLE 20- TANK TRUCK LOADING - JAMUNA ............................................................138
TABLE 21- BARREL LOADING – JAMUNA .....................................................................141
TABLE 22– MESUREMENT MODELS ..............................................................................149
TABLE 23- FOAM CHAMBERS FOR TANKS ..................................................................154
TABLE 24– SEAL TYPES FOR TANKS ............................................................................155

9
1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE

Padma Oil Company Limited (POCL), a Subsidiary of Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation

(BPC), is developing a project for the automation of the Main Installations/Terminals of three
Oil marketing Companies: Padma Oil Company Ltd (POCL), Meghna Petroleum Ltd (MPL)
and Jamuna Oil Company (JOCL) situated at Patenga, Chattogram, Bangladesh. These
companies are subsidiaries of Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation.

At this time, the level of automation of the three terminals is low and the project aims to
increase the level of automation at these Terminals.

The object of this document the scope of work and the basic requirements for the Design,
Procurement, Construction, Pre-commissioning, Commissioning and Start Up assistance of a
project for the automation of the Main Installations/Terminals of three Oil marketing
Companies: Padma Oil Company Ltd (POCL), Meghna Petroleum Ltd (MPL) and Jamuna Oil
Company (JOCL) situated at Patenga, Chattogram, Bangladesh, and to provide the basic
instructions, standards, procedures and other requirements for the execution of the work to
be performed by CONTRACTOR.

No deviation from the Technical Conditions described in this document and the Technical
Specifications described in the OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION shall proceed without
prior written approval from OWNER.

10
2 DEFINITIONS

CLIENT: Padma Oil Company Limited (POCL)

PMC (PROJECT Técnicas Reunidas (TR).

MANAGEMENT CONSULTING):

PROJECT: Automation of Main Installations of Three Oil Marketing

Companies (POCL, MPL and JOCL).

CONTRACTOR: EPC CONTRACTOR

POCL: Padma Oil Company Ltd

MPL: Meghna Petroleum Ltd

JOCL: Jamuna Oil Company Ltd

11
3 OVERALL PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The basic operation of these Main Installations/ Terminals is to receive, store & dispatch
various types and grades of petroleum products (Gasoline/SKO/Jet A-1/HSD/JBO/HSFO and
others).

The petroleum products are received in the Storage Tanks from Import Tankers, Inland
Tankers Eastern Refinery Limited (ERL) through pipeline & SPM (On going project), Tank
Wagons, Tank Trucks, Drums or its combination, and distributed through Tankers, Tank
Wagons, and Tank Trucks.

The Chattogram installation is the main plant of the Marketing Company. The Company has
also a depot network all over the country. A big part of the delivery operations are internal
movements. Barges and rail wagon tanks are used to transport the oil products from
Chattogram installation to another storage and distribution installations (depots).

The Padma Oil Company Ltd (POCL) Terminal has 52 (Fifty-two) storage tanks with a total
nominal storage capacity of 176,766 m3. At present a Radar Type Auto Tank Gauging
system has been installed in 29 (Twenty-nine) of the storage tanks of this Terminal.

The Meghna Petroleum Ltd (MPL) Terminal has 15 (Fifteen) storage tanks where 2 (Two) out
of order at the North Terminal with a total nominal storage capacity of 45,632 m 3, and 19
(Nineteen) storage tanks at the South Terminal with a total nominal storage capacity of
122,859 m3. At present a Radar Type Auto Tank Gauging system has been installed in 11
(Eleven) storage tanks at the North Terminal and 14 (Fourteen) at the South Terminal.

The Jamuna Oil Company Ltd (JOCL) Terminal has 20 (Twenty) storage tanks with a total
nominal storage capacity of 121,211 m3. At present a Radar Type Auto Tank Gauging
system has been installed in 15 (Fifteen) of the storage tanks of this Terminal.

The activities which shall be controlled by the terminal automation system are:

a) Receipt of Petroleum products from import tankers, ERL, and Single Point Mooring (SPM)
pipeline.

b) Tank Truck Loading/Unloading

c) Tank Truck Entry/Exit & Access Control

d) Tank Wagon Loading and Unloading

e) Inland Tanker Loading and Unloading

f) Tank Farm Management including auto gauging

12
g) Pump House Operations

h) Fire Fighting & Jockey Pump Operation

i) Fire Alarm system

j) Management Information System

k) ERP interface, Terminal Security and Vehicle Tracking System

l) Effluent Treatment Plant

The abbreviations for the products are:

 MS MOGAS Regular. Motor gasoline
 HOBC MOGAS Premium. High Octane Blending Component
 SKO Superior Kerosene Oil
 HSD High Speed Diesel
 HSFO High Sulfur Furnace Oil
 JET A-1 Kerosene for aviation jet engines.
 SBPS Special Boiling Point Solvent.
 MTT Mineral Turpentine.
 LDO Light Diesel Oil.
 JBO Jute Batching Oil.

13
4 LANGUAGE

The official spoken language in Bangladesh is Bengali. Documents issued for Authorities
approval shall be submitted in English.
The Project official language shall be English.

14
5 PROJECT LOCATION

The Padma Oil Company Ltd Terminal (POCL), Jamuna Oil Company Ltd Terminal (JOCL)
and Meghna Petroleum Ltd Terminal (MPL), are located on the bank of the Karnaphuli River
in Chittagong Port Area at Patenga. The Terminals location are shown below:

FIGURE 1 –TERMINALS LOCATION

Source: TR

The access to the Terminals is done from the airport road in the area that runs near the
Karnaphuli River.

Meteorology Conditions:

The climate at Terminals site is tropical with seasonal variation in temperature. Normal
maximum air temperature is 32.3 ºC. (Source: Bangladesh meteorological department).

Barometric Pressure

- Average: Atmospheric

15
- Design Maximum: 1015 mbar

- Design Minimum: 1001 mbar

Ambient Temperature

- Maximum: 55 ºC

- Minimum: 5 ºC

Relative Humidity (RH)

- Maximum RH: 85 %

- Minimum RH: 70 %

Wind

- Direction of prevailing wind: SE (21%) and S (20%)

- Maximum Velocity: 40 km / hr (mean)

- Design Maximum Velocity: 260 km / h as per BNBC (Bangladesh National Building Code)

Rainfall

- Average Yearly Rainfall: 5 - 190 mm/yr (January to April and October to December)

263 - 733 mm/yr (May to September)

- Design Rainfall Intensity: 800 mm/yr

Seismic Load

- Earthquake zone (as per BNBC): Zone 2

- Zone coefficient: 0.15

16
6 PROPERTIES OF THE PETROLEUM PRODUCTS

24020-JAM-P-IN-00
In documents 24020-JAM-P-IN-002 Process description JOCL,
2-00 Process Description JOCL.pdf

24020-MEG-P-IN-00
24020-MEG-P-IN-0022-00 Process Description MPL.pdf
Process description MPL and 24020-

24020-PAD-P-IN-00
PAD-P-IN-0022-00 Process Process description POCL (included in Section 6.
Description POCL.pdf

Employer’s Requirements, item 6.6.2 FEED that is part of sub-section 6.6 Supplementary
Information of this ITB) are the main properties of the petroleum products, provided by Client.

17
7 DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING SYSTEM

7.1 POCL

7.1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The description below is based on the information gathered on the visit to the plant, the data
collection of local collaborators and the information provided by the Client.

The Padma Oil Company Ltd (POCL) Terminal receives product from the LJ-5, DOJ-5, and
DOJ-6 & DOJ-7 Jetty: (JET A-1/HSD/SKO/MS/HSFO/LSFO), from the Eastern Refinery
Limited (ERL) through pipeline: (HOBC/SKO/MS/HSD/JET A-1/FO/JBO/MTT).

There are 52 storage tanks and 5 Pump Houses with a total of 34 pumps to transfer the
products from the storage tanks to the different delivery points such as DOJ-6, DOJ-5 &
DOJ-7, LJ-5, Rail Wagons, Tank Trucks and Drums.

7.1.2 PROCESS

7.1.2.1 RECEPTION
The products handled at the POCL are received through pipelines as follows:

 JET A-1 from DOJ-6 (ø 12” pipeline)

 HSD/SKO/MS from DOJ-6/DOJ-5/DOJ-7 (ø 12” pipeline)

 FO from DOJ-6 (ø 12” pipeline)

 FO from DOJ-5 (ø 12” pipeline)

 HSD from DOJ-6 (LIGHTER) (ø 12” pipeline)

 HSD from Single Point Mooring (SPM) (One 18” ø)

 JET A-1 from refinery (ø 6” & 8” pipelines)

 MS from refinery (ø 6” pipeline)

 SKO from refinery (ø 6”/8” pipeline)

 HSD from refinery (ø 6”/8” pipeline)

 FO from refinery (ø 8”/12” pipeline)

 HOBC from refinery (ø 6” pipeline)

 JBO from refinery (ø 4”/6” pipeline)

18
7.1.2.2 STORAGE TANKS
The Padma Oil Company Ltd (POCL) Terminal has 52 storage tanks with a total nominal
storage capacity of 176,766 m3:

 Twelve storage tanks for JET A-1: T-011, T-041, T-042, T-043, T-052, T-054, T-056,
T-057, T-058, T-061, T-081 and T-082.

 Three storage tanks for HOBC: T-021, T-031, T-046 and T-104.

 Five storage tanks for MS: T-022, T-033, T-103, T-105 and T-106.

 Thirteen storage tanks for HSD: T-032, T-044, T-045, T-062, T-063, T-064, T-065, T-
075, T-092, T-093, T-201, T-202 and T-203.

 Five storage tanks for Regular SKO & White SKO: T-051, T-053, T-083, T-084 and T-
085.

 Three storage tanks for MTT: T-034, T-087 and T-088.

 Two storage tanks for JBO: T-055 and T-086.

 Four storage tanks for FO: T-066, T-071, T-078 and T-079.

 Two storage tanks for SBPS: T-101 and T-102.

 Two storage tanks for LDO: T-141 and T-142; LDO product is not now in production
at ERL.

The general characteristics of the storage tanks at the POCL Terminal are shown in the table
below:

19
 TABLE 1 - PADMA TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS
PADMA OIL COMPANY STORAGE TANKS
LICENSE RADAR
HEIGHT NOMINAL CAPACITY TYPE OF ROOF GAUGING
PRODUCT TANK Nº DIAMETER (m)
(m) CAPACITY (m3) (m3) PADMA TANK TYPE SYSTEM
Info (Y/N)
JET A-1 011 29,265 12,031 8093 8186 VERTICAL Fixed NO
JET A-1 041 25,603 9,867 5080 5164 VERTICAL Fixed YES
JET A-1 042 25,609 9,756 5025 5649 VERTICAL Fixed YES
JET A-1 043 17,819 8,530 2127 2118 VERTICAL Fixed YES
JET A-1 052 26,220 8,942 4828 4855 VERTICAL Fixed YES
JET A-1 054 19,486 9,755 2909 2974 VERTICAL Fixed YES
JET A-1 056 23,764 8,500 3770 3762 VERTICAL Fixed YES
JET A-1 057 23,743 8,610 3812 3811 VERTICAL Fixed YES
JET A-1 058 31,089 9,740 7394 7468 VERTICAL Fixed YES
JET A-1 061 25,559 9,820 5038 5130 VERTICAL Fixed YES
JET A-1 081 3,901 12,040 144 146 HORIZONTAL _ NO
JET A-1 082 3,901 12,040 144 146 HORIZONTAL _ NO

HOBC 021 11,179 8,330 818 810 VERTICAL Fixed YES

HOBC 031 17,065 10,340 2365 2352 VERTICAL EFR YES
HOBC 046 25,559 9,930 5095 5112 VERTICAL IFR YES
HOBC 104 2,725 8,689 51 50 HORIZONTAL _ NO

MS 022 11,777 10,137 1104 869 VERTICAL Fixed YES

MS 033 25,576 8,190 4208 5023 VERTICAL IFR YES
MS 103 3,886 12,043 143 143 HORIZONTAL _ NO
MS 105 2,735 8,689 51 50 HORIZONTAL _ NO
MS 106 2,818 8,689 54 50 HORIZONTAL _ NO

HSD 032 17,070 9,850 2254 2167 VERTICAL EFR YES

HSD 044 23,780 10,033 4456 4510 VERTICAL EFR YES
HSD 045 23,780 10,248 4551 4510 VERTICAL EFR YES
HSD 062 25,142 9,340 4637 5010 VERTICAL Fixed YES
HSD 063 25,147 9,790 4862 4849 VERTICAL Fixed YES
HSD 064 25,305 9,909 4983 4974 VERTICAL Fixed YES
HSD 065 32,012 9,779 7871 7970 VERTICAL Fixed YES
HSD 075 41,145 9,755 12970 12968 VERTICAL Fixed YES
HSD 092 6,082 4,640 135 135 VERTICAL Fixed NO
HSD 093 6,098 4,650 136 140 VERTICAL Fixed NO
HSD 201 36,853 12,165 12976 13139 VERTICAL Fixed NO
HSD 202 31,056 13,643 10335 10456 VERTICAL Fixed NO
HSD 203 36,805 12,260 13044 13361 VERTICAL Fixed NO

WHITE SKO 051 17,784 9,299 2310 2337 VERTICAL Fixed YES
SKO 053 21,349 9,424 3374 3368 VERTICAL Fixed YES
SKO 083 3,887 12,040 143 150 HORIZONTAL _ NO
SKO 084 3,887 12,040 143 150 HORIZONTAL _ NO
SKO 085 3,887 12,040 143 150 HORIZONTAL _ NO

MTT 034 17,070 9,540 2183 2210 VERTICAL Floating YES

MTT 087 2,740 8,690 51 47 HORIZONTAL _ NO
MTT 088 2,740 8,690 51 47 HORIZONTAL _ NO

JBO 055 18,598 8,131 2209 2350 VERTICAL Fixed YES

JBO 086 2,740 8,690 51 50 HORIZONTAL _ NO

FO 066 25,180 9,915 4937 4524 VERTICAL Fixed YES

FO 071 17,840 8,740 2185 2179 VERTICAL Fixed YES
FO 078 12,292 10,950 1299 1299 VERTICAL Fixed YES
FO 079 31,017 12,290 9286 9436 VERTICAL Fixed NO

SBPS 101 3,860 12,040 141 142 HORIZONTAL _ NO

SBPS 102 3,860 12,040 141 142 HORIZONTAL _ NO

LDO 141 5,340 4,020 90 85 VERTICAL Fixed NO

LDO 142 3,810 3,990 45 43 VERTICAL Fixed NO
TOTAL CAPACITY 174246 176766

Source: TR

20
7.1.2.3 PUMP HOUSE

The Padma Oil Terminal has 3 Pump Houses and two Pump Station with a total of 34 pumps
to handle the different products for the following mode of operations:

(a) Product recirculation;

(b) Product inter-tank transfer;

(c) Product storage tank to jetty;

(d) Product loading from storage tanks to rail wagon;

(e) Product loading from storage tanks to tank trucks;

(f) Product unloading from tank trucks to storage tanks

(g) Product tank stripping to other tank. Stripping is done by installing a portable pump
beside the tank.

(h) Product unloading from Rail wagon to storage tank, ERL tanks.

The pumps are associated to the different pump houses and products as shown in the Table
below:

TABLE 2 – PADMA TERMINAL PUMPS

PADMA TERMINAL - PUMPS

PUMP FLOW MOTOR

POCL PRESSURE
HOUSE PUMP PUMP TYPE FLUID RATE POWER RPM MODEL
NUMBER HEAD (m)
Nº (m3/h) (Kw)

TD 80-315
P-001 SNº15 Centrifugal WHITE SKO 30 120 15 1470
15/4

P-002 SNº1 Centrifugal SKO -- -- 29,84 2945 ETA 100-20

P-003 SNº2 Centrifugal SKO -- -- 11,2 2900 B284

P-004 SNº3 Centrifugal SKO -- -- 11,2 2900 B284

CN80C-160
1 P-005 SNº4 Centrifugal JET A-1 -- -- 11,2 2900
G1M2L3

P-006 SNº5 Centrifugal JET A-1 -- -- 29,84 -- --

JOHNSON
P-007 SNº6 Centrifugal JET A-1 35 230 29,84 2960
PUMP
CN100-200
P-008 SNº7 Centrifugal HSD 30 180 18,65 2920
G1M2L3
CN80C-160
P-009 SNº8 Centrifugal HSD 40 300 45 2955
G1M2L3

21
PADMA TERMINAL - PUMPS

PUMP FLOW MOTOR

POCL PRESSURE
HOUSE PUMP PUMP TYPE FLUID RATE POWER RPM MODEL
NUMBER HEAD (m)
Nº (m3/h) (Kw)

SFI 150*125-
P-010 SNº9 Centrifugal HSD -- 300 29,84 2940
218

P-011 SNº10 Centrifugal HSD -- -- 11,2 2900 ETA 100-206

P-012 SNº11 Centrifugal HSD 40 200 30 2960 3D6-5121776

ISFL-
P-013 SNº12 Centrifugal LDO 40 200 18,65 2960
125*100-200

P-014 SNº13 Centrifugal MTT -- -- 11 -- CN80C-160

P-015 SNº14 Centrifugal JBO -- -- 11,19 2900 3D6-5121785

P-001 SNº7 Centrifugal HOBC -- -- 15 -- --

W-EF200LN
P-002 SNº6 Centrifugal HOBC 30 50 l/s 30 1450 TD125 315
30/4

P-003 SNº5 Centrifugal MS 30 108 11 2900 A-EF160MA

P-004 SNº4 Centrifugal SBPS -- -- 9,32 2935 XLK6

2
TD65-200
P-005 SNº3 Centrifugal MS 60 120 30 2960
30/2
TD80-315
P-006 SNº2 Centrifugal HOBC 30 120 15 1470
50/4

P-007 SNº1 Centrifugal MS -- -- 37 2950 RYAX F80/26

P-008 -- Centrifugal HOBC -- -- -- -- --

CN 100-200
P-001 -- Centrifugal HSD 41 -- 29,84 2900
G1M2L3

P-002 -- Screw HSFO 40 -- 30 -- 170E

P-003 -- Screw HSFO 40 -- 33,57 -- 170E

P-004 -- Screw HSFO -- -- 9,32 1460 460/287 946

3
SFL 150*125-
P-005 -- Centrifugal HSD 40 300 45 2965
218 45/2
SFL 150*125-
P-006 -- Centrifugal HSD 40 300 45 2965
218 45/2

P-007 -- Screw HSFO -- 297 75 1485 VN9RSPK

P-008 -- Screw HSFO -- 297 75 1470 VN9RSPK

Unloading
4 P-XXX -- Centrifugal MS -- -- -- --
Prover

22
PADMA TERMINAL - PUMPS

PUMP FLOW MOTOR

POCL PRESSURE
HOUSE PUMP PUMP TYPE FLUID RATE POWER RPM MODEL
NUMBER HEAD (m)
Nº (m3/h) (Kw)

Unloading
P-XXX -- Centrifugal MS -- -- -- --
Prover
Unloading
5 P-1103 -- Centrifugal MS -- -- -- --
Wagon

Source: TR

7.1.2.4 LOADING SYSTEM

Tank Truck/Rail Car Loading General Description

The loading of liquid fuels and products to trucks and rail cars are simultaneous, this means
more than one truck and rail car loading can be in operation at the same time and loading the
same product.

The number of loading pumps in operation, and the maximum number of loading arms and
hoses of a given product in simultaneous operation will depend on the simultaneity of
operations.

Tank Truck Loading Stations

At the moment, there are 3 different Tank Truck Loading Stations, equipped with top loading
and bottom loading (only for Jet A-1) hoses. One is dedicated for HSFO, another one is
dedicated for White SKO and the rest one is used for multiproduct: JET A-1, HOBC, MS,
HSD and JBO. Each of the bays can accommodate 4 tank trucks (HSFO and JET A-1), two
in the right side of the bay and the other two on the left side, 2 tank trucks (SKO) one in the
right side of the bay and the other one in the left side.

The forecast tank truck loading for the different products will be as indicated:

 Two loading points for JET A-1 (bottom loading)

 Eleven top loading points for HSD

 One top loading points for MS

 Three top loading points for HOBC

 Two top loading points for MTT

 One top loading point for SKO

23
  Four top loading points for WHITE SKO

 Six top loading points for HSFO

For more details see drawings 24020-PAD-T-DW-004-00-S1 to S7 Padma Truck Loading

Zones Details (included in Section 7).

Tank Truck Unloading Station

On the site visit an unloading point was identified (which we have called PH4) that included:

 Two hoses,

 Two pumps (one to send the product to the tank prover tank (18000 L) and another
one to send the product to the storage tanks at tank farm,

 One tank with a capacity of 18000 L.

This unloading point can transfer product from the tank trucks to the storage tanks. The
product handled is MS.

The forecast tank truck bottom unloading will be as indicated:

 One bottom unloading point for SPBS

 Two bottom unloading point for MS

 One bottom unloading point for HOBC

 One bottom unloading point for MTT

 One bottom unloading point for HSD

For more details see drawing 24020-PAD-T-DW-004-00-S1 to S7 Padma Truck Loading

Zones Details (included in Section 7).

Rail Car Loading Station

At present, the oil products rail car loading facility consists of two (2) loading bays (islands)
with a double side loading option. Hence, a total of four (4) rail cars can be connected to the
loading hoses at the same time. The first loading bay is equipped with top loading hoses for
the loading of HSFO, SKO, HSD, MS and HOBC, and the second loading bay is equipped
with top loading hoses for the loading of HSFO, HSD and for bottom loading Jet A-1.

For the wagon given the different dimensions of the wagons the best solution is to keep the
existing hoses. For Jet A-1 the loading is bottom loading.

24
Rail Car Unloading Station

On the site visit an unloading point was identified (which we have called PH5) that included:

 Two hoses,

 One pump (P-1103) to send the product to the tank farm/ERL.

This unloading point can transfer product from the Rail Wagon Tanks to the storage tanks.
The product handled is MS for POCL and condensate is also pumped to ERL.

This unloading point shall remain unchanged.

Ship/Barge Loading from Storage Tanks

At the POCL Terminal the following products are loaded to ships/barges:

a) DOJ-6: HSD, JET A-1, HSFO & LSFO (max. 0.5%)

b) LJ-5: All products. Additionally Bunkering operations are done with HSD and HSFO.

Drums Loading Station

At present, loading of Drums (MS, HOBC and SPBS) is done at the Tank Truck Loading
Station close to the Jet A-1 loading gantry (at Petrol Depot)

Barrel Filling Station

There is a Barrel Filling Station, where the following products are loaded: HSD, SKO and
MTT. When two different products (HSD and SKO) is loaded at same tank lorry in different
compartment, then the products are loaded at this barrel filling station. Besides MTT is
delivered to both drum and tank lorry.

The forecast barrel loading facility will be as indicated:

 Two top loading points for MS

 Two top loading points for HOBC

 Seven top loading points for HSD

 One top loading points for SKO

 One top loading point for LDO

 One top loading point for MTT

 One top loading point for HSFO

 One top loading point for SPBS

25
For more details see drawing 24020-PAD-T-DW-004-00-S1 to S7 Padma Truck Loading
Zones Details (included in Section 7).

7.1.3 ELECTRICITY

The actual electrical distribution system basically consists of a network that includes, among
others, the following voltage level and equipment:

- 11 kV Medium Voltage Switchgears (MVSG).

- 11/0.4 kV Power transformers.

- 400/220V Low Voltage Switchgear (LVSG) and MCC.

- Starter panels (MCC) near the motors in Pump House.

- Emergency Diesel Generators.

- The rated frequency is 50 Hz.

- Maximum short circuit current ≤ 50 kA.

There is no Distributed Control System (DCS) in the plant so all the valves are manual.

Distribution cables to motors, from LVSG to starter panels, and from starter panels to motors,
are non-armoured cables introduced into metal tubes, seals, reductions, etc.

The known motor starter systems are the following:

- Star-delta (Y-Δ).

- DOL (Direct on Line).

Presently most of the motor starters are old and oil circuit breaker type cannot be a part of
automation and must be replaced. A few of such starters are not flameproof. The space
between the pumping sets row and the starters’ row is very narrow for work safety and ease
of carrying out maintenance work.

7.1.4 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL

7.1.4.1 General
From the point of view of Instrumentation & Control, the Inventory Tank system is the only
automated system found in the plant. The main purpose of the Inventory system is to have a
balance of product in each Tank of the Terminal, but there is not a global mass balance of
the plant, which should be a correlation of the input, output and storage of the products.

26
In general, it was observed that most of the equipment available in the Terminal does not
have an immediate capability to be integrated in a Control System to allow the coordinate
control of sequence and the Terminal asset management.

 The existing Flow Metering have only local indication of the volume that’s is being
transferred. The automated registration and control of the Mass Balance, and the
possibility to contrast inputs and outputs of the plant are not possible at this time.

 Flow meters have been installed in some of the reception lines from the ships, only
for manual operation. The existing Flow meters do not have the capability to be
integrated in the third party systems, in order to have remote supervision, database
recording for generating reports, tables and contrast of data.

 The existence of a flow measurement system for fiscal purpose was not identified to
contrast the volumes of loading/unloading, delivery and combined inventory tank:

 No Metering point in the loading arms for dispatching.

 No Motorized valves to be included in a safety control sequence to close valve

in case of emergency to avoid a risk situation for people, plant and nearest
environment.

 No Smart instruments are located in pipes, pumps and some if the tanks, so
the stage and condition of the products cannot be correctly supervised, to
identify over or under-pressure, thermal expansion, real flow or leak detection.
This type of instrumentation will be necessary at the three main Terminal
processes:

o Production Reception, so the plant could be protected in case of

overpressure, closing valves, pipes leakage or incorrect operation, out of
procedure.

o Product Storage to know the general operation and safety conditions the
process.

o Product Delivery, from the Tanks to the delivery points, such as trucks,
railway wagons, tankers and barges.

 All the valves installed in the plant are manually operated, without limit switches.
Theses valves are not prepared to be connected to be a Control System, and not
ready to be integrated in an automatic operation. The general operator procedures
need the remote voice communication amongst the operators on site, in order to

27
 coordinate the alignment of valves, pumps, tanks and loading arms. The current
tracking for product in the plant need is only recorded on paper and the coordination
of the operations is made by remote voice communication between the operators.

 Pump Systems are controlled manually by the operator, from the local control station
closed to the own pump, with only start/stop push bottom, but no local indicator lamps
are available to check the real state of the current action.

 No Control Systems have been installed in the plant. The Operation is manual only,
for ordinary or basic process control, for Safety Sequences and for detection of Fire
and gas leakage.

 No HMI or Scada has been installed, to allow the remote supervision, operation and
control.

 The Access Control system is a manual operation for identification of the pedestrian,
cars, trucks and drivers through identification cards readers, and there are no
barriers, lights or other devices integrated in an access control system. Access to the
plant is permitted only with manual registration, without any tracking of circulation and
operation for cars, trucks and people, once they are inside the plant

 No intercommunication system has been installed in the plant, in order to

communicate drivers, trucks, railway, jetty, etc. and there is no local operation station
for sending a permissive signal to allow product delivery, reception and internal
transportation.

 No TMS (Terminal Management System) has been installed in the plant, as a tool for
Production Management System, to manage the balance of plant, recording the BOM
(Bill of Material), dispatch and activation of the production operation orders from ERP
System, control the accurate tracking product, storage and scheduling, etc.

 No ERP (Enterprise Resources Planning) has been installed in the plant for managing
Production, Storage, Loading, Sales, Maintenance and Human Resources

7.1.4.2 RECEPTION

The existing Flow Meters on the pipelines entering the Terminal are only with local indication,
and the automated Mass Balance is not possible without changing them

 They do not have any possibility to integrate in the third party systems, due to the lack
of the flow computer, with communication to the Control System or a third party.

28
  No fiscalization system for flow measurement systems, due to the lack of a
compensation algorithmic which could be implemented in a local Flow computer. This
kind of fiscal measurement would allow to have an accurate Balance of the plant.

No Smart instruments are located in reception pipelines, from the entry point to the storage
thanks, so the stage and condition of the products cannot be correctly supervised, to identify
over or under-pressure, thermal expansion, real and safety operational conditions.

Valves located in the reception area are manually operated, and they need to be open /
closed by an operator, following manual operations and procedures orders, where the
operators use remote voice transmission by using walky-talkies.

In general, no Thermal Pressure Valves have been installed in the Terminal to avoid
overpressure due to thermal expansion of the fluid.

7.1.4.3 STORAGE TANKS

An Inventory Tank System has been implemented at least in the 95% of the Tank Farm.

 Valves are manually operated, there are not valves with automatic actuators valves
and no Smart Instrumentation, in the reception and output lines.

 No Control System or Emergency Shutdown systems are available, and an Overfill

protection system was not identified.

7.1.4.4 PUMP HOUSE

In the POCL Terminal, five pump houses have been located to transfer product between
tanks and to deliver the products to the Trucks, Railway, Drums and Jetty. Each pump has a
local control and operation station with start/stop Push bottom, but no indicator lamps.
Pumps are not integrated to a control system and no smart Instruments were found:

 No Smart Instrumentation for general measurement is available. Pressure gauges are

the only instruments installed in the pump discharge.

 All Valves are manually operated. No Automatic Actuator valves are installed.

 Each pump has a By-Pass with manual valve, but no device to control the minimum
flow of pump, in order to avoid cavitation effects.

 No Flow Measurement Instrument for specific Mass Balance measurement, and no

recording and Historic system.

29
7.1.4.5 LOADING SYSTEM

The lines dispatch only one liquid product, and pump houses are used to load trucks, rail
wagons, ships and drums, but always under manual operations.

Only the loading arms for Trucks and drums include a flow meter with local operation, and it
is mandatory to have manual recording of the total flow loaded.

In some cases, earthing connections have been installed, but in no integrated safety
sequence has been implemented in case of losing the connection.

7.1.5 FIREFIGHTING

7.1.5.1 RECEPTION

In the Jetty zone the system installed is a hydrant-monitor network with his own fire pump, in
this case the system is insufficient, in the recommendations chapter we will give some
solution to improve it.

As a minimum it is necessary to consider the installation of water and foam monitors in each
docking point, with remote control in major installations or when loading class A1 and A2
products. Water screens must also be installed (type Hidroshields) in the barrel area, to
separate possible boat risk from the risk of loading point, and evacuation curtains by flood of
water sprinklers. Monitors must necessarily be far-reaching. All the facilities of firefighting
must be manually and remotely operated from one point adequately separated from the risk
point.

7.1.5.2 STORAGE TANKS

Only some tanks have installed the Fire Fighting system, in this cases the fire protection
system of the tanks is directly connected to hydrant network with a tie-in and a gate valve,
this is not the correct form to install this systems, in the recommendations chapter we will
give some solutions to improve it.

In any storage area where flammable liquids are stored, combustible or toxic, a fire water
ring will be installed around the retention buckets equipped with hydrants.

In addition, a sufficient number of portable or on-car extinguishers, located in accordance

with the requirements of OISD Standard 117, in a visible position, easily accessible and

30
strategically around retention pails and preferably near stations of pumping, access to the
buckets and face / discharge facilities. The storage park area will be covered by monitors (or
monitors mounted on hydrants) whose function will be to cool tanks and spheres. The kind of
monitor will be according to stored products.

Also is necessary to protect the tank, with a water spray system according API RP 2030 and
a foam system, in accordance with OISD Standard 117.

7.1.5.3 PUMP HOUSE

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the pump house.

The pumps will be protected by water spraying systems, water mist (if you can ensure that
there is no dragging of the fog produced) or automatic extinguishing systems using
extinguishing powder, in the case of higher spills 2.8 m3. As a minimum they must, all pumps
that are less than 10 meters from the central pump and at most 8 pumps. They will be
protected with at least two nozzles provided that the correct coverage of the equipment is
ensured, preferably oriented to cover suction and discharge flanges. The bulb opening
temperature will be 68 ° C.

7.1.5.4 LOADING SYSTEM

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the delivery zones.

Loading racks shall be defined a being either truck or rail car types for the purpose of loading
or unloading product.

Total rack size, flammable or combustible products involved, proximity of other hazards and
exposure drainage facilities, wind conditions, ambient temperatures, and available staff all
shall be factored into the design of loading rack foam system.

Methods of protection, the following shall be permitted to be to methods of protecting loading

racks:

• Foam-water sprinklers application utilizing air-aspirating foam-water sprinklers or

nozzles or non-air-aspirating standard sprinklers.

• Foam monitors.

31
7.1.6 PIPING

Piping material to be considered shall be in accordance to:

 The piping network will be of carbon steel according to American Petroleum Institute
(API) 5L grade B specification or ASTM A 106 Gr B.

 All pipes and pipe fittings (valves, flanges, joints, etc.) will be designed with a 150#
rating.

 All joints between pipes or pipes and fittings will be butt welded.

 All pipes will be supported on racks or sleepers.

7.2 MPL

7.2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The description below is based on the information gathered on the first short visit to the plant,
the data collection of our local collaborators and the information provided by the client.

Meghna Installations are divided in two terminals. Both are integrated but in some way they
can operate separately.

7.2.1.1 NORTH TERMINAL

The Meghna Petroleum Ltd (MPL) North Terminal receives products from the Eastern
Refinery Limited (ERL) through pipeline (SKO/MS/HSD), from IMPORT (HSD, LSFO) and
from tank trucks. In future, HOBC & HSFO may be introduced & receive from ERL & Import.

There are 15 storage tanks where 2 out of order and one Pump House with a total of 9
pumps to transfer the products from the storage tanks to the different delivery points such as
Jetty LJ#4 and Bunkering operations. Also all tanks are connected with south pump house
through pipeline.

7.2.1.2 SOUTH TERMINAL

The Meghna Petroleum Ltd (MPL) South Terminal receives product from the Jetty DOJ # 5
and LJ#4 (HSD/LSFO/HSFO/HOBC/MS/SKO), and from the Eastern Refinery Limited (ERL)
through pipeline (SKO/MS/HSD/HSFO/HOBC/JBO).

32
There are 19 storage tanks and one Pump House with a total of 18 pumps to transfer the
products from the storage tanks to the different delivery points such as Jetty DOJ # 5, LJ# 4,
RM# 5, Bunkering operations, Rail Wagons, Tanker Trucks and Drums.

7.2.2 PROCESS

7.2.2.1 NORTH TERMINAL

7.2.2.1.1 RECEPTION

The products handled at the MPL North Terminal are received through pipelines as follows:

 MS from refinery (ø 4” pipeline)

 SKO from refinery (ø 6” pipeline)

 HSD from refinery (ø 8” pipeline) & Import (ø 8” & 12” pipeline)

 LSFO from Import (ø 8” pipeline)

From various Gas field and fractionation plant MS & HSD are received. Tank Trucks
unloading provision available for receiving SKO in future.

MS received from wagon (south terminal) at T-002/T-013.

7.2.2.1.2 STORAGE TANKS

The Meghna Petroleum Ltd (MPL) North Terminal has 15 storage tanks where 2 out of order
with a total nominal storage capacity of 45,632 m3:

 Six storage tanks for HSD: T-001, T-004, T-006, T-007, T-012 and T-018.

 Three storage tanks for SKO: T-015, T-016 and T-017.

 Two storage tanks for MS: T-002 and T-013.

 One storage tank for LSFO: T-005

 One storage tank for MTT: H-1

The general characteristics of the storage tanks at the MPL North Terminal are shown in the
table below:

33
TABLE 3 – MEGHNA NORTH TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS

MEGHNA PETROLEUM STORAGE TANKS - NORTH TERMINAL

RADAR
NOMINAL LICENSE
DIAMETER HEIGHT GAUGING
PRODUCT TANK Nº CAPACITY CAPACITY (m3) ROOF TYPE
(m) (m) SYSTEM
3
(m ) PADMA Info
(Y/N)

HSD T-001 21,728 12,919 4790 4868 Fixed YES

HSD T-004 21,717 13,860 5134 5183 Fixed YES

HSD T-006 15,224 13,560 2468 2500 Fixed YES

HSD T-007 22,300 13,655 5333 5387 Fixed NO

HSD T-012 24,354 13,729 6395 6477 Fixed YES

HSD T-018 15,223 13,908 2531 2539 Fixed YES

MS T-002 15,233 13,685 2494 2500 IFR YES

MS T-013 12,178 12,300 1433 1436 IFR YES

MTT H-1 -- -- -- 111 Horizontal NO

SKO T-015 15,212 13,900 2526 2537 Fixed YES

SKO T-016 15,240 13,716 2502 2539 Fixed YES

SKO T-017 15,216 13,975 2541 2555 Fixed YES

LSFO T-005 25,217 13,880 6932 7000 Fixed YES

TOTAL 45081 45632

CAPACITY

OUT OF
ORDER

T-003 15,240 3,050 556 534 Fixed --

34
 MEGHNA PETROLEUM STORAGE TANKS - NORTH TERMINAL

RADAR
NOMINAL LICENSE
DIAMETER HEIGHT GAUGING
PRODUCT TANK Nº CAPACITY CAPACITY (m3) ROOF TYPE
(m) (m) SYSTEM
(m3) PADMA Info
(Y/N)

T-009 27,430 13,720 8108 7388 Fixed --

Source: TR

7.2.2.1.3 PUMP HOUSE

The MPL North Terminal has one Pump House with a total of 9 pumps to handle the different
products for the following operation modes:

(a) Product recirculation;

(b) Product inter-tank transfer;

(c) Product storage tank to jetty;

(d) Product unloading from tank trucks to storage tanks;

(e) No product unloading from rail wagons to storage tanks;

(f) No stripping from pump house. It is done by additional pump.

The pumps are associated to the different products as shown in the Table below:

35
 TABLE 4 – MEGHNA NORTH TERMINAL PUMPS

MEGHNA NORTH TERMINAL - PUMPS

PRESSURE MOTOR
FLOW RATE
PUMP PUMP TYPE FLUID HEAD POWER RPM MODEL
(m3/h)
(m) (Kw)

P-01 Centrifugal MS -- 180 11 1460 --

TD125-250
P-02 Centrifugal HSD 20 150 15 1450
15/4

P-03 Centrifugal MS 27 180 11 1470 TD80315 11/4

P-04 Centrifugal HSD -- 180 22 1450 5CNEC-104

Under
P-05 Centrifugal HSD -- 180 22 1450
maintenance

TFS150-125-
P-06 Centrifugal SKO 25-30 180 22 1475
320

P-07 Centrifugal SKO -- 240 22 1450 5CNEC-104

VNHCP 150-
P-08 Centrifugal HSD 25 180 22 1450
315

LSN125-100-
P-09 Centrifugal MS 25 100 11 1460 31551VB1-
1104EX

P-10 Screw FO

Source: TR

7.2.2.1.4 LOADING SYSTEM

Ship/Barge Loading from Storage Tanks

At the MPL North Terminal the following products are loaded to ships/barges:
a) Jetty LJ #4:MS, SKO, HSD, JBO and LSFO.

36
 b) Bunkering operations are done at this Terminal.

Tank Truck Unloading Station

At present, from various Gas field and fractionation plant MS & HSD are received. In future,
Tank Trucks unloading provision available for receiving SKO, MS & HSD:

 One bottom unloading for SKO

 Two bottom unloading for HSD

 Three bottom unloading for MS

Rail Wagon Unloading Station

No product is received from rail wagons.

7.2.2.2 SOUTH TERMINAL

7.2.2.2.1 RECEPTION

The products handled at the MPL South Terminal are received through pipelines as follows:
 HSD from Jetty DOJ # 5 through two separate lines (One ø 12” pipeline with 10”
loading arm connected to DOJ#6&7 & another one combination of 8”/ 12” ø pipeline)

 HSFO from Jetty DOJ # 5 (One ø 12” pipeline)

 HOBC from Jetty DOJ # 5 (One combination of ø 6” pipeline/ ø 8” pipeline)

 HOBC from LJ # 4 (Connected with DOJ #5) (One ø 6” pipeline)

 MS from refinery and storage tanks at Meghna South (T-453)

 MS through MS North line ø 6”.

 HSD from refinery through single header (Connected to one ø 12” pipeline from
PADMA and two ø 6” pipelines from Refinery)

 HSD from Single Point Mooring (SPM) (One 18” ø)

 HSFO from refinery (ø 12” pipeline)

 HOBC from refinery (One ø 6” pipeline)

 JBO from refinery (ø 4” pipeline)

37
7.2.2.2.2 STORAGE TANKS

The Meghna Petroleum Ltd (MPL) South Terminal has 19 storage tanks with a total nominal
storage capacity of 122,859 m3:

 Two storage tanks for HSFO: T-461 and T-466.

 Eleven storage tanks for HSD: T-451, T-452, T-455, T-456, T-457, T-458, T-465, T-
467, T-468, T-469 and T-470.

 One storage tank for JBO: T-459.

 Three storage tanks for HBOC: T-460, T-462 and T-464.

 Two storage tanks for MS: T-453 and T-463.

The general characteristics of the storage tanks at the MPL South Terminal are shown in the
table below:

38
 TABLE 5- MEGHNA SOUTH TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS

MEGHNA PETROLEUM STORAGE TANKS - SOUTH TERMINAL

NOMINAL LICENSE RADAR

DIAMETER HEIGHT
PRODUCT TANK Nº CAPACITY CAPACITY (m3) ROOF TYPE GAUGING
(m) (m)
(m3) PADMA Info SYSTEM (Y/N)

HSD 451 27,430 10,888 6434 6481 Fixed YES

HSD 452 30,491 12,760 9317 9430 Fixed YES

HSD 455 24,377 12,825 5986 6098 Fixed YES

HSD 456 36,555 10,888 11427 11548 Fixed NO

HSD 457 24,372 10,940 5104 5116 Fixed YES

HSD 458 24,373 10,930 5100 5196 Fixed YES

HSD 465 29,070 12,160 8071 8243 Fixed NO

HSD 467 29,069 11,760 7805 8058 Fixed YES

HSD 468 31,026 13,606 10287 10358 Fixed NO

HSD 469 31,031 13,644 10319 10451 Fixed NO

HSD 470 31,028 13,660 10329 10458 Fixed NO

JBO 459 15,187 7,325 1327 1314 Fixed YES

HOBC 460 19,386 13,440 3967 3989 IFR YES

HOBC 462 12,119 7,271 839 850 Fixed YES

HOBC 464 17,065 13,710 3136 2005 IFR YES

39
MEGHNA PETROLEUM STORAGE TANKS - SOUTH TERMINAL

NOMINAL LICENSE RADAR

DIAMETER HEIGHT
3
PRODUCT TANK Nº CAPACITY CAPACITY (m ) ROOF TYPE GAUGING
(m) (m)
(m3) PADMA Info SYSTEM (Y/N)

FO 461 27,378 12,749 7505 7537 Fixed YES

FO 466 29,086 13,850 9203 9370 Fixed YES

MS 453 24,372 12,815 5978 6023 Fixed YES

MS 463 7,585 7,350 332 334 Fixed YES

TOTAL 122464 122859

CAPACITY

Source: TR

7.2.2.2.3 PUMP HOUSES

The MPL South Terminal has one Pump House with a total of 19 pumps to handle the
different products for the following operation modes:

(a) Product recirculation;

(b) Product inter-tank transfer;

(c) Product storage tank to jetty;

(d) Product loading from storage tanks to rail wagons;

(e) Product unloading from rail wagons to storage tanks;

(f) Product loading from storage tanks to trucks;

(g) No stripping from pump House. It is done by additional pump.

The pumps are associated to the different products as shown in the Table below:

40
TABLE 6– MEGHNA SOUTH TERMINAL PUMPS

MEGHNA SOUTH TERMINAL - PUMPS

PRESSURE
FLOW RATE MOTOR
PUMP PUMP TYPE FLUID HEAD RPM MODEL
(m3/h) POWER (Kw)
(m)

P-01 Centrifugal HSD -- 180 22 1450 5CNEC-104

P-02 Centrifugal MS 19,8 180 22 1450 TD125-250

22/4

P-03 Centrifugal MS 21,3 100 11 1450 TD80315 11/4

P-04 Centrifugal SKO 20-25 200 22 1450 MEGAGM

125/250

P-05 Centrifugal HSD 27 180 22 1450 IS150-125-315A

P-06 Centrifugal HSD 30 180 22 1450 VN-SCP 125-315

P-07 Centrifugal HSD 20 180 22 -- MEGAGA

125/250

P-08 Screw HSFO 30 130 30 1450 VN-HSSP

130/30

P-09 Screw HSFO -- 100 18.5 -- HXL-6

P-10 Screw HSFO 30 150 37 1465 VNK-2500

P-11 Centrifugal JBO 25 150 15 1460 VNHCP 100-315

P-12 Centrifugal HOBC 19,8 100 11 1450 TD125-250

22/4

P-13 Centrifugal HOBC 27,4 180 22 -- HL100-65-315

P-14 Centrifugal SKO 20 150 15 -- MEGA 125-250

P-15 Centrifugal HSD -- 150 15 -- --

P-16 Centrifugal HSD 25-30 180 22 1475 TES150-125-320

P-17 Screw HSFO -- 130 30 -- PZ126

41
 MEGHNA SOUTH TERMINAL - PUMPS

PRESSURE
FLOW RATE MOTOR
PUMP PUMP TYPE FLUID HEAD RPM MODEL
(m3/h) POWER (Kw)
(m)

P-29 Centrifugal CONDENSATE -- -- 4,1 -- --

P-33 Portable HSFO -- -- 15 -- --

Source: TR

7.2.2.2.4 LOADING SYSTEM

Tank Truck/Rail Wagon Loading General Description

The loading of liquid fuels and products to trucks and rail wagons is simultaneous, this
means that more than one truck and one wagon loading arm can be in operation at the same
time and loading the same product.

The number of loading pumps in operation and the maximum number of loading hoses of a
given product in simultaneous operation will depend on the simultaneity of operations.

Tank Truck Loading Station

At present, the Tank Truck Loading Station consists of:

- 6 top loading hoses with meter for delivery of HSD;

- 1 top loading hose with meter for delivery of HOBC;

- 1 top loading hose with meter for delivery of SKO;

- 1 top loading hose with meter for delivery of JBO;

- 1 top loading hose without meter for delivery of FO.

The forecast loading of truck will be as follows:

- 9 top loading arms with meter for delivery of HSD;

- 1 top loading arms with meter for delivery of JBO;

- 1 top loading arms with meter for delivery of HSFO;

- 5 top loading arms with meter for delivery of HOBC;

42
 - 4 top loading arms with meter for delivery of MS;

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of SKO;

Tank Truck Unloading Station

At present no unloading station for Tank Truck. But in future the facility may be developed.

Rail Wagon Loading Station

At present, there were 2 different loading bays: the first of them can load wagons on both
sides and has 6 loading points on each side. It can deliver MS, SKO, HSD and HOBC. There
is also a JBO line but it is not in use.

It is also possible to receive MS from wagons.

The other loading bays could deliver product and have 12 delivery points for HSFO and 8
delivery points for HSD.

The forecast loading of rail wagon will be as follows:

- 24 loading points with top loading hoses for HSD;

- 23 loading points with top loading hoses for HSFO;

- 9 loading points with top loading hoses for HOBC;

- 5 loading points with top loading hoses for MS;

- 2 loading points with top loading hoses for SKO;

Rail Wagon Unloading Station

It is possible to unload products from rail wagons and transfer them to the storage tanks.
This operation is done through a portable pump.

Ship/Barge Loading from Storage Tanks

At the MPL Terminal t61he following products are loaded to ships/barges:

Jetty DOJ # 5: MS, HBOC, HSD, JBO, SKO and HSFO.

Jetty LJ # 4: MS, HOBC, HSD, JBO and HSFO.

Additionally, Bunkering operations are done with HSD and HSFO

Drums Loading Station

Loading of Drums is done at the Tank Truck Loading Station and RM5. HSD, HOBC, MS
and SKO are dispatched as follows:

43
 - 1 loading hose with meter for delivery of HOBC;

- 1 loading hose with meter for delivery of SKO;

- 1 loading hose with meter for delivery of MS;

- 2 loading hoses with meter for delivery of HSD.

- 1 loading hose with meter for delivery of SKO at RM-5;

- 1 loading hose with meter for delivery of HSD at RM-5;

The forecast loading of drums will be as follows:

- 4 top loading arms with meter for delivery of HSD;

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of HOBC;

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of MS;

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of SKO;

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of HSFO;

- 1 loading hose with meter for delivery of SKO at RM-5;

- 1 loading hose with meter for delivery of HSD at RM-5

7.2.3 ELECTRICITY

The actual electrical distribution system basically consists of a network that includes, among
others, the following voltage level and equipment:

- 11 kV Medium Voltage Switchgears (MVSG).

- 11/0.4 kV Power transformers.

- 400/220V Low Voltage Switchgear (LVSG) and MCC.

- Starter panels (MCC) near the motors in Pump House.

- Emergency Diesel Generators.

- The rated frequency is 50 Hz.

- Maximum short circuit current ≤ 36 kA.

There is no Distributed Control System (DCS) in the plant so all the valves are manual.

44
Distribution cables to motors, from LVSG to starter panels, and from starter panels to motors,
are non-armoured cables introduced into metal tubes, seals, reductions, etc.

The known motor starter systems are the following:

- Star-delta (Y-Δ).

- DOL (Direct on Line).

Presently most of the motor starters are old and oil circuit breaker type cannot be a part of
automation and must be replaced. A few of such starters are not flameproof. The space
between the pumping sets row and the starters’ row is very narrow for work safety and ease
of carrying out maintenance work.

7.2.4 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL

7.2.4.1 General

From the Instrumentation & Control point of view, the Inventory Tank system is the only
automated system found in the plant. The main purpose of the Inventory system is to have a
balance of product in each Tank of the Terminal, but there is not a global mass balance of
the plant, which should be a correlation of the input, output and storage of the products.

In general, it was observed that most of the equipment available in the Terminal does not
have an immediate capability to be integrated in a Control System to allow the coordinate
control of sequence and the Terminal asset management.

 The existing Flow Metering have only local indication of the volume that’s is being
transferred. The automated registration and control of the Mass Balance, and the
possibility to contrast inputs and outputs of the plant are not possible at this time.

 No Flow Meters have been installed in the reception lines from the ships. We could
consider installing the new one, in order to been included in the products balance of the
Terminal.

 The existence of a flow measurement system for fiscal purpose was not identified to
contrast the volumes of loading/unloading, delivery and combined inventory tank:

 No loading arms for dispatching.

 No Motorized valves to be included in a safety control sequence to close valve in case of

emergency to avoid a risk situation for people, plant and nearest environment.

45
 No Smart instruments are located in pipes, pumps and some if the tanks, so the stage and
condition of the products cannot be correctly supervised, to identify over or under-
pressure, thermal expansion, real flow or leak detection. This type of instrumentation will
be necessary at the three main Terminal processes:

 Production Reception, so the plant could be protected in case of overpressure, closing

valves, pipes leakage or incorrect operation, out of procedure.

 Product Storage to know the general operation and safety conditions the process.

 Product Delivery, from the Tanks to the delivery points, such as trucks, railway wagons,
tankers and barges.

 All the valves installed in the plant are manually operated, without limit switches. These
valves are not prepared to be connected to a Control System, and not ready to be
integrated in an automatic operation. The general operator procedures need the remote
voice communication amongst the operators on site, in order to coordinate the alignment
of valves, pumps, tanks and loading arms. The current tracking for product in the plant
need is only recorded on paper and the coordination of the operations is made by
remote voice communication between the operators.

 Pump Systems are controlled manually by operator, from the local control station closed
to the own pump, with only start/stop push bottom, but no local indicator lamps are
available to check the real state of the current action.

 No Control Systems have been installed in the plant. The Operation is manual only, for
ordinary or basic process control, for Safety Sequences and for detection of Fire and gas
leakage.

 No HMI or Scada has been installed, to allow the remote supervision, operation and
control.

 The Access Control system is a manual operation for identification of the pedestrians,
cars, trucks and drivers through identification cards readers, and there are no barriers,
lights or other devices integrated in an access control system. Access to the plant is
permitted only with manual registration, without any tracking of circulation and operation
for cars, trucks and people, once they are inside the plant

 No intercommunication system has been installed in the plant, in order to communicate

drivers, trucks, railway, jetty, etc. and there is no local operation station for sending a
permissive signal to allow product delivery, reception and internal transportation.

46
  No TMS (Terminal Management System) has been installed in the plant, as a tool for
Production Management System, to manage the balance of plant, recording the BOM
(Bill of Material), dispatch and activation of the production operation orders from ERP
System, control the accurate tracking product, storage and scheduling, etc.

 No ERP (Enterprise Resources Planning) has been installed in the plant for managing
Production, Storage, Loading, Sales, Maintenance and Human Resources.

7.2.4.1 RECEPTION

There is no Flow Meters on the pipelines entering the Terminal.

 They do not have any possibility to integrate in the third party systems, due to the lack of
the flow computer, with communication to the Control System or a third party.

 No fiscalization system for flow measurement systems, due to the lack of a compensation
algorithm which could be implemented in a local Flow computer. This kind of fiscal
measurement would allow to have an accurate Balance of the plant.

No Smart instruments are located in reception pipelines, from the entry point to the storage
thanks, so the stage and condition of the products cannot be correctly supervised, to identify
over or under-pressure, thermal expansion, real and safety operational conditions.

Valves located in the reception area are manually operated, and they need to be open /
closed by an operator, following manual operations and procedures orders, where the
operators use remote voice transmission by using walky-talkies.

In general, no Thermal Pressure Valves have been installed in the Terminal to avoid
overpressure due to thermal expansion of the fluid.

7.2.4.2 STORAGE TANK

An Inventory System Tank has been implemented at least in the 80% of the Tank Farm but
some of them not work properly. We will consider installing the expansion of the Inventory
Tank System, from 80% to the 100%.

 Valves are manually operated, there are not valves with automatic actuators and no Smart
Instrumentation, in the reception and output lines.

 No Control System or Emergency Shutdown systems are available, and an Overfill

protection system was not identified.

47
7.2.4.3 PUMP HOUSE

In the MPL Terminal, two pump houses have been located to transfer product between tanks
and to deliver the products to the Trucks, Railway, Drums and Jetty. Each pump has a local
control and operation station with start/stop Push bottom, but no indicator lamps. Pumps are
not integrated to a control system and no smart Instruments were found:

- No Smart Instrumentation for general measurement is available. Pressure gauges are the
only instruments installed in the pump discharge, so new instrument transmitters should
install next to each pump, to implement both interlock to protect and correctly operate
pumps.

- Lamps and state indicator are recommended for these pumps. This kind of lamps should
be implemented on the screen of the Scada Servers, and next to the pumps, related with
the pump stations.

- All Valves are manually operated. No Automatic Actuator valves are installed.

- Each pump has a By-Pass with manual valve, but no device to control the minimum flow
of pump, in order to avoid cavitation effects.

- No Flow Measurement Instrument for specific Mass Balance measurement, and no

recording and Historian system.

7.2.4.4 LOADING SYSTEM

The lines dispatch only one liquid product, and pump houses are used to load trucks, rail
wagons, ships and drums, but always under manual operations.

Only the loading arms for Trucks and drums include a flow meter with local operation, and it
is mandatory to have manual recording of the total flow loaded.

In some cases, earthing connections have been installed, but no integrated safety sequence
has been implemented in case of losing the connection.

7.2.5 FIREFIGHTING

7.2.5.1 RECEPTION

In the Jetty zone the system for protect this zones combined various hydrant-monitors
connected to a foam tank with a line mixer, with this system the loading zone is protected,

48
but this system isn´t the most recommendable, we propose a better system in
recommendations for automatization chapter, As a minimum it is necessary to consider the
installation of water and foam monitors in each docking point, with remote control in major
installations or when loading class 1 and class 2 products. Water screens must also be
installed (type Hydroshields) in the barrel area, to separate possible boat risk from the risk of
loading point, and evacuation curtains by flood of water sprinklers. Monitors must necessarily
be far-reaching. All the facilities of firefighting must be manually and remotely operated from
one point adequately separated from the risk point.

7.2.5.2 STORAGE TANKS

Only some tanks have installed the Fire Fighting system, in this cases the fire protection
system of the tanks is directly connected to hydrant network with a tie-in and a gate valve,
this is not the correct form to install this systems, in the recommendations chapter we will
give some solutions to improve it.

In any storage area where flammable liquids are stored, combustible or toxic, a fire water
ring will be installed around the retention buckets equipped with hydrants.

In addition, a sufficient number of portable or on-car extinguishers, located in accordance

with the requirements of OISD Standard 117, in a visible position, easily accessible and
strategically around retention pails and preferably near stations of pumping, access to the
buckets and face / discharge facilities. The storage park area will be covered by monitors (or
monitors mounted on hydrants) whose function will be to cool tanks and spheres. The kind of
monitor will be according to stored products.

Also is necessary to protect the tank, with a water spray system according API RP 2030 and
a foam system, in accordance with OISD Standard 117.

7.2.5.3 PUMP HOUSE

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the pump house.

The pumps will be protected by water spraying systems, water mist (if you can ensure that
there is no dragging of the fog produced) or automatic extinguishing systems using
extinguishing powder, in the case of higher spills 2.8 m3. As a minimum they must, all pumps
that are less than 10 meters from the central pump and at most 8 pumps. They will be
protected with at least two nozzles provided that the correct coverage of the equipment is

49
ensured, preferably oriented to cover suction and discharge flanges. The bulb opening
temperature will be of 68 ° C.

7.2.5.4 LOADING SYSTEM

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the delivery zones.

Loading racks shall be defined a being either truck or rail car types for the purpose of loading
or unloading product.

Total rack size, flammable or combustible products involved, proximity of other hazards and
exposure drainage facilities, wind conditions, ambient temperatures, and available staff all
shall be factored into the design of loading rack foam system.

Methods of protection, the following shall be permitted to be to methods of protecting loading

racks:

- Foam-water sprinklers application utilizing air-aspirating foam-water sprinklers or

nozzles or non-air-aspirating standard sprinklers.

- Foam monitors.

7.2.6 PIPING

Piping material to be considered shall be in accordance to:

 The piping network will be of carbon steel according to American Petroleum Institute
(API) 5L grade B specification or ASTM A 106 Gr B.

 All pipes and pipe fittings (valves, flanges, joints, etc.) will be designed with a 150#
rating.

 All joints between pipes or pipes and fittings will be butt welded.

 All pipes will be supported on racks or sleepers.

7.3 JOCL

7.3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The description below is based on the information gathered on the first short visit to the plant,
the data collection of our local collaborators and the information provided by the client.

50
The Jamuna Oil Company Ltd (JOCL) Terminal receives product from the DOJ#5,6,7
(HSFO); from Lighter Jetty (LJ#3) (HSD/SKO/HOBC,MS); from the Eastern Refinery Limited
(ERL) through pipeline (HOBC/JBO/SKO/HSD/MS/HSFO); from Rail Wagon
(HOBC/MS/HSD) through hose pipe and no receiving line from Meghna Petroleum Limited
Terminal.

There are 20 storage tanks and 14 pumps (including a portable one) to transfer the products
from the storage tanks to the different delivery points such as Jetty, Rail Wagons, Tank
Trucks and Drums.

7.3.2 PROCESS

7.3.2.1 RECEPTION

The products handled at the JOCL are received through pipelines as follows:

 HOBC from refinery (ø 6” pipeline)

 JBO from refinery (ø 6” pipeline)

 SKO from refinery (ø 6” pipeline)

 HSD from refinery (ø 6” pipeline)

 MS from refinery (ø 6” pipeline)

 HSFO from refinery (ø 12” pipeline)

 HSFO from DOJ#5,6,7 (ø 12” pipeline)

 Multiproduct (HSD, HOBC, SKO, MS) from Lighter Jetty: LJ#3 (ø 8” pipeline)

 HSD from Single Point Mooring (SPM) (One 18” ø)

 HSD from Meghna (ø 12” pipeline). This line also connects to SKO.

And through hose pipe as follow:

 HOBC, SKO and MS from Rail Wagon to respective tanks.

7.3.2.2 STORAGE TANKS

The Jamuna Oil Company Ltd (JOCL) Terminal has 20 storage tanks with a total nominal
storage capacity of 121,211 m3:

• Three storage tanks for FO/HSFO: T-001, T-007 and T-008.

51
• Eight storage tanks for HSD: T-002, T-003, T-004, T-006, T-009, T-010, T-021 and T-022.

• One storage tank for SKO: T-005.

• One storage tank for JBO: T-012.

• Three storage tanks for HOBC: T-011, T-017 and T-018.

• Four storage tanks for MS: T-015, T-016, T-019 and T-020.

The general characteristics of the storage tanks at the JOCL Terminal are shown in the table
below:

TABLE 7- JAMUNA TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS

JAMUNA OIL COMPANY TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS

LICENSED RADAR
NOMINAL
DIAMETER HEIGHT CAPACITY GAUGING
PRODUCT TANK CAPACITY ROOF TYPE
(m) (m) (m3) PADMA SYSTEM
Calculated.(m3)
Info (Y/N)

FO/HSFO T-001 35,994 14,380 14.632 14.571 Fixed Y

FO/HSFO T-007 16,002 10,810 2.174 2.172 Fixed Y

FO/HSFO T-008 15,995 10,830 2.176 2.121 Fixed Y

HSD T-002 35,995 14,430 14.684 14.458 Fixed Y

HSD T-003 35,995 14,420 14.674 14.704 Fixed Y

HSD T-004 35,987 14,105 14.347 14.446 Fixed Y

HSD T-006 15,997 14,415 2.897 2.912 Fixed Y

HSD T-009 29,990 14,290 10.094 10.170 Fixed Y

HSD T-010 29,987 13,980 9.873 9.914 Fixed Y

HSD T-021 28,055 12,130 7.498 7.559 Fixed N

HSD T-022 28,347 13,885 8.763 6.482 Fixed N

SKO T-005 16,004 14,420 2.901 2.871 Fixed Y

52
 JAMUNA OIL COMPANY TERMINAL STORAGE TANKS

LICENSED RADAR
NOMINAL
DIAMETER HEIGHT CAPACITY GAUGING
PRODUCT TANK CAPACITY ROOF TYPE
(m) (m) (m3) PADMA SYSTEM
Calculated.(m3)
Info (Y/N)

JBO T-012 15,996 14,420 2.898 2.846 Fixed Y

HOBC T-011 18,280 11,025 2.893 2.903 IFR N

HOBC T-017 21,513 10,655 3.873 3.886 Fixed Y

HOBC T-018 11,631 8,775 932 928 Fixed Y

MS T-015 -- 4,401 -- 140 Horizontal N

MS T-016 -- 4,465 -- 140 Horizontal N

MS T-019 21,305 13,280 4.734 4.754 Fixed Y

MS T-020 18,252 12,230 3.200 3.234 Fixed Y

TOTAL 123.245 121.211

CAPACITY

FUTURE
TANKS:

FO T-23 36,580 14,430 15.165 13.000

(Proposed)

Source: TR

7.3.2.3 PUMP HOUSE

The oil products pump house includes 13 pumps to handle the different products for the
following mode of operations:

(a) Product recirculation;

(b) Product inter-tank transfer;

(c) Product storage tank to jetty;

53
(d) Product loading from storage tanks to rail car;

(e) Product loading from storage tanks to tank trucks;

(f) Product unloading from tank trucks to storage tanks;

(g) No stripping from pump house to other tank.

The pumps are associated to the different products as follows:

a) FO/HSFO: P-001 / P-002 / P-003

b) HSD: P-004 / P-009 / P-010 / P-012 / P-013

c) SKO: P-005 / P-006

d) JBO: P-007

e) HOBC: P-011

f) MS: P-008

The characteristics of the transfer pumps are shown in the Table below:

54
 TABLE 8- JAMUNA TERMINAL PUMPS

JAMUNA TERMINAL - PUMPS

PRESSURE
FLOW RATE MOTOR POWER
PUMP PUMP TYPE FLUID HEAD RPM MODEL
3
(m /h) (Kw)
(m)

P-001 Screw HSFO -- 205 110 -- W72ZK-94

P-002 Screw HSFO 30 203 43 1450 F-3.A.150.40

P-003 Screw HSFO 30 150 37 1460 k-2500

P-004 Centrifugal HSD -- 192 11 2930 ETAN*80-160

P-005 Centrifugal SKO 60 120 45 2960 ZDHQ8102

P-006 Centrifugal SKO 25 192 11 2930 ETAN100*80-160

P-007 Screw JBO -- -- 11 2950 F2A7040

P-008 Centrifugal MS 25 192 11 -- ETAN100*80-160

P-009 Centrifugal HSD -- -- 45 -- ZDHQ8102

P-010 Centrifugal HSD 60 200 37 2900 TD 100-200 37/2 FFXD

P-011 Centrifugal HOBC -- -- 9.3 -- --

P-012 Centrifugal HSD -- -- 11 -- --

P-013 Centrifugal HSD -- -- 55 -- ZDHQ 10102/2

Source: TR

7.3.2.4 LOADING SYSTEM

Tank Truck/Rail Car Loading General Description

55
The loading of liquid fuels and products to trucks and rail cars are simultaneous, this means
more than one truck and rail car loading can be in operation at the same time and loading the
same product.

The number of loading pumps in operation, and the maximum number of loading hoses of a
given product in simultaneous operation will depend on the simultaneity of operations.

Tank Truck Loading Station

At present, the Tank Truck Loading Station consists of three (3) loading bays. Two of them
with a double side loading option, and the other single side. The double side loading are
equipped with top loading hoses for the loading of SKO, HSD, MS, HOBC and JBO. The
single side is exclusively dedicated for HSFO, and has not meter system.

The forecast loading of truck will be as follows:

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of HSFO;

- 5 top loading arms with meter for delivery of HSD;

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of SKO;

- 2 top loading arms with meter for delivery of HOBC;

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of JBO;

- 2 top loading arm with meter for delivery of MS.

For more details see drawing 24020-JAM-T-DW-004-00-S1 to S2 Jamuna Truck Loading

Zones Details (included in Section 7).

Rail Car Loading Station

The oil products rail car loading facility consists of two (2) loading bays (islands) with a
double side loading option. Hence, a total of four (4) rail cars can be connected to the loading
hoses at the same time. Each loading bay is equipped with 6 top loading hoses for the
loading of HSFO, SKO, HSD, MS, and HOBC.

The northern bay usually loads only HSFO. The southern bay is able to load up to six
products: MS, HOBC, SKO, HSD, HSFO and JBO.

The fifth railway line, located in the south in used only for unloading operations with a
portable pump.

For the wagon given the different dimensions of the wagons the best solution is to keep the
existing hoses.

56
Ship/Barge Loading from Storage Tanks

At the JOCL Terminal the following products are loaded to ships/barges: MS, HBOC, SKO,
HSD, HSFO and JBO. Additionally, Bunkering operations are done with HSD and HSFO.

Drums Loading Station

At present, at the Tank Truck Loading Station, Drums are also loaded with the following
products using hoses: SKO, HSD, MS, and HOBC.

The forecast loading of drums will be as follows:

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of HSD;

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of SKO;

- 1 top loading arm with meter for delivery of MS.

For more details see drawing 24020-JAM-T-DW-004-00-S1 to S2 Jamuna Truck Loading

Zones Details (included in Section 7).

7.3.3 ELECTRICITY

The actual electrical distribution system basically consists of a network that includes, among
others, the following voltage level and equipment:

- 11 kV Medium Voltage Switchgears (MVSG).

- 11/0.4 kV Power transformers.

- 400/220V Low Voltage Switchgear (LVSG) and MCC.

- Starter panels (MCC) near the motors in Pump House.

- Emergency Diesel Generators.

- The rated frequency is 50 Hz.

- Maximum short circuit current ≤ 36 kA.

There is no Distributed Control System (DCS) in the plant so all the valves are manual.

Distribution cables to motors, from LVSG to starter panels, and from starter panels to motors,
are non-armored cables introduced into metal tubes, seals, reductions, etc.

The known motor starter systems are the following:

- Star-delta (Y-Δ).

- DOL (Direct on Line).

57
Presently most of the motor starters are old and oil circuit breaker type cannot be a part of
automation and must be replaced. A few of such starters are not flameproof. The space
between the pumping sets row and the starters’ row is very narrow for work safety and ease
of carrying out maintenance work.

7.3.4 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL

7.3.4.1 GENERAL

From the point of view of Instrumentation & Control, the Inventory Tank system is the only
automated system found in the plant. The main purpose of the Inventory system is to have a
balance of product in each Tank of the Terminal, but there is not a global mass balance of
the plant, which should be a correlation of the input, output and storage of the products.

In general, it was observed that most of the equipment available in the Terminal does not
have an immediate capability to be integrated in a Control System to allow the coordinate
control of sequence and the Terminal asset management.

 The existing Flow Metering have only local indication of the volume that’s is being
transferred. The automated registration and control of the Mass Balance, and the
possibility to contrast inputs and outputs of the plant are not possible at this time.

 No Flow meter has been installed in the reception lines from the ships. We could
consider installing the new one, in order to been included in the products balance of
the Terminal.

 The existence of a flow measurement system for fiscal purpose was not identified to
contrast the volumes of loading/unloading, delivery and combined inventory tank:

 No Metering point in the loading arms for dispatching.

 No Motorized valves to be included in a safety control sequence to close

valves in case of emergency to avoid a risk situation for people, plant and
nearest environment.

 No Smart instruments are located in pipes, pumps and some of the tanks, so the
stage and condition of the products cannot be correctly supervised, to identify over or
under-pressure, thermal expansion, real flow or leak detection. This type of
instrumentation will be necessary at the three main Terminal processes:

 Production Reception, so the plant could be protected in case of overpressure,

closing valves, pipes leakage or incorrect operation, out of procedure.

58
 Product Storage to know the general operation and safety conditions of the process.

 Product Delivery, from the Tanks to the delivery points, such as trucks, railway
wagons, tankers and barges.

 All the valves installed in the plant are manually operated, without limit switches.
Theses valves are not prepared to be connected to be a Control System, and not
ready to be integrated in an automatic operation. The general operator procedures
need the remote voice communication amongst the operators on site, in order to
coordinate the alignment of valves, pumps, tanks and loading arms. The current
tracking for product in the plant is only recorded on paper and the coordination of the
operations is made by remote voice communication between the operators.

 Pump Systems are controlled manually by the operator from the local control station
closed to the own pump, with only start/stop push bottom, but no local indicator lamps
are available to check the real state of the current action.

 No Control Systems have been installed in the plant. The Operation is manual only,
for ordinary or basic process control, for Safety Sequences and for detection of Fire
and gas leakage.

 No HMI or Scada has been installed, to allow the remote supervision, operation and
control.

 The Access Control system is a manual operation for identification of the pedestrians,
cars, trucks and drivers through identification cards readers, and there are no
barriers, lights or other devices integrated in an access control system. Access to the
plant is permitted only with manual registration, without any tracking of circulation and
operation for cars, trucks and people, once they are inside the plant

 Employees of JOCL Terminal communicate with each other by walky-talkies/ cell

phone / intercom.

 No TMS (Terminal Management System) has been installed in the plant, as a tool for
Production Management System, to manage the balance of plant, recording the BOM
(Bill of Material), dispatch and activation of the production operation orders from ERP
System, control the accurate tracking product, storage and scheduling, etc.

 No ERP (Enterprise Resources Planning) has been installed in the plant for managing
Production, Storage, Loading, Sales, Maintenance and Human Resources.

59
7.3.4.2 RECEPTION

There is no existing Flow Meters on the pipelines for receiving lines.

No Smart instruments are located in reception pipelines, from the entry point to the storage
thanks, so the stage and condition of the products cannot be correctly supervised, to identify
over or under-pressure, thermal expansion, real and safety operational conditions.

Valves located in the reception area are manually operated, and they need to be open /
closed by an operator, following manual operations and procedures orders, where the
operators use remote voice transmission by using walky-talkies.

In general, no Thermal Pressure Valves have been installed in the Terminal to avoid
overpressure due to thermal expansion of the fluid.

7.3.4.3 STORAGE TANKS

An Inventory Tank System has been implemented at least in the 95% of the Tank Farm. We
will consider installing the expansion of the Inventory Tank System, from 95% to the 100%.

 Valves are manually operated, there are not valves with automatic actuators and no
Smart Instrumentation in the reception and output lines.

 No Control System or Emergency Shutdown systems are available, and an Overfill

protection system was not identified.

7.3.4.4 PUMP HOUSE

In the JOCL Terminal, one pump house has been located to transfer product between tanks
and to deliver the products to the Trucks, Railway, Drums and Jetty. Each pump has a local
control and operation station with start/stop Push bottom, but no indicator lamps. Pumps are
not integrated to a control system and no smart Instruments were being found:

- No Smart Instrumentation for general measurement is available. Pressure gauges are the
only instruments installed in the pump discharge, so new instrument transmitters should
install next to each pump, to implement both interlocks to protect and correctly operate
pumps.

 Lamps and state indicator are recommended for these pumps. This kind of lamps should
be implemented on the screen of the Scada Servers, and next to the pumps, related with
the pump stations.

60
 All Valves are manually operated. No Automatic Actuator valves are installed.

 Each pump has a By-Pass with manual valve, but no device to control the minimum flow
of pump, in order to avoid cavitation effects.

 No Flow Measurement Instrument for specific Mass Balance measurement, and no

recording and Historic system.

7.3.4.5 LOADING SYSTEM

Every line dispatch only one liquid product, and pump houses are used to load trucks, rail
wagons, ships and drums, but always under manual operations.

Only the loading arms for Trucks and drums include a flow meter with local operation, and it
is mandatory to have manual recording of the total flow loaded.

In some cases, earthing connections have been installed, but no integrated safety sequence
has been implemented in case of losing the connection.

7.3.5 FIREFIGHTING

7.3.5.1 RECEPTION

In the Jetty zone the system for protect this zones combined various hydrant-monitors
connected to a foam tank with a line mixer, with this system the loading zone is protected,
but this system isn´t the most recommendable, we propose a better system in
recommendations for automatization chapter, as a minimum it is necessary to consider the
installation of water and foam monitors in each docking point, with remote control in major
installations or when loading class A1 and A2 products. Water screens must also be installed
(type Hidroshields) in the barrel area, to separate possible boat risk from the risk of loading
point, and evacuation curtains by flood of water sprinklers. Monitors must necessarily be far-
reaching. All the facilities of firefighting must be manually and remotely operated from one
point adequately separated from the risk point.

7.3.5.2 STORAGE TANKS

Only some tanks have installed the Fire Fighting system, in this cases the fire protection
system of the tanks is directly connected to hydrant network with a tie-in and a gate valve,
this is not the correct form to install this systems, in the recommendations chapter we will
give some solutions to improve it.

61
In any storage area where flammable liquids are stored, combustible or toxic, a fire water
ring will be installed around the retention buckets equipped with hydrants.

In addition, a sufficient number of portable or on-car extinguishers, located in accordance

with the requirements of OISD Standard 117, in a visible position, easily accessible and
strategically around retention pails and preferably near stations of pumping, access to the
buckets and face / discharge facilities. The storage park area will be covered by monitors (or
monitors mounted on hydrants) whose function will be to cool tanks and spheres. The kind of
monitor will be according to stored products.

Also is necessary to protect the tank, with a water spray system according API RP 2030 and
a foam system, in accordance with OISD Standard 117.

7.3.5.3 PUMP HOUSE

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the pump house.

The pumps will be protected by water spraying systems, water mist (if you can ensure that
there is no dragging of the fog produced) or automatic extinguishing systems using
extinguishing powder, in the case of higher spills 2.8 m3. As a minimum they must, all pumps
that are less than 10 meters from the central pump and at most 8 pumps. They will be
protected with at least two nozzles provided that the correct coverage of the equipment is
ensured, preferably oriented to cover suction and discharge flanges. The bulb opening
temperature will be 68 ° C.

7.3.5.4 LOADING SYSTEM

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the delivery zones.

Loading racks shall be defined a being either truck or rail car types for the purpose of loading
or unloading product.

Total rack size, flammable or combustible products involved, proximity of other hazards and
exposure drainage facilities, wind conditions, ambient temperatures, and available staff all
shall be factored into the design of loading rack foam system.

Methods of protection, the following shall be permitted to be methods of protecting loading

racks:

• Foam-water sprinklers application utilizing air-aspirating foam-water sprinklers or

nozzles or non-air-aspirating standard sprinklers.

62
 • Foam monitors.

7.3.6 PIPING

Piping material to be considered shall be in accordance to:

 The piping network will be of carbon steel according to American Petroleum Institute
(API) 5L grade B specification or ASTM A 106 Gr B.

 All pipes and pipe fittings (valves, flanges, joints, etc.) will be designed with a 150#
rating.

 All joints between pipes or pipes and fittings will be butt welded.

 All pipes will be supported on racks or sleepers.

63
8 LIST OF DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED

This list is included in Section 6. Employer’s Requirements, item 6.6.1 List of documents-
FEED that is part of sub-section 6.6 Supplementary Information of this ITB.

64
9 DOCUMENT ORDER OF PREFERENCE

The documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the order of priority that is
indicated in Section 3. General Conditions of Contract, item 6. Documents Forming the
Contract and Priority of Documents.
In the event of any conflict in these documents, CONTRACTOR shall immediately bring such
conflict to OWNER's attention.

65
10 DESIGN BASIS

Design basis are described in the documents:

- 24020-JAM-D-IN-005-00 Design Basis JOCL.
- 24020-MEG-D-IN-005-00 Design Basis MPL
- 24020-PAD-D-IN-005-00 Design Basis POCL
CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements of the design documentation and shall
review and update the design as necessary to complete the definition.
CONTRACTOR shall comply with the specifications, codes, standards, norms, permits and
environmental licenses set forth in OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION for the design and
construction of the project aims to increase the level of automation at Jamuna, Meghna and
Padma Terminals.
CONTRACTOR shall verify all of the engineering design data and shall obtain OWNER’s
written approval of any proposed modifications to the engineering design data before
proceeding with any modifications.

CONTRACTOR shall verify that all the existing drawings of the existing facilities involved with
new facilities are as-built drawn before the CONTRACTOR starts any design. In case there
are any difference between what is stated on the drawings, CONTRACTOR shall verify all
data and shall obtain OWNER’s written approval of any proposed modifications to the
engineering design data before proceeding with any modifications.

Project Technical Specifications shall be supplemented as necessary by CONTRACTOR's

detailed standards and specifications, which shall be subject to the approval of OWNER.

66
11 GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS OF WORKS

11.1 POCL

11.1.1 CONTROL SYSTEM

11.1.1.1 CONTROL SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The Control System will be designed, based in an open architecture that integrates complex
sub-systems and package units to obtain optimized control of the terminal. The architecture
diagram indicated below will be taken as a basic design for the development and detailed
engineering for the Control System. See drawing 24020-PAD-I-DW-500-00 Control System
Architecture POCL (included in Section 7).

11.1.1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

For the design of the Control System, the following design criteria will be following at least:
 The design will allow the plant to operate continuously, 365 days a year, 24 hours a
day.
 The design should ensure the greatest ease of operation, supervision, maintenance
and integration of systems.
 There will be independent control and supervision functionality for each of the plant's
production and storage systems.
 Future extensions and integrations of existing equipment and systems in the plant or
new construction will be allowed.
 Service guarantees will be offered regarding Hardware, Software and Spare parts
availability.
 Programming standards will be followed, aimed at good maintenance, improvement,
updating and extensions of the system.
 There will be control of failure actions, alarms and transitions, within safe operating
situations.
 Control System will incorporate current technologies of modern systems, like DCS
(Distributed Control System), PLC (Programmable Logic Controller), SCADA, etc.
being any local option valued by PADMA terminal.
 The System must integrate functions of measurement, regulation control, automation,
protection, communication and interfaces with the other sub-systems, data storage
and generation of reports, trend graphs, alarms and events.

67
11.1.1.3 INTEGRATION SYSTEM

According to above drawing, the control system will interface with other sub-system as
detailed in the following:
 Inventory Tank System (ITS)
 Flow Metering System
 Motor Operated Valves System (MOV)
 Motor Control Center System (MCC)
 Access Control System (ACS)
 Weighbridge Truck System (WTS)
 Tank Management System (TMS)
 Enterprise Resources Planning (ERP)
Communication with Sub-systems shall be carried out through control system cards or
through the control modules. All communication shall be based on:

 Bi-directional communication (both reading and writing).

 Control System shall act as master on the communicating link.
 Using Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP and/or OPC.

 In series using the RS-232C, RS-422 or RS-485 standards when apply.

 A suitable communications protocol for multi-drop connections and widely accepted in

the industrial environment (Preferably Modbus).

11.1.1.4 ERP SYSTEM

As it is shown in Control System Architecture (Section 11.1.1.1), the highest level will be an
ERP System Server.

ERP system shall integrate with TMS (Terminal Management System), gathering the
required Process & Metering information along with Access Control System information to
provide:

 Procurement Management

 Supply Chain Management (i.e. Tank Storage, Loading Areas)

 Asset Management (Operation & Maintenance)

 Human Capital Management

In addition, ERP can include:

68
  Project management and accounting

 Reporting & Analytics

 Financial Management

Optionally, ERP System can be hosted in the Cloud. It shall comply with Cybersecurity
International Standards (i.e. Network Isolation / Secure Architecture, Subsystems
Maintenance & Security Policies) and COMPANY’s Cybersecurity Plan.

ERP System interface with TMS shall use RFC (Remote Function Call) interface protocol, so
as to simplify programming of communication processes between systems and manage
error handling.

11.1.1.5 CONTROL ROOM BUILDING PROPOSAL

Control Room Building proposal is included in drawing 24020-PAD-I-DW-501-00 Control and

cabinets room layouts. PADMA TERMINAL (included in Section 7).

11.1.1.6 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

With the aim to support the new DCS (Distributed Control System) and ESD (Emergency
Shutdown), systems, will be designed and UPS to supply safety voltage and guarantee their
correct functioning in case of a black out.

The UPS will have the following main characteristics:

o It shall be designed as per in IEC 62040-3.

o Each unit shall have a 400 V, 50 Hz, three-phase power supply with neutral connected
directly to earth. The protective conductor shall be separated from the neutral.

o The system shall admit variations in voltage and frequency, both singular and
combined, in ranges between ±10% and ±5% respectively, without affecting its
operation and without causing overheating.

o UPS output voltage: 400/220V, 3Ph+N.

o The equipment must be designed to supply a minimum load with a power factor
between 0.4 inductive and 0.9 capacitive.

69
 o The equipment shall be designed to work continuously with the specified load, and
shall also be capable of supplying 150% of the rated load for 60 seconds through the
inverter, with output characteristics within the specified tolerances.

o The batteries shall be of the Li-Ion type, with a minimum autonomy of 30 minutes.

o UPS system shall have the configuration as per in the following drawing: 24020-PAD-
E-DW-002 UPS Single Line Diagram JOCL (included in Section 7).

11.1.2 MODIFICATIONS FOR TRUCK LOADING

The liquid hydrocarbon dispatch procedure works as follows:

 The truck is weighed on the plant entrance before reaching the loading area, to check
the tare of the vehicle. The weight is reflected in the computer of the corresponding
operator.

 Before the truck is located on the filling island, the corresponding pre-operational
checks are carried out, both administrative and security.

 Once the pre-operational checks have been carried out, the truck is placed on the bay
designated to load, where it´s locked, grounded and connected to the overfill
detection system.

 The loading process begins, it will be from bottom or top of the truck, until the
flowmeter reaches the authorized quantity, or the overfilling probe detects that is full.

 When the loading process is finished, is necessary to disconnect the followings:

 Vapor recovery hoses

 Hose or loading arm

 Overfilling system

 Grounding connection of the truck.

A new truck loading zone will be built, the total dimensions will be 147 meters (large) x 10
meters (wide), and it will be consisting to the following areas:

 Jet A-1, this zone will have 1 bay and bottom loading arms.

 FO, this zone will have 3 bays and top loading arms.

 Loading Area, this zone will have 11 bays and top loading arms.

70
  Unloading Area, this zone will have 3 bays and bottom hoses.

 Drum loading Area, this zone will have 8 bays and top loading arms.

The construction of the new truck loading station will be built in different phases, until it´s
finished the old truck loading will be kept, so that the plant continuous to be operational, is
necessary to build a new platform and bays with loading arms, this platform and loading
arms will give more security for the operator works.

The work area of the loading arms is defined on the drawing 24020-PAD-T-DW-004-00-S1 to
S7 Padma Truck Loading Zones Details (included in Section 7).

The truck loading zone includes 19 double dispatch bays for the loading of 2 trucks. Each
island will have 4 loading arms, the dimensions of the loading arms shall will be designed
following criteria:

 The loading arm will be operated in all the assigned loading zone.
 In the loading moment, the truck will be situated on the loading area as marked on the
ground.
The materials of the loading arm will be the following:
 Pipes: ASTM A 106 Gr B or API 5L Gr B
 Flanges: ASTM A 105 & ASME B16.5

All the material will have a minimum rating of #150. The hoses to be supplied must be listed
by UL (Underwirted Labotatories) in accordance with BS - 1435Code.

The rotating joints must be provided with a simple lubrication system, to be able to carry out
maintenance without disassembling the loading arm.

A system must be in place to prevent the arm from leaving the safety limits, this system will
prevent by interlock that loading arm go out the safety zone. Additionally, a locking system
shall be also included to lock the arm in the resting position when not in use.

All the equipment’s will be delivered fully finished with protective paint and finish for specific
marine and tropical application.

71
 TABLE 9- TANK TRUCK LOADING - PADMA

LA according to
Loading VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY 24020-PAD-T- SIZE CONNECTION
Arm RECOVER
DW-004-S1 to S4
Charging Rod for
Padma FO Loading FO 1 LA-15 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
ø 2,5”
Charging Rod for
Padma FO Loading FO 1 LA-15 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
ø 2,5”
Charging Rod for
Padma FO Loading FO 1 LA-15 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
ø 2,5”
Charging Rod for
Padma FO Loading FO 1 LA-15 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
ø 2,5”
Charging Rod for
Padma FO Loading FO 2 LA-14 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
ø 2,5”
Charging Rod for
Padma FO Loading FO 2 LA-14 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
ø 2,5”
Tank Truck White Charging Rod for
Padma 2 LA-14 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading SKO ø 2,5”
Tank Truck White Charging Rod for
Padma 2 LA-14 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading SKO ø 2,5”
Tank Truck White Charging Rod for
Padma 3 LA-13 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading SKO ø 2,5”
Tank Truck White Charging Rod for
Padma 3 LA-13 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading SKO ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 3 LA-13 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 3 LA-13 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 4 LA-12 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 4 LA-12 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 4 LA-12 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 4 LA-12 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 5 LA-11 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 5 LA-11 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 5 LA-11 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma SKO 5 LA-11 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma MTT 6 LA-10 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma MTT 6 LA-10 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HOBC 6 LA-10 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”

72
 LA according to
Loading VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY 24020-PAD-T- SIZE CONNECTION
Arm RECOVER
DW-004-S1 to S4
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HOBC 6 LA-10 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 7 LA-9 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HOBC 7 LA-9 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma HSD 7 LA-9 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for
Padma MS 7 LA-9 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading ø 2,5”
Tank Truck
Bottom Dry Connection
Padma Jet A-1 JET A-1 8 LA-5 ø 4" Yes
Arm A-106 o API5L.
Loading
Tank Truck
Bottom Dry Connection
Padma Jet A-1 JET A-1 9 LA-5 ø 4" Yes
Arm A-106 o API5L.
Loading
Tank Truck Bottom Threaded
Padma HSD 8 - ø 3" No
Unloading Hose Connection
Tank Truck Bottom Threaded
Padma MTT 9 - ø 3" No
Unloading Hose Connection
Tank Truck Bottom Threaded
Padma MS 10 - ø 3" No
Unloading Hose Connection
Tank Truck Bottom Threaded
Padma HOBC 10 - ø 3" No
Unloading Hose Connection
Tank Truck Bottom Threaded
Padma SPB 11 - ø 3" No
Unloading Hose Connection
Tank Truck Bottom Threaded
Padma MS 11 - ø 3" No
Unloading Hose Connection
Source: TR

Civil works and materials

The structure material for covering the new truck loading station and for operating platforms
will be hot rolled structural steel sections, complying with ASTM A36.

The platform floor will be formed with hot galvanized steel grating.

The structure will be covered with steel sheet profile.

A reinforced concrete foundations system, including anchor bolts in order to fix the structure,
will be provided.

73
11.1.3 MODIFICATIONS FOR WAGON LOADING

Rail Wagon Loading system will be made by hoses for all products except to Jet A-1 that will
employ loading arm system. List of Jet A-1 loading arms are showing in table 10. The
location of each loading point is included in figure 2. In case the loading point for required
product exists in this location, this point will be maintained, but in the case it doesn’t exist for
that product in the location, a new one will have to be created.

To improve and automate the system as much as possible, it will be necessary to install a
flowmeter for each product on the different loading bays.

For the JET A-1 loading process it will be necessary to install new bottom loading arms, for
the wagons 1,2,3,4 of the existing gantry.

The materials of loading arms will be the following:

 Pipes: ASTM API 5L Gr B

 Flanges: ASTM A 105 & ASME B16.5
All the material will have a minimum rating of #150. The hoses to be supplied must be listed
by UL (Underwirted Labotatories) in accordance with BS - 1435Code.

The rotating joints must be provided with a simple lubrication system, to be able to carry out
maintenance without disassembling the loading arm.

A system must be in place to prevent the arm from leaving the safety limits, this system will
prevent by interlock that loading arm go out the safety zone. Additionally, a locking system
shall be also included to lock the arm in the resting position when not in use.

All the equipment’s will be delivered fully finished with protective paint and finish for specific
marine and tropical application.

TABLE 10- RAIL TANK LOADING – PADMA

VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY Loading Arm SIZE CONNECTION
RECOVER
Rail Tank Dry Connection A-106
Padma JET A-1 1 Bottom Arm ø 4" Yes
loading o API5L.
Rail Tank Dry Connection A-106
Padma JET A-1 2 Bottom Arm ø 4" Yes
loading o API5L.
Rail Tank Dry Connection A-106
Padma JET A-1 3 Bottom Arm ø 4" Yes
loading o API5L.

74
 VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY Loading Arm SIZE CONNECTION
RECOVER
Rail Tank Dry Connection A-106
Padma JET A-1 4 Bottom Arm ø 4" Yes
loading o API5L.

Source: TR

In next figure is shown existing and proposed Rail tank loading facilities in Padma Terminal:

FIGURE 2-EXISTING AND PROPOSED RAIL TANK LOADING FACILITY IN PADMA

TERMINAL

Source: TR

The Rail Tank Loading facility expansion is colored in blue in previous figure. Civil works of
this expansion (foundations, structures, etc.) are not included in the project scope. The scope
of works includes only the Mechanical (piping, valves, loading arms, hoses, etc.), Electrical
and Instrumentation works.

75
 11.1.4 MODIFICATIONS FOR DRUM LOADING

For barrel loading zone is necessary to build a new barrel loading bays with top loading
arms, the barrel zone will be built after the truck loading bays in the same loading area, a
new platform will be built in each bay to facilitate the barrel loading process at the rear of the
barrel truck, this platform will give more security for the operators when are loading drums.

The materials of loading arms will be the following:

 Pipes: API 5L Gr B or ASTM A 106 Gr B

 Flanges: ASTM A 105 & ASME B16.5
All the material will have a minimum rating of #150. The hoses to be supplied must be listed
by UL (Underwirted Labotatories) in accordance with BS - 1435Code.

The rotating joints must be provided with a simple lubrication system, to be able to carry out
maintenance without disassembling the loading arm.

A system must be in place to prevent the arm from leaving the safety limits, this system will
prevent by interlock that loading arm go out the safety zone. Additionally, a locking system
shall be also included to lock the arm in the resting position when not in use.

All the equipment’s will be delivered fully finished with protective paint and finish for specific
marine and tropical application.

For the drum (barrel) loading zone will build the following loading positions:

TABLE 11- BARREL LOADING – PADMA

LA according to
Loading VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY 24020-PAD-T- SIZE CONNECTION
Arm RECOVER
DW-004-S1
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma LDO 12 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma MTT 12 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma FO 12 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma SPB 12 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma HSD 13 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma HSD 13 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma HSD 13 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”

76
 LA according to
Loading VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY 24020-PAD-T- SIZE CONNECTION
Arm RECOVER
DW-004-S1
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma HSD 13 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma HSD 14 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma HSD 14 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma HSD 14 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma SKO 14 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma MS 15 LA-1 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma MS 15 LA-1 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma HOBC 15 LA-1 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”
Barrel Charging Rod for ø
Padma HOBC 15 LA-1 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading 2,5”

Source: TR

11.1.5 MODIFICATIONS FOR JETTIES LOADING AND UNLOADING OPERATIONS

At present, there are a lot of operations in the Lightering Jetty and in the side of the main
jetties, where a really wide range of different barges and vessels that load and unload
products.

Then, the operations of loading and unloading is advisable to continue being through hoses
and flanges.

The inputs and output of products will be measured by flowmeters integrated in the control
system and of course in the inventory systems, but no new loading and unloading facilities
are planned.

11.1.6 MODIFICATIONS IN PUMPING STATIONS

11.1.6.1 INTELLIGENT MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE (IMCC)

The existing starters MCC will be dismantled, and modern MCCs (intelligent) will be installed
in a new dedicated electrical room located near of every pump House, including, ETP, UPS,
Lighting and MOV Panels. The proposal for automation is to define a new iMCC for every

77
Pump House (DP, NDP and FO). These iMCCs will be able to interact with the new
Distributed Control System (DCS) and the new ESD (Emergency Shutdown).

The new iMCC shall be fed from the main existing Low Voltage Switchgear. For this plant, 3
iMCCs will be designed with the following main characteristics:

o A system comprising control modules, central unit(s), a serial bus connecting the
control modules to the central unit and a communication facility enabling connection
of the central unit to a Distributed Control System (DCS) through a Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC).

o The general bars shall be dimensioned, at least, for the incoming circuit breakers
rated current at the maximum temperature of the environmental conditions.

o Short circuit current: ≤ 36 kA, 1 second duration.

o Motor starter included in the MCC.

o The enclosure of the switchboard shall ensure a degree of protection against solid
foreign bodies and water of no less than IP41 according to the IEC 60529 Degrees of
protection provided by enclosures.

o The complete switchboard shall comply with Form 4b as indicated in IEC 60439 -1,
with separation panels between connection terminals for external power cables.

o Withdrawable motor starters.

o The proposed Motor starter systems (starter installed inside de IMCC whenever
possible) shall be as follows:

 Soft Starter (SS) in substitution of Y-Δ starter, providing a controlled ramp-up to

full speed by gradually increasing voltage to the motor terminals during startup.
SS for motors ≥ 37 kW (50 HP).

 DOL (Direct on line) for motors < 37 kW (50 HP).

 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) if required by the process, only for new motors
with duty type service S9 Acc. to IEC 60034-1.

o Starter Control Unit (SCU) modules shall be suitable for mounting in the motor
starter/feeder compartments or in an adjacent (common) compartment.

o The interface between the installed starter/feeder unit and the communication bus
within the Assembly shall be an integral part of the starter/feeder. The starter/feeder

78
 compartment shall remain withdrawable and the connection to the communication
bus shall be a single connection using self-centering plugs and sockets.

o The iMCS software shall allow access for engineering purposes to any SCU, on or off
line. Facilities to change set points, prepare or examine motor trend analysis, etc.,
shall be provided. Access to vital motor settings and DCS (Distributed Control
System) configuration shall be password protected.

o The communication interface bus between the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Ethernet
Switches and the SCUs shall withstand electromagnetic disturbances and be fully
protected against short circuits or any other failure without loss of communication.

o For every motor starter 1 Rotary switch with two fixed positions: Local-Remote, 1 pole
(in one position it closes one contact and in the other it closes another) shall be
installed in order to make a control selection (locally or remote from DCS (Distributed
Control System)).

o iMCC shall be designed as per IEC 61439-1/2.

o The Electrical Control Architecture proposed shall be as per drawing 24020-GEN-E-

DW-501-00 iMCC Electrical Control Architecture (included in Section 7).

11.1.6.2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU)

In order to control de motors locally, will be designed an RCU for every motor with the
following main characteristics:

o The control stations shall be designed for hazardous area. The type of protection
shall be a combination of "increased safety" and "flameproof" methods. Made of glass
fiber reinforced polyester (GRP).

o Elements that could cause sparks, such as pushbuttons, shall be flameproof.

o RCU and cable glands shall be certified and marked in accordance with the pertinent
standards.

o The marking shall conform to the requirements of applicable law and regulations.

o IP-65 (protection degree)

o Each RCU shall include the following elements:

 1 Green sensitive pushbutton with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts. Start.

 1 Red sensitive pushbutton with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts. Stop.

79
  1 Local/Remote hand switch

An independent Mushroom Pushbutton for hazardous area will be located at the pump house
in order to interact with the ESD-iMCC and provoque a safety emergency stop to the motors
in case of necessity with the following main characteristics:

 1 Red interlocked mushroom pushbutton, with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts, with

unlocking upon extraction. Emergency Stop.

 IP-65 (Protection degree)

 GRP (Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester) case

11.1.7 MODIFICATIONS IN LEVEL GAUGE AND INVENTORY SYSTEM

From the point of view of Instrumentation & Control, the Level Gauge and Inventory System,
(henceforth called Inventory Tank System) is the only automated system found in the plant.

The main purpose is to have a balance of product in each tank of the terminal, but there is
not a global mass balance, which should be a correlation of the input, output and storage of
the products.

In PADMA terminal, an ENRAF Inventory Tank System installed is based on radar

technology and implemented at least in the 95% of the farm tank.

11.1.7.1 ACTIVITIES TO INCLUDE FOR AUTOMATION

 Expand the Inventory Tank System over 100% of tanks farm, and integrate all of them
into the existing loop communication ENRAF controllers (CIU prime and CIU plus).

 Integrate the complete Inventory Tank System into the new main DCS Distribution
control System. ENRAF controllers, shall be integrated to the DCS, via Control Bus
Modbus TCP/IP communication standard.

 Implementation of an automatic overfilling prevention system (AOPS). The AOPS will be

designed to terminate flow to the protected tank in the event of loss of power. The
equipment will include an uninterruptible power supply, sensors, a safety logic solver
and final control elements.

11.1.7.2 INSTRUMENT REQUIRED FOR EACH TANK (ENRAF-HONEYWELL):

 One Smart Radar Level Instrument.

80
  One Temperature Transmitter (connected to Smart Radar Level as temperature
compensator).

 One Pressure Transmitter (connected to Smart Radar Level as pressure compensator).

 One Tank Side Indicator (local digital indicator connected to Smart Radar Level and
installed at the foot of the tank to see the level in real time).

 AOPS (recommended from a different supplier)

o One radar level (2 in one) with SIL level switch.

o Pressure and temperature sensors (for compensation, when needed)

11.1.7.3 OPERATION MODES

The Inventory Tank System is completely autonomous, so it can record levels, product
calculations and tank availability, among other functions.

Automatic mode: Local mode is not considered. Any data recording operation will be
automatic mode from the operations screen in the same Inventory System located in the
Control Room. In the same operating console, the operator will automatically take decisions
to align valves and initiate the tank filling sequence, prior notice of availability tank from
ENRAF system.

See drawing 24020-GEN-I-DW-001-00 Typical Control Diagrams for Instruments (included in

Section 7).ING – JNA

11.1.8 INLETS OF STORAGE TANKS (DOUBLE BLOCK & BLEED VALVES)

The tank storage operations commonly face the risk of contamination and loss of volume If
isolation valves leak. Currently some line blinds are installed in the plant piping system to
avoid leakage, but the use of line blinds for segregation involves a long, costly, and
hazardous process of drain down, lockout, and tagout. The Traditional gate valves in double
block-and-bleed configuration installed, may produce loss of fuel from the open bleed.

In order to avoid leakage and product loss, double block and bleed valves will be used, they
are highly recommended as they offer simple, provable and tank-side isolation, ensuring
valve integrity.

The use of this type valves will bring the following benefits:

81
 - Zero leakage. Valves withstand frequent cycling and have drop tight seal shut off up
and down stream.

- No shear forces. The valve seals are separated from the body and are maintained at
this state during plug rotation. This eliminates abrasion forces from seals and extends
seal life.

- One double-block&bleed block. If any leakage occurs, it would be eliminated via the
bleed.

- In line maintenance: It is possible to inspect and replace the sealing slips with the
valve still in line.

11.1.9 VALVES MOTORIZATIONS

11.1.9.1 MOTOR OPERATED VALVES (MOV)

Motorized valves shall be electrically actuated and will be communicated in a ring topology
with high availability and interconnected to the Main Control System via Master Station
Rotork Unit. MOV related to Emergency Shutdown shall be hardwired directly to ESD
(Emergency Shutdown) System.

The motorized valve shall be also equipped, at least with the following components:

 Local displays (Field)

 Selector with Local/Remote Control (Field)

 Open/Close/Stop Local Control (Field)

 Open/Close/Stop Remote Control (Configured in DCS (Distributed Control

System) control room)

 ESD Relay Contact (Hardware in ESD: Emergency Shutdown System)

 Hand Operation: (Direct drive handwheel to provide reliable emergency manual

operation in the event of a power supply failure. Includes padlockable hand/auto
clutch for safe operation even when the motor is running.

A Rotork Master Station unit will control a certain set of MOVs (about sixty MOVs per Master
Station), with a redundant communication path to provide a high availability for the DCS in
case of communication failure and spurious trips. Master Station should communicate with all
MOVs to:

82
  Controlling actions of opening/closing valves

 Monitoring the state, alarms and analog variables

 Exchanging data through the Communication Bus

 Self-Diagnosis features with automatic fault location indication and communication

performance data signaling

The Master Station shall be connected to:

 Main DCS through the communication Control Bus via Modbus TCP/IP protocol

 ESD (Emergency Shutdown) for emergency stop events related with safety
control sequences. The connection shall be conventional wiring to the ESD cards
terminals.

See drawing 24020-GEN-I-DW-001-00 Typical Control Diagrams for Instruments (included in

Section 7).

11.1.9.2 MOTORIZED VALVES PANELS

Will be defined Ex rated local panels for Motor Operated Valves (MOV), suitable for outdoor
installation in hazardous areas with the aim to feed motor valve actuators; thirty (30) circuit
breaker per panel as per drawing 24020-GEN-E-DW-502-00 Typical MOV Panel Scheme
(included in Section 7).

MV Panels shall have the main characteristics listed below:

o The distribution switchboards shall be manufactured with a rigid and undeformable

reinforced steel plate structure with a metallic enclosure or, glass fiber reinforced
polyester (GPR).

o The thickness of the structure plate shall be no less than 2 mm.

o The external enclosure of the switchboard will ensure a degree of protection against
the entry of solid bodies of no less than IP65.

11.1.10 FLOW METERING SYSTEMS

The automated registration and control of the Mass Balance, provide the possibility to
contrast inputs and outputs of the products in the Terminal, so that it is mandatory to record

83
them to obtain the mass accurate balance in the plant, when inputs and output are added
with the inventory tanks. The Most important metering points are:

 Metering point in the loading arms for dispatching to the trucks and drums

 Metering points in pipes, as input from jetty or refinery

 Inventory Tanks, as a storage products in the tanks.

In Flow Metering for pipes with custody transfer between vendor and buyer, the balance of
product in the Terminal have to be done with high quality measurement, so that Fiscalization
system for flow measurement systems needs to have, a compensation algorithmic which
could be implemented in a local Flow computer. This kind of fiscal measurement would allow
to have an accurate Balance of the plant, with compensation mechanisms. So, Flow
computer is needed, to calculate the flow compensated in Temperature and pressure, in a
monophasic state of the flow, which is liquid in this case, due to the liquid hydrocarbon.

In this kind of installation Skid, the conditioning of the flow process in mandatory, having:

 Filtration and De-aeration of the flow product, to have monophasic product

 Flow Metering, with temperature compensation, and Pressurization and flow

computer, which aims to calculate de Total flow transferred.

 Control Valves, which allows to control pressure of the flow which go through the
flow, and assure not to have bubble in the measurement procedure.

 All devices integrated to a Flow Computer

 Could have a Proving stage connections, which aims to recalibrated and

certificate the Metering System by Third parties Organization.

A compact metering for loading trucks include similar component than the Skid Metering, but
in a compact format of installation:

 Filter and deaerator

 Flow computer

 Temperature and pressure transmitter, if apply compensation flow.

 Outlet Control Valve.

In the next table, we try to identify the specific application of the Flow Metering, into the
different relative locations in the terminal and principal of measurement for instruments
(ultrasonic, Coriolis, etc).

84
 TABLE 12- MESUREMENT MODELS

MEASUREMENT MODELS

PRODUCT LOADING CUSTODY MEASUREMENT

HOSES METERS MODELS WHERE MEASURE
MOVEMENT ARM TRANSFER MODEL

MEASURE
SHIP/BARGE X X SKID/INDIVIDUAL CORIOLIS JETTY/TERMINAL
METER
SHIP/BARGE
RECEPTION (LIGHTERING) X INDIVIDUAL METER CORIOLIS JETTY/TERMINAL

MEASURE
PIPE
X SKID/INDIVIDUAL CORIOLIS TERMINAL
(REFINERY)
METER

STORAGE INVENTORY ENRAF TANKS

POSITIVE
TANK TRUCK X X MEASURE SKID TERMINAL LOADING BAY
DISPLACEMENT

RAIL CAR X X MEASURE SKID CORIOLIS RAIL CAR GANTRY

LOADING SHIP/BARGE
SYSTEM INDIVIDUAL METER CORIOLIS JETTY
(INTERNAL)
SHIP/BARGE
X X INDIVIDUAL METER CORIOLIS JETTY
(BUNKERING)
POSITIVE
DRUM/BARREL X X MEASURE SKID TERMINAL LOADING BAY
DISPLACEMENT
POSITIVE
TANK TRUCK X X MEASURE SKID TERMINAL LOADING BAY
UNLOADING DISPLACEMENT
SYSTEM POSITIVE
RAIL CAR X X MEASURE SKID RAIL CAR GANTRY
DISPLACEMENT

11.1.11 OPERATION SEQUENCIES AND MODES

This chapter clarifies the basic principles and general technical requirements of the control
and supervision of the terminal's hydrocarbon tank farm. The specific details of the
automation and control system will be defined in general drawing, equipment specifications,
control system documents and diagrams to be developed by EPC contractor later in detail
engineering. The following criteria have been considered in the design of the terminal Control
System:

Three (3) zones or areas of the terminal have been distinguished:

 Product reception area (Jetty and Refinery pipeline)

 Product storage area (Tank Farm).

 Dispatch Area (Delivery trucks, Delivery rail wagons and Delivery ships)

The integration of field instrumentation and packaged equipment has been considered in all
areas associated with the Terminal.

85
The Control System will be configured based on drawing 24020-PAD-I-DW-500-00 Control
System Architecture POCL (included in Section 7).

11.1.11.1 LEVEL OF CONTROLS

There will also be three levels of automation: Field level, Control Level and Supervision Level

Field Level:

The field level is constituted by the field instruments, motorized valves, bus gateways, input /
output signal cards. The interface between the Field Level (instrumentation) and Control
Level will be made in conventional cabling for analog signals and communication cabling
under protocol Modbus TCP/IP for communicated signals.

Control level:

The control level consists of control system controllers and package units sub-systems. The
control elements in this level are communicated each other with the operation and
supervision system through a redundant Ethernet Control Bus. Also, at this level, the
operating sequences, the safety interlocks and the terminal control logic are executed.

Supervision Level:

The supervision level is represented by the Operating Stations, Engineering, Printers and
remote terminals of the sub-system units.

Level dedicated only to users of the control system, instant and massive data management,
and communication with the Company's document management system.

This level includes:

 Application Servers

 Engineering Stations

 Operating Stations

 Report and alarm printers

The integration of the following systems has been considered for the three (3) areas
considered.

Product reception area (Jetty, Refinery pipeline and SPM):

- Flowmeter System of the jetty Ship unloading and flowmeter of refinery pipeline.

Product Hydrocarbon Storage Area:

86
 - Inventory Tank System, based on volume measurement technology ENRAF type and
accessory equipment.

- Remote Control of Pumps Group for delivery products.

- Remote Control of Pumps Group for transfer of products between tanks.

Dispatch Area:

- Truck Delivery Weighing System

- Remote Control of Pumps Group for delivery products.

- Flowmeter System for Trucks delivery products

- Flowmeters System for Railwagons delivery products

- Identification and Management System for Truck delivery through electronic cards.

11.1.11.2 OPERATION MODES

Automatic Mode:

Is produced based on the control sequence steps implemented in the terminal control logic
operation that will be described in the corresponding functional documents. The Start/Stop
permissive must be met regarding to maintain the safety operation in all the terminal. In
control room, the supervision and operation will be made through screen operation stations,
indicators and buttons in automatic mode.

Manual Remote Mode:

The operator performs the Start/Stop operation from existing pushbuttons on the Operator
Stations Screens. Previously, the Start/Stop permissive stablished in the control logic must
be met.

Local Mode:

The Start/Stop will be carried out by the operator in the field through the Local Stations at the
foot of each electrical equipment. Through the local/remote selector (field) it will be possible
to Start/Stop the equipment locally and from the control room it will be possible to view the
operating mode by means of a confirmation signal. There will be two (2) different local
modes: from local stations in the field and from control room in the operation screen of Main
Control System.

87
11.1.12 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

The installation's fire-fighting system will be dimensioned considering the highest possible
individual risk.
Thermal radiation received by vulnerable elements located in the vicinity of fires requires
knowledge of numerous variables, such as, the geometry of the fire. The heat generated by
combustion, the fraction that is emitted in the form of radiation, the possible formation of
fumes, radiation absorbed by the atmosphere, the position of the object, etc.
The criteria for affecting surfaces to be cooled according to the tanks or other fire risk in the
project, will be based on determining a distance that guarantees that the fire cannot spread
to neighboring containers. As criteria for affecting the project (in all scenarios) the equipment
or facilities that are affected by a thermal radiation flux of 12.50 kw/ m2 must be taken into
account.
In order to size the fire pump and the water reserve, the most risky scenario to consider in
this project is the fire in a tank, and the projection of water on 50% of the surface of the tank
wall adjacent areas that are affected by thermal radiation.

11.1.12.1 RECEPTION (JETTY ZONE)

In the Jetty zone, the current system for protect this zones combine various hydrant-monitors
connected to a foam tank with a line mixer for provide foam, with this system the loading
zone are protected, but this system is not the most recommendable, with the current
configuration is very difficult to manage a manual monitor, because the radiation will be very
high in the zone in case of fire, the proposed system include a monitor tower with remote
control in a safe zone , as minimum it´s necessary to consider the installation of water and
foam monitors in each docking point. Water screens or curtains (Hidroshields) must also be
installed along the loading point of the jetty zone, to separate possible fire risk in a ship from
loading point. All the facilities of firefighting must be manually and remotely operated from
one point adequately separated from the risk point.

11.1.12.2 STORAGE TANKS

Only some tanks have installed Fire Fighting system, in this cases the fire protection system
of the tanks is directly connected to hydrant network with a tie-in and a gate valve, this is not
an automatic mode for protect the tanks, with this system in case of fire you need to go to the

88
valve and open in the system, normally this system does not work in case of fire because
any operator can´t support the radiation of the burned tank.

Also is necessary to protect the tank, with a water spray system and a foam system, in
accordance with OISD-117 Fire Protection Facilities for Petroleum Depots, Terminal, Pipeline
Installation & Lube Oil Installation standards.

 Water flow calculated, for cooling a tank on fire at a rate of 3 lpm/m2 of tank shell area.
 Water flow calculated, for exposure protection for all other tanks falling within a radius
of (R +30) m from centre of the tank on fire (R-Radius of tank on fire) and situated in
the same dyke, at a rate of 3 lpm/m2 of tank shell area.
 Water flow calculated, for exposure protection for all other tanks falling outside a radius
of (R+30) m from centre of the tank on fire and situated in the same dyke, at a rate of 1
lpm/ m2 of tank shell area.
 Spray nozzles shall be directed radially to the tank at a distance not exceeding 0.6 M
from the tank surface.

 Foam solution applicable rate for cone roof tanks shall be taken as 5 lpm/m2

In the fixed roof tank, the foam discharge is done normally intersuperficially, the tanks must
have the followings foam chambers.

TABLE 13- FOAM CHAMBERS FOR TANKS

Foam Chambers
Tank Diameter (meters)
(No)

Above 18 & up to 20 2

Above 20 & up to 25 3

Above 25& up to 30 4

Above 30 & up to 35 5

Above 35 & up to 40 6

Above 40 & up to 45 8

Above 45& up to 50 10

Source: TR

89
An additional foam chamber will be installed for tank more than 60 diameters meters for each
465 m2.

For floating-roof tanks the discharge method is in the top of seal.

Fixed foam discharge outlets located above the mechanical shoe seal, above a tube seal
water shield, or above a secondary seal shall be used in conjunction with a foam dam.

The following methods shall be permitted for application of fixed foam discharge outlets:

 Fixed foam discharge outlets mounted above the top of the tank shell

- Fixed foam discharge outlets mounted on the periphery of the floating roof.

TABLE 14- SEAL TYPES FOR TANKS

Maximum Spacing Between

Discharge Outlets With
Seal Type Minimum Minimum
Application Discharge Time
305 mm Foam 610 mm Foam
Rate
Dam Dam

Mechanical soe seal 12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m

Tube seal with metal

12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m
weather shield

Fully or partly combustible

12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m
secondary seal

All metal secondary seal 12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m

Source: TR

Where the fixed foam discharge outlets are mounted above the top of the tank shell, a foam
splash-board is necessary due to the effects of winds.

The detection for floating-roof and fixed tanks will be doing with a fiber optic wire. This
system is composed by a control unit and the wire, the system is highly recommended to
protect zones like a tank farm, early detection allows time for automatic or manual
extinguishing and draining volatile fuels.

90
This system is very sensible, can detect an increasing of temperature in a specific point, the
system easily adapts to retrofit or new installation in both internal and external floating tank.

For a floating roof tank the wire will be installed in the seal along the perimeter of tank, for a
fixed tank the wire will be installed in monitor gauge points, vent arear or manholes.

FIGURE 3 – MONITORING TANKS

Source: TR

A confined pool fire is a fire produced by the combustion of fuel spill within a boundary or
perimeter where confines the mass of hydrocarbon. Boundaries can be made up of walls that
enclose a certain area. Fire or liquid fuel fire requires a point of ignition, the oxidizer (oxygen
in the air) and the triggering of the reaction. For this type of fire (pool fire). This type of risk
exists in any tank or container or pool that stores hydrocarbons, as well as in areas that
handle hydrocarbons capable of suffering spills and catching fire, for this type of fire is very
highly recommended use flame detectors.

Flame detectors utilize optical technologies to detect flames. Flames are known to emit
electromagnetic radiation in the infrared (IR), visible light, and ultraviolet (UV) wavelengths
depending on the fuel source. Because of this, optical flame-sensing technologies have been
developed utilizing UV, UV/IR and multi-spectrum infrared. These products rely on line-of-site
detection of the radiation emitted in the spectral bands to determine if a flame is real.

91
Consider whether the potential flame you are looking to detect will be hydrocarbon based or
non-organic. With Hydrocarbon flames, a combination of methane and oxygen produce
carbon dioxide and water. This type of fire creates a UV signal reading at 0.2 microns and IR
signal reading at 2.7 microns and 4.5 microns. Hydrogen flames only produce water
molecules and therefore we do not see the same CO2 peak that a hydrocarbon flame is
known to produce.

Optical flame detectors come with a “field of view” range, similar to the lens on a camera.
Taking the field of view range into account will help determine how many detectors are
needed to cover an installation or a specific area within the installation.

FIGURE 4 - FLAME DETECTOR SPACING

Source: TR

In addition, a sufficient number of portable or on-car extinguishers, located in accordance

with the requirements of OISD Standard 117, in a visible position, easily accessible and
strategically around retention pails and preferably near stations of pumping, access to the
buckets and face / discharge facilities. The storage park area will be covered by monitors (or
monitors mounted on hydrants) whose function will be to cool tanks and spheres. The kind of
monitor will be according to stored products.

11.1.12.3 PUMP HOUSE

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the pump house.

The fixed extinguishing system based on water-foam for the protection of hydrocarbon
dispatch pumps must have the necessary elements to apply a design regime of not less than
20.4 lpm/m2), all according to the OISD Standard 117.

92
They will be protected with at least two nozzles provided that the correct coverage of the
equipment is ensured, preferably oriented to cover suction and discharge flanges.

The detection system can be done electrically, using heat detectors (Fenwall detectors) or it
can be done with a pneumatic detection system using sprinklers.

Fenwall detectors are highly reliable and have good resistance to operation from non-hostile
sources. They are also very easy and inexpensive to maintain. On the down side, they do not
function until room temperatures have reached a substantial temperature, at which point the
fire is well underway and damage is growing exponentially. Subsequently, thermal detectors
are usually not permitted in life safety applications. They are also not recommended in
locations where there is a desire to identify a fire before substantial flames occur, such as
spaces where high value thermal sensitive contents are housed.

A spot type heat detector will cover all points located within 0.7 times the listed spacing. The
listed spacing for heat detectors is S= 50 ft (15.3 m).

11.1.12.4 LOADING SYSTEM

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the loading areas.

The fixed extinguishing system based on water-foam for the protection of hydrocarbon
loading areas (loading trucks and wagon loading) must have the necessary elements to
apply a design regime of not less than 6.5 lpm / m2 (0.16 gpm / p2) for a period of 10 minutes,
all according to the OISD Standard 117.

Also, the system must be completed with additional discharge of the foam monitors installed
neared of the loading zones.

The detection system will be done with fenwall thermal detectors combined with flame
detectors.

11.1.12.5 HYDRANTS

Hydrants will be installed following the design codes of OISD Standard 117. They must be
secured to the pipe and anchored, in accordance with the requirements of OISD Standard
117.

The hydrants must have a connection diameter with the main pipe not less than 6”. Each
hydrant must be equipped with an individual shutoff valve located on the bypass that

93
connects to the main network. Between every two hydrants an exterior hose cabinet with
hoses for hydrants will be installed.

11.1.12.6 MONITORS

Fixed water or water / foam monitors will be installed at strategic points, in areas with a
thermal impact of less than 5.1 Kw / m2, and around or within areas where a fire risk has
been identified. The fixed monitors will be autonomous or installed in hydrants.

In particular, monitors will be installed in hydrants located around process areas and storage
and transfer facilities for toxic, flammable or LPG products.

The monitors will be foam-water monitors around the hydrocarbon storage areas such as
diesel and gasoline.

11.1.12.7 FIRE PUMP

With the pressure and flow data of the existing pumps in the installation, the capacity of the
pump is insufficient. Therefore it is necessary to install new pumps, the pumps have to meet
the water demand of the scenario with the highest risk, in this case the highest risk is a fire in
tank T-02, and the affected tanks by the fire radiation, tanks T-01,T-03,T-04, T-05, T-06.
The pumps shall be capable of discharging 150% of its rated discharge at a minimum of 65%
of the rated head. The Shut-off head shall not exceed 120% of rated head.

The pumping group it will be composed by 3 diesel pumps supplied at 50%.

The water reserve tank doesn´t need to be calculated, the water supply comes from an
inexhaustible natural source.
The design of the fire pump and installation must be in accordance with OISD Standard 117
and NFPA 20 codes.

11.1.13 EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT

The POCL facility has an oily water collection system, using underground networks that
discharge into an open pool, where the water and hydrocarbon are separated by gravity.

Improvement of the contaminated water treatment system is included in the scope of the
project.

94
Facilities and equipment will be designed so that water discharged to the outside of the
Storage Facility will have a hydrocarbon content that is below the limits allowed by the
regulations. In order to reach these limits, an analyzer and flow measurement system will be
available that will record in real time the hydrocarbon content and the discharge flow, not
allowing the exit if this content exceeds the pre-set limits, and therefore returning it to the
start of treatment. This system facilitates the control of the discharge in real time, as well as
allowing the elaboration of weekly, monthly and annual statistics with the stored records.

There is a plant for each terminal; each of them is according to document 24020-GEN-M-SP-
004 Effluent Treatment Plant Specification (included in Section 6. Employer’s Requirements,
item 6.6.2 FEED which is part of sub-section 6.6 Supplementary Information)

11.1.14 GENERAL ELECTRICAL MODIFICATIONS

11.1.14.1 ELECTRICAL LOW VOLTAGE CABLES

To feed the motor pumps from the iMCC, new low voltage cable will be installed using
armored cables and cable glands for hazardous areas. Low voltage electrical cables shall
have the following features:

o Cables shall be designed according to IEC 60502.

o All cables shall be flame-retardant and fire-resistant in accordance with IEC 60332-1
and IEC 60332-3-24 (Category C), respectively. Halogen emissions (CLH) shall be
less than 15 %, measured by the test stipulated in IEC 60754.

o All cables shall be suitable for installation in classified areas where there is a risk of
fire or explosion.

o The rated voltage of the cables shall be 0.6/1 kV, and be applied to all the power,
lighting and control circuits covered by the typical operating voltages (115, 230, 400
and 500 V).

o All conductors shall be copper, in accordance with IEC 60228.

o Conductors shall be class 5, in accordance with IEC 60228.

o Cable insulation shall consist of an extruded layer of cross-linked polyethylene

(XLPE), high module ethylene-propylene rubber (HEPR) or any equivalent material,
suitable for an operating temperature of 90ºC and a short-circuit temperature of
250ºC. The minimum thicknesses and insulation properties shall be those defined in
the IEC 60502-1 standard.

95
 o The cables to be installed in classified areas (risk of fire and explosion) shall be
armoured type.

o Cables must be resistant to Hydrocarbons and oils.

o The armour shall be made from galvanized steel wire, unless another alternative is
defined. The characteristics, dimensions and test requirements shall comply with the
IEC 60502-1 standard.

11.1.14.2 CABLE GLANDS FOR ARMOURED CABLES

Cable gland shall have the features listed below:

o Be made of brass or stainless steel, protection degree IP 66, Exd/Exe for connection
with IICT6 equipment metric thread.

o Cable entries with cylindrical thread must have a waterproof bed joint in order to
guarantee the degree of protection of the enclosure on which they are installed.

11.1.14.3 JUNCTION BOXES

Junction boxes shall be installed wherever necessary and shall meet the following
requirements:

o They shall include cable glands, stoppers and terminals installed.

o Construction material shall be one of the following:

 Aluminum alloy with reinforced walls to allow holes for at least 5 thread screw.

 Polyamide/polyester reinforced with fiberglass.

o All boxes shall have a protection degree of IP 65 or higher.

o The protection level against impacts for the aluminum alloy or thermoplastic boxes
shall be IK08 or higher.

11.1.14.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION CABLE ROUTING

From the new iMCC to the motor pumps, new cable will run aerial or buried, where
applicable

- Aerial cable routing

96
 Aerial cable routing shall be made on cable trays, preferably in the vertical position,
conveniently secured to the structure.

Cable tray shall have the following characteristics:

o Types:

 Perforated metal cable tray (for secondary cable distribution).

 Metal ladder tray (for main cable distribution).

o Material: Stainless steel hot-dip galvanized.

o Cable trays shall be designed according to IEC 61537.

o In areas of very high corrosion, cable trays can be made of PVC or similar.

The cable tray and the cables shall be laid, so that the structure offers a physical
protection for the cables. Cables shall be conveniently tied to avoid undulation, with a
maximum separation between ties of 1200 mm (47 inch) for horizontal routing and 500
mm (20 inch) for vertical routing or horizontal routing with vertical position. Definitive ties
shall be corrosion resistant.

Cable trays and/or cables shall not be attached to process piping.

Cables shall be preferably mounted on a single layer, taking no more than 60 to 70% of
the cable tray’s capacity. When the entire installation is aerial, cables can be laid on two
layers, using the appropriate derating coefficients.

- Underground cable routing

Cables running under roads shall run in PVC conduits of at least 150mm
(6 inch) internal diameter, with thick walls, high pressure, embedded in concrete.

Inspection pits shall be installed every 20 m (66 ft) in straight stretches and at all
changes of direction.

Inspection pits shall be placed at both sides of road crossings and when there is a
change from underground to aerial.

Routing of underground conduits shall be designed to avoid floods; therefore adequate

drains shall be provided at lower points.

Used and reserve conduits shall be sealed at both ends to avoid obstructions.

Cables can be buried directly in the ground whenever possible.

97
 The layout of cables shall be evaluated for each situation, so that there will be no
interference due to capacitive and/or inductive effects.

11.1.14.5 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

A Lightning Protection system according to NFC 17-102 will be designed in the FEED for
protection of all types of structures and open areas. The protection device proposed is a
“Lightning Rod with Early Streamer Emission (ESE) System”.

The main characteristics to considerer for ESE are the following:

- High level of protection

- Shall preserves its initial properties after each discharge.

- The device doesn't offer any resistance to discharge conduction.

- Lightning rod without electrical components. Maxim durability guaranteed.

- It doesn't need external power supply.

- Operation guaranteed in any atmospheric condition.

- High resistance to temperature. Maximum temperature: 125ºC.

- High resistance to weather conditions and corrosive atmospheres.

- Maintenance free.

The specific function of lightning rod with ESE is producing an upward stream of ionized
particles that will channel the eventual electrical discharge from its origin.

Installation:

- The tip of the lightning rod should be located, at least two meters above the highest
building or element to be protected.

- A head-mast adapter piece is required in order to attach the lightning rod to the mast
selected for its installation.

- The lightning rod should be connected to a grounding point by way of one or various
conducting cables which will go down, whenever possible, the exterior of the
construction with the shortest and straightest possible trajectory.

- The earth termination systems, whose resistance should be the lowest possible (less
than 10 ohms), should guarantee the most rapid possible dissipation of the lightning
current discharge.

98
Protection level shall be calculated according to NFC 17-102 (Lightning Risk Assessment).

11.1.14.6 LIGHTING SYSTEM

Outdoor Lighting system:

The main objective of industrial outdoor lighting system consists on supplying the quantity
and quality of illumination system that provides the maximum requirements of security and
comfort to operating personnel.

For external areas, will be designed a High Mast Flood Lighting System. Led lighting fixtures
is proposed with the aim to reduce cost and save energy due to their highly energy efficient.

The lighting fixture model and description are indicated below as an example:

Required lighting level for each area will be accomplished by installing the appropriate
number of lighting fixtures on each single lighting tower.

The illuminance suggested by standards is 20 lux for general outdoor areas. Considering
towers of 20m height with 3 or 4 300W floodlights LED.

Plant lighting circuits shall be fed from dedicated lighting distribution switchboards.

Outdoor lighting circuits shall be designed for automatic switching via photo-electric
relays. Control circuits for photo-electric relays shall be 'fail-safe', i.e., to switch the
lights on if a fault occurs in the photo-electric relay.

Indoor Lighting system:

An indoor lighting system will be designed for the new indoor installations with the following
illumination level where applicable:

- Control room 300-400 Lux

- Electrical room 300-400 Lux

- Pump house 100-150 Lux

- Truck Loading area 100-150 Lux

The lighting installation shall be designed so that ceiling lighting groups can be switched off
independently to suit operators' needs.

11.1.14.7 EARTHING NETWORK

99
When working on small expansions in existing installations, the original philosophy shall be
maintained whenever possible unless the new design improves or delivers clear technology
advances.

The following elements shall be connected to the existing earthing network:

- Electrical Rooms

- Electrical panels

- Piping

- Structures and other metal containers without electrical parts

- Instrumentation systems and circuits

- Lightning and surge arrester

- Tanks

Truck and Wagon Loading earthing

The earth connection is necessary to eliminate static currents during loading and/or
unloading operations.

Vehicles shall be earthed using an automatic lock mechanism that shall prevent loading /
unloading the lorry or tank wagon unless static electricity has first been discharged. An alarm
shall signal if earthing is not correct.

Weighing platforms will be connected to the main earth network. The system shall be
permanently connected to earth during the load / unload operations.

11.1.15 PRODUCT CHANGE IN STORAGE TANK AT PADMA TERMINAL

Contractor will be responsible to develop all documents, drawings (P&IDs, layouts, plot
plans, detail drawings, etc), Data Sheets, Specifications, Hazop, studies, etc., corresponding
to EPC scope with the products indicated in FEED, but including the change of products that
will be stored in tank indicated below, according the last information provided by OWNER:

1) The product of Tank T-34 was previously MTT. But now it is being converted to an HOBC
tank. So, in the future the Product of Tank T-34 will be HOBC.

100
11.2 MPL

11.2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM

11.2.1.1 CONTROL SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The Control System will be designed, based in an open architecture that integrates complex
sub-systems and package units to obtain optimized control of the terminal. The architecture
diagram indicated below will be taken as a basic design for the development and detailed
engineering for the Control System. See drawing 24020-MEG-I-DW-500-00 Control System
Architecture MPL (included in Section 7).

12.2.1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

For the design of the Control System, the following design criteria will be following at least:
 The design will allow the plant to operate continuously, 365 days a year, 24 hours a
day.
 The design should ensure the greatest ease of operation, supervision, maintenance
and integration of systems.
 There will be independent control and supervision functionality for each of the plant's
production and storage systems.
 Future extensions and integrations of existing equipment and systems in the plant or
new construction will be allowed.
 Service guarantees will be offered regarding Hardware, Software and Spare parts
availability.
 Programming standards will be followed, aimed at good maintenance, improvement,
updating and extensions of the system.
 There will be control of failure actions, alarms and transitions, within safe operating
situations.
 Control System will incorporate current technologies of modern systems, like DCS
(Distributed Control System), PLC (Programmable Logic Controller), SCADA, etc.
being any local option valued by MEGHNA terminal.
 The System must integrate functions of measurement, regulation control, automation,
protection, communication and interfaces with the other sub-systems, data storage
and generation of reports, trend graphs, alarms and events.

11.2.1.3 INTEGRATION SYSTEM

According to above drawing, the control system will interface with other sub-system as
detailed in the following:

101
  Inventory Tank System (ITS)
 Flow Metering System
 Motor Operated Valves System (MOV)
 Motor Control Center System (MCC)
 Access Control System (ACS)
 Weighbridge Truck System (WTS)
 Tank Management System (TMS)
 Enterprise Resources Planning (ERP)

Communication with Sub-systems shall be carried out through control system cards or
through the control modules. All communication shall be based on:

 Bi-directional communication (both reading and writing).

 Control System shall act as master on the communicating link.
 Using Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP and/or OPC.

 In series using the RS-232C, RS-422 or RS-485 standards when apply.

 A suitable communications protocol for multi-drop connections and widely accepted in

the industrial environment (Preferably Modbus).

11.2.1.4 ERP SYSTEM

As it is shown in Control System Architecture (Figure 8), the highest level will be an ERP
System Server.

ERP system shall integrate with TMS (Terminal Management System), gathering the
required Process & Metering information along with Access Control System information to
provide:

 Procurement Management

 Supply Chain Management (i.e. Tank Storage, Loading Areas)

 Asset Management (Operation & Maintenance)

 Human Capital Management

In addition, ERP can include:

 Project management and accounting

102
  Reporting & Analytics

 Financial Management

Optionally, ERP System can be hosted in the Cloud. It shall comply with Cybersecurity
International Standards (i.e. Network Isolation / Secure Architecture, Subsystems
Maintenance & Security Policies) and COMPANY’s Cybersecurity Plan.

ERP System interface with TMS shall use RFC (Remote Function Call) interface protocol, so
as to simplify programming of communication processes between systems and manage error
handling.

11.2.1.5 CONTROL ROOM BUILDING PROPOSAL

See drawing reference 24020-MEG-I-DW-501-00 Control and cabinets room layouts.

Meghna Terminal (included in Section 7).

11.2.1.6 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

With the aim to support the new DCS (Distributed Control System) and ESD (Emergency
Shutdown) systems, will be designed and UPS to supply safety voltage and guarantee their
correct functioning in case of a black out.

The UPS will have the following main characteristics:

o It shall be designed as per in IEC 62040-3.

o Each unit shall have a 400 V, 50 Hz, three-phase power supply with neutral connected
directly to earth. The protective conductor shall be separated from the neutral.

o The system shall admit variations in voltage and frequency, both singular and
combined, in ranges between ±10% and ±5% respectively, without affecting its
operation and without causing overheating.

o UPS output voltage: 400/220V, 3Ph+N.

o The equipment must be designed to supply a minimum load with a power factor
between 0.4 inductive and 0.9 capacitive.

o The equipment shall be designed to work continuously with the specified load and shall
also be capable of supplying 150% of the rated load for 60 seconds through the
inverter, with output characteristics within the specified tolerances.

103
 o The batteries shall be of the Li-Ion type, with a minimum autonomy of 30 minutes.

o UPS system shall have the configuration as per in the following drawing: 24020-MEG-
E-DW-002 UPS Single Line Diagram JOCL (included in Section 7).

11.2.2 MODIFICATIONS FOR TRUCK LOADING

The liquid hydrocarbon dispatch procedure works as follows:

 The truck is weighed on the plant entrance before reaching the loading area, to check
the tare of the vehicle. The weight is reflected in the computer of the corresponding
operator.

 Before the truck is located on the filling island, the corresponding pre-operational
checks are carried out, both administrative and security.

 Once the pre-operational checks have been carried out, the truck is placed on the bay
designated to load, where it´s locked, grounded and connected to the overfill
detection system.

 The loading process begins, it will be from bottom or top of the truck, until the
flowmeter reaches the authorized quantity, or the overfilling probe detects that is full.

 When the loading process is finished, is necessary to disconnect the followings:

 Vapor recovery hoses

 Hose or loading arm

 Overfilling system

 Grounding connection of the truck.

A new truck loading zone will be built, the total dimensions will be 70 meters (large) x 12
meters (wide), and it will be consisting to the following areas:

 FO, this zone will have 2 bays and top loading arms.

 Loading Area, this zone will have 10 bays and top loading arms.

 Unloading Area, this zone will have 3 bays and bottom hoses.

 Drum loading Area, this zone will have 2 bays and top loading arms.

The construction of the new truck loading station will be built in different phases, until it´s
finished the old truck loading will be kept, so that the plant continuous to be operational, is

104
necessary to build a new platform and bays with loading arms, this platform and loading
arms will give more security for the operator works.

The work area of the loading arms is defined on the drawing 24020-MEG-T-DW-004-00-S1
to S5 Meghna truck loading zones details (included in Section 7).

The truck loading zone includes 19 double dispatch bays for the loading of 2 trucks. Each
island will have 4 loading arms, the dimensions of the loading arms shall will be designed
following criteria:

 The loading arm will be operated in all the assigned loading zone.
 In the loading moment, the truck will be situated on the loading area as marked on the
ground.
The materials of the loading arm will be the following:
 Pipes: ASTM A 106 Gr B or API 5L Gr B
 Flanges: ASTM A 105
All the material will have a minimum rating of #150. The hoses to be supplied must be listed
by UL (Underwirted Labotatories) in accordance with Item 9.5 of API 2510 Code.

The rotating joints must be provided with a simple lubrication system, to be able to carry out
maintenance without disassembling the loading arm.

A system must be in place to prevent the arm from leaving the safety limits, this system will
prevent by interlock that loading arm go out the safety zone. Additionally, a locking system
shall be also included to lock the arm in the resting position when not in use.

All the equipment’s will be delivered fully finished with protective paint and finish for specific
marine and tropical application.

TABLE 15- TANK TRUCK LOADING – MEGHNA SOUTH & NORTH

LA according
to
Loading VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY 24020-MEG- SIZE CONNECTION
Arm RECOVERY
T-DW-004-
S2/S3/S5
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HSD 1 LA-1 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HSD 1 LA-1 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Meghna Tank HOBC 1 Top Arm ø 4" Charging Rod Yes

105
 LA according
to
Loading VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY 24020-MEG- SIZE CONNECTION
Arm RECOVERY
T-DW-004-
S2/S3/S5
South Truck LA-1 for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HOBC 1 LA-1 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HSD 2 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HSD 2 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck MS 2 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck SKO 2 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HOBC 3 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck MS 3 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HSD 3 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HSD 3 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck JBO 4 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HOBC 4 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HSD 4 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck MS 4 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HSD 5 LA-5 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck HOBC 5 LA-5 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Meghna Tank Charging Rod
HSD 5 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South Truck LA-5 for ø 2,5”

106
 LA according
to
Loading VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY 24020-MEG- SIZE CONNECTION
Arm RECOVERY
T-DW-004-
S2/S3/S5
Loading

Tank
Meghna Charging Rod
Truck MS 5 LA-5 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
South for ø 2,5”
Loading
Tank
Meghna Bottom Threaded
Truck MS 1 LA-1 ø 3" No
North Hose Connector
Unloading
Tank
Meghna Bottom Threaded
Truck SKO 1 LA-1 ø 3" No
North Hose Connector
Unloading
Tank
Meghna Bottom Threaded
Truck HSD 2 LA-2 ø 3" No
North Hose Connector
Unloading
Tank
Meghna Bottom Threaded
Truck MS 2 LA-2 ø 3" No
North Hose Connector
Unloading
Tank
Meghna Bottom Threaded
Truck HSD 3 LA-3 ø 3" No
North Hose Connector
Unloading
Tank
Meghna Bottom Threaded
Truck MS 3 LA-3 ø 3" No
North Hose Connector
Unloading
Source: TR

Civil works and materials

The structure material for covering the new truck loading station and for operating platforms
will be hot rolled structural steel sections, complying with ASTM A36.

The platform floor will be formed with hot galvanized steel grating.

The structure will be covered with steel sheet profile.

A reinforced concrete foundations system, including anchor bolts in order to fix the structure,
will be provided.

11.2.3 MODIFICATIONS FOR WAGON LOADING

Rail Wagon Loading system will be made by hoses for all products. The location of each
loading point is included in figure 5. In case the loading point for required product exists in

107
this location, this point will be maintained, but in the case it doesn’t exist for that product in
the location, a new one will have to be created.

To improve and automate the system as much as possible, it will be necessary to install a
flowmeter for each product on the different loading bays.

In next figure is shown existing and proposed Rail tank loading facilities in Meghna Terminal:

FIGURE 5- EXISTING AND PROPOSED RAIL WAGON LOADING FACILITY IN MEGHNA

TERMINAL

Source: TR

The Rail Tank Loading facility expansion is colored in blue in previous figure. Civil works of
this expansion (foundations, structures, etc.), are not included in the project scope. The
scope of works includes only the Mechanical (piping, valves, loading arms, hoses,
etc.), Electrical and Instrumentation works.

11.2.4 MODIFICATIONS FOR DRUM LOADING

For barrel loading zone is necessary to build a new barrel loading bays with top loading
arms, the barrel zone will be built after the truck loading bays in the same loading area, a
new platform will be built in each bay to facilitate the barrel loading process at the rear of the
barrel truck, this platform will give more security for the operators when are loading drums.

108
 The materials of loading arms will be the following:

 Pipes: API 5L Gr B or ASTM A 106 Gr B

 Flanges: ASTM A 105

All the material will have a minimum rating of #150. The hoses to be supplied must be listed
by UL (Underwirted Labotatories) in accordance with Item 9.5 of API 2510 Code.

The rotating joints must be provided with a simple lubrication system, to be able to carry out
maintenance without disassembling the loading arm.

A system must be in place to prevent the arm from leaving the safety limits, this system will
prevent by interlock that loading arm go out the safety zone. Additionally, a locking system
shall be also included to lock the arm in the resting position when not in use.

All the equipment’s will be delivered fully finished with protective paint and finish for specific
marine and tropical application.

For the drum loading zone will build the following loading positions:

TABLE 16– BARREL LOADING – MEGHNA SOUTH BARREL LOADING – MEGHNA

SOUTH

LA according
to Loading VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY SIZE CONNECTION
24020-MEG-T- Arm RECOVERY
DW-004-S3
Meghna Barrel Charging Rod of
HSD 6 Top Arm ø 4" No
South Loading LA-6 ø 2.5”
Meghna Barrel Charging Rod of
HSD 6 Top Arm ø 4" No
South Loading LA-6 ø 2.5”
Meghna Barrel Charging Rod of
HOBC 6 Top Arm ø 4" No
South Loading LA-6 ø 2.5”
Meghna Barrel Charging Rod of
MS 6 Top Arm ø 4" No
South Loading LA-6 ø 2.5”
Meghna Barrel Charging Rod of
HSD 7 Top Arm ø 4" No
South Loading LA-7 ø 2.5”
Meghna Barrel Charging Rod of
HSD 7 Top Arm ø 4" No
South Loading LA-7 ø 2.5”
Meghna Barrel Charging Rod of
SKO 7 Top Arm ø 4" No
South Loading LA-7 ø 2.5”
Meghna Barrel Charging Rod of
HSFO 7 Top Arm ø 4" No
South Loading LA-7 ø 2.5”

Source: TR

109
11.2.5 MODIFICATIONS FOR JETTIES LOADING AND UNLOADING OPERATIONS

At present, there are a lot of operations in the Lightering Jetty and in the side of the main
jetties, where a really wide range of different barges and vessels that load and unload
products.

Then, the operations of loading and unloading is advisable to continue being through hoses
and flanges.

The inputs and output of products will be measured by flowmeters integrated in the control
system and of course in the inventory systems, but no new loading and unloading facilities
are planned.

11.2.6 MODIFICATIONS IN PUMPING STATIONS

11.2.6.1 INTELLIGENT MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE (IMCC)

The existing starters MCC will be dismantled, and modern MCCs (intelligent) will be installed
in a new dedicated electrical room located near of every pump House. The proposal for
automation is to define a new iMCC for every Pump House (North and South) including ETP,
UPS, Lighting and MOV Panels. These iMCCs will be able to interact with the new
Distributed Control System (DCS) and the new Emergency Shutdown (ESD) located in new
Control Room.

The new iMCCs shall be fed from the main existing Low Voltage Switchgear. The new
iMCCs will be designed with the following main characteristics:

o A system comprising control modules, central unit(s), a serial bus connecting the control
modules to the central unit and a communication facility enabling connection of the
central unit to a distributed control system (DCS) through a Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC).

o The general bars shall be dimensioned, at least, for the incoming circuit breakers rated
current at the maximum temperature of the environmental conditions.

o Short circuit current: ≤ 36 kA, 1 second duration.

o Motor starter included in the MCC.

o The enclosure of the switchboard shall ensure a degree of protection against solid
foreign bodies and water of no less than IP41 according to the IEC 60529 Degrees of
protection provided by enclosures.

110
o The complete switchboard shall comply with Form 4b as indicated in IEC 60439 -1, with
separation panels between connection terminals for external power cables.

o Withdrawable motor starters.

o The proposed Motor starter systems (starter installed inside de IMCC whenever
possible) shall be as follows:

 Soft Starter (SS) in substitution of Y-Δ starter, providing a controlled ramp-up to

full speed by gradually increasing voltage to the motor terminals during startup.
SS for motors ≥ 37 kW (50 HP).

 DOL (Direct on line) for motors < 37 kW (50 HP).

 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) if required by the process, only for new motors
with duty type service S9 Acc. to IEC 60034-1.

o Starter Control Unit (SCU) modules shall be suitable for mounting in the motor
starter/feeder compartments or in an adjacent (common) compartment.

o The interface between the installed starter/feeder unit and the communication bus within
the Assembly shall be an integral part of the starter/feeder. The starter/feeder
compartment shall remain withdrawable and the connection to the communication bus
shall be a single connection using self-centering plugs and sockets.

o The iMCS software shall allow access for engineering purposes to any SCU, on or off
line. Facilities to change set points, prepare or examine motor trend analysis, etc., shall
be provided. Access to vital motor settings and DCS (Distributed Control System)
configuration shall be password protected.

o The communication interface bus between the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Ethernet
Switches and the SCUs shall withstand electromagnetic disturbances and be fully
protected against short circuits or any other failure without loss of communication.

o For every motor starter 1 Rotary switch with two fixed positions: Local-Remote, 1 pole (in
one position it closes one contact and in the other it closes another) shall be installed in
order to make a control selection (locally or remote from DCS).

o iMCC shall be designed as per IEC 61439-1/2.

o The Electrical Control Architecture proposed shall be as per drawing 24020-GEN-E-DW-

501-00 iMCC Electrical Control Architecture ((included in Section 7).

111
11.2.6.2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU)

In order to control de motors locally, will be designed an RCU for every motor with the
following main characteristics:

o The control stations shall be designed for hazardous area. The type of protection
shall be a combination of "increased safety" and "flameproof" methods. Made of glass
fiber reinforced polyester (GRP).

o Elements that could cause sparks, such as pushbuttons, shall be flameproof.

o RCU and cable glands shall be certified and marked in accordance with the pertinent
standards.

o The marking shall conform to the requirements of applicable law and regulations.

o IP-65 (protection degree)

o Each RCU shall include the following elements:

 1 Green sensitive pushbutton with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts. Start.

 1 Red sensitive pushbutton with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts. Stop.

 1 Local/Remote hand switch

An independent Mushroom Pushbutton for hazardous area will be located at the pump house
in order to interact with the ESD-iMCC and provoque a safety emergency stop to the motors
in case of necessity with the following main characteristics:

 1 Red interlocked mushroom pushbutton, with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts, with

unlocking upon extraction. Emergency Stop.

 IP-65 (Protection degree)

 GRP (Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester) case

11.2.7 MODIFICATIONS IN LEVEL GAUGE AND INVENTORY SYSTEM

From the point of view of Instrumentation & Control, the Level Gauge and Inventory System,
(henceforth called Inventory Tank System) is the only automated system found in the plant.

The main purpose is to have a balance of product in each tank of the terminal, but there is
not a global mass balance, which should be a correlation of the input, output and storage of
the products.

112
In MEGHNA terminal, an ENRAF Inventory Tank System installed is based on radar
technology. The same system will be implemented in tanks that do not have the ENRAF
system for inventorying tanks.

11.2.7.1 ACTIVITIES TO INCLUDE FOR AUTOMATION.

 Expand the Inventory Tank System over 100% of tanks farm and integrate all of them
into the existing loop communication ENRAF controllers (CIU prime and CIU plus).

 Integrate the complete Inventory Tank System into the new main DCS (Distributed
Control System). ENRAF controllers, shall be integrated to the DCS, via Control Bus
Modbus TCP/IP communication standard.

 Implementation of an automatic overfilling prevention system (AOPS). The AOPS will

be designed to terminate flow to the protected tank in the event of loss of power. The
equipment will include an uninterruptible power supply, sensors, an safety logic solver
and final control elements.

11.2.7.2 INSTRUMENT REQUIRED FOR EACH TANK (ENRAF-HONEYWELL)

 One Smart Radar Level Instrument.

 One Temperature Transmitter (connected to Smart Radar Level as temperature

compensator).

 One Pressure Transmitter (connected to Smart Radar Level as pressure

compensator).

 One Tank Side Indicator (local digital indicator connected to Smart Radar Level and
installed at the foot of the tank to see the level in real time).

 AOPS (recommended from a different supplier)

o One radar level (2 in one) with SIL level switch.

o Pressure and temperature sensors (for compensation, when needed)

11.2.7.3 OPERATION MODES

The Inventory Tank System is completely autonomous, so it can record levels, product
calculations and tank availability, among other functions.

113
Automatic mode: Local mode is not considered. Any data recording operation will be
automatic mode from the operations screen in the same Inventory System located in the
Control Room. In the same operating console, the operator will automatically take decisions
to align valves and initiate the tank filling sequence, prior notice of availability tank from
ENRAF system.

See drawing 24020-GEN-I-DW-001-00 Typical Control Diagrams for Instruments (included in

Section 7).

11.2.8 INLETS OF STORAGE TANKS (DOUBLE BLOCK & BLEED VALVES)

The tank storage operations commonly face the risk of contamination and loss of volume If
isolation valves leak. Currently some line blinds are installed in the plant piping system to
avoid leakage, but the use of line blinds for segregation involves a long, costly, and
hazardous process of drain down, lockout, and tagout. The Traditional gate valves in double
block-and-bleed configuration installed, may produce loss of fuel from the open bleed.

In order to avoid leakage and product loss, double block and bleed valves will be used, they
are highly recommended as they offer simple, provable and tank-side isolation, ensuring
valve integrity.

The use of this type valves will bring the following benefits:

- Zero leakage. Valves withstand frequent cycling and have drop tight seal shut off up
and down stream.

- No shear forces. The valve seals are separated from the body and are maintained at
this state during plug rotation. This eliminates abrasion forces from seals and extends
seal life.

- One double-block&bleed block. If any leakage occurs, it would be eliminated via the
bleed.

- In line maintenance: It is possible to inspect and replace the sealing slips with the
valve still in line.

11.2.9 VALVES MOTORIZATIONS

11.2.9.1 MOTOR OPERATED VALVES (MOV)

Motorized valves shall be electrically actuated and will be communicated in a ring topology
with high availability and interconnected to the Main Control System via Master Station

114
Rotork Unit. MOV related to Emergency Shutdown shall be hardwired directly to ESD
System.

The motorized valve shall be also equipped, at least with the followings components:

 Local displays (Field)

 Selector with Local/Remote Control (Field)

 Open/Close/Stop Local Control (Field)

 Open/Close/Stop Remote Control (Configured in DCS control room)

 ESD Relay Contact (hardware in ESD: Emergency Shutdown System)

 Hand Operation: (Direct drive handwheel to provide reliable emergency manual

operation in the event of a power supply failure. Includes padlockable hand/auto
clutch for safe operation even when the motor is running.

A Rotork Master Station unit will control a certain set of MOVs (about sixty MOVs per Master
Station), with a redundant communication path to provide a high availability for the DCS
(Distributed Control System) in case of communication failure and spurious trips. Master
Station should communicate with all MOVs to:

 Controlling actions of opening/closing valves

 Monitoring the state, alarms and analog variables

 Exchanging data through the Communication Bus

 Self-Diagnosis features with automatic fault location indication and communication

performance data signaling

The Master Station shall be connected to:

 Main DCS through the communication Control Bus via Modbus TCP/IP protocol

 ESD (Emergency Shutdown) for emergency stop events related with safety
control sequences. The connection shall be conventional wiring to the ESD cards
terminals.

See drawing 24020-GEN-I-DW-001-00 Typical Control Diagrams for Instruments (included in

Section 7).

115
11.2.9.2 MOTORIZED VALVES PANELS

Will be defined Ex rated local panels for Motor Operated Valves (MOV), suitable for outdoor
installation in hazardous areas with the aim to feed motor valve actuators; thirty (30) circuit
breaker per panel as drawing 24020-GEN-E-DW-502-00 Typical MOV Panel Scheme
(included in Section 7).

MV Panels shall have the main characteristics listed below:

 The distribution switchboards shall be manufactured with a rigid and undeformable

reinforced steel plate structure with a metallic enclosure or, glass fiber reinforced
polyester (GPR).

 The thickness of the structure plate shall be no less than 2mm.

 The external enclosure of the switchboard will ensure a degree of protection against
the entry of solid bodies of no less than IP65.

11.2.10 FLOW METERING SYSTEMS

The automated registration and control of the Mass Balance, provide the possibility to
contrast inputs and outputs of the products in the Terminal, so that it is mandatory to record
them to obtain the mass accurate balance in the plant, when inputs and output are added
with the inventory tanks. The Most important metering points are:

 Metering point in the loading arms for dispatching to the trucks and drums

 Metering points in pipes, as input from jetty or refinery

 Inventory Tanks, as a storage products in the tanks.

In Flow Metering for pipes with custody transfer between vendor and buyer, the balance of
product in the Terminal have to be done with high quality measurement, so that Fiscalization
system for flow measurement systems needs to have, a compensation algorithmic which
could be implemented in a local Flow computer. This kind of fiscal measurement would allow
to have an accurate Balance of the plant, with compensation mechanisms. So Flow
computer is needed, to calculate the flow compensated in Temperature and pressure, in a
monophasic state of the flow, which Is liquid in this case, due to the liquid hydrocarbon.

In this kind of installation Skid, the conditioning of the flow process in mandatory, having:

 Filtration and De-aeration of the flow product, to have monophasic product

116
  Flow Metering, with temperature compensation, and Pressurization and flow
computer, which aims to calculate de Total flow transferred.

 Control Valves, which allows to control pressure of the flow which go through the
flow, and assure not to have bubble in the measurement procedure.

 All devices integrated to a Flow Computer

 Could have a Proving stage connections, which aims to recalibrated and

certificate the Metering System by Third parties Organization.

A compact metering for loading trucks include similar component than the Skid Metering, but
in a compact format of installation:

 Filter and deaerator

 Flow computer

 Temperature and pressure transmitter, if apply compensation flow.

 Outlet Control Valve.

When some downloading bays are needed, the skid of metering for several loading arms
should be installed as a compact skid.

In the next table, we try to identify the specific application of the Flow Metering, into the
different relative locations in the terminal and principal of measurement for instruments
(ultrasonic, Coriolis, etc).

TABLE 17- MESUREMENT MODELS

MEASUREMENT MODELS

PRODUCT LOADING CUSTODY MEASUREMENT

HOSES METERS MODELS WHERE MEASURE
MOVEMENT ARM TRANSFER MODEL

MEASURE
SHIP/BARGE X X SKID/INDIVIDUAL CORIOLIS JETTY/TERMINAL
METER
SHIP/BARGE
RECEPTION X INDIVIDUAL METER CORIOLIS JETTY/TERMINAL
(LIGHTERING)
MEASURE
PIPE (REFINERY) X SKID/INDIVIDUAL CORIOLIS TERMINAL
METER

STORAGE INVENTORY ENRAF TANKS

POSITIVE
TANK TRUCK X X MEASURE SKID TERMINAL LOADING BAY
DISPLACEMENT
LOADING
RAIL CAR X X MEASURE SKID CORIOLIS RAIL CAR GANTRY
SYSTEM
SHIP/BARGE
INDIVIDUAL METER CORIOLIS JETTY
(INTERNAL)

117
 MEASUREMENT MODELS

PRODUCT LOADING CUSTODY MEASUREMENT

HOSES METERS MODELS WHERE MEASURE
MOVEMENT ARM TRANSFER MODEL

SHIP/BARGE
X X INDIVIDUAL METER CORIOLIS JETTY
(BUNKERING)
POSITIVE
DRUM/BARREL X X MEASURE SKID TERMINAL LOADING BAY
DISPLACEMENT
POSITIVE
TANK TRUCK X X MEASURE SKID TERMINAL LOADING BAY
UNLOADING DISPLACEMENT
SYSTEM POSITIVE
RAIL CAR X X MEASURE SKID RAIL CAR GANTRY
DISPLACEMENT

Source: TR

11.2.11 OPERATION SEQUENCIES AND MODES

This chapter clarifies the basic principles and general technical requirements of the control
and supervision of the terminal's hydrocarbon tank farm. The specific details of the
automation and control system will be defined in general drawing, equipment specifications,
control system documents and diagrams to be developed by EPC contractor later in detail
engineering. The following criteria have been considered in the design of the terminal Control
System:

Three (3) zones or areas of the terminal have been distinguished:

 Product reception area (Jetty and Refinery pipeline)

 Product storage area (Tank Farm).

 Dispatch Area (Delivery trucks, Delivery rail wagons and Delivery ships)

The integration of field instrumentation and packaged equipment has been considered in all
areas associated with the Terminal.

The Control System will be configured based on drawing 24020-PAD-I-DW-500 “Control

System Architecture”.

11.2.11.1 LEVEL OF CONTROLS

There will also be three levels of automation: Field level, Control Level and Supervision Level

Field Level:

The field level is constituted by the field instruments, motorized valves, bus gateways, input /
output signal cards. The interface between the Field Level (instrumentation) and Control

118
Level will be made in conventional cabling for analog signals and communication cabling
under protocol Modbus TCP/IP for communicated signals.

Control level:

The control level consists of control system controllers and package units sub-systems. The
control elements in this level are communicated each other with the operation and
supervision system through a redundant Ethernet Control Bus. Also, at this level, the
operating sequences, the safety interlocks and the terminal control logic are executed.

Supervision Level:

The supervision level is represented by the Operating Stations, Engineering, Printers and
remote terminals of the sub-system units.

Level dedicated only to users of the control system, instant and massive data management,
and communication with the Company's document management system.

This level includes:

 Application Servers

 Engineering Stations

 Operating Stations

 Report and alarm printers

The integration of the following systems has been considered for the three (3) areas
considered.

Product reception area (Jetty, Refinery pipeline and SPM):

- Flowmeter System of the jetty Ship unloading and flowmeter of refinery pipeline.

Product Hydrocarbon Storage Area:

- Inventory Tank System, based on volume measurement technology ENRAF type and
accessory equipment.

- Remote Control of Pumps Group for delivery products.

- Remote Control of Pumps Group for transfer of products between tanks.

Dispatch Area:

- Truck Delivery Weighing System

- Remote Control of Pumps Group for delivery products.

119
 - Flowmeter System for Trucks delivery products

- Flowmeters System for Railwagons delivery products

- Identification and Management System for Truck delivery through electronic cards.

11.2.11.2 OPERATION MODES

Automatic Mode: Is produced based on the control sequence steps implemented in the
terminal control logic operation that will be described in the corresponding functional
documents. The Start/Stop permissive must be met regarding to maintain the safety
operation in all the terminal. In control room, the supervision and operation will be made
through screen operation stations, indicators and buttons in automatic mode.

Manual Remote Mode: The operator performs the Start/Stop operation from existing
pushbuttons on the Operator Stations Screens. Previously, the Start/Stop permissive
stablished in the control logic must be met.

Local Mode: The Start/Stop will be carried out by the operator in the field through the Local
Stations at the foot of each electrical equipment. Through the local/remote selector (field) it
will be possible to Start/Stop the equipment locally and from the control room it will be
possible to view the operating mode by means of a confirmation signal. There will be two (2)
different local modes: from local stations in the field and from control room in the operation
screen of Main Control System.

11.2.12 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

The installation's fire-fighting system will be dimensioned considering the highest possible
individual risk.
Thermal radiation received by vulnerable elements located in the vicinity of fires requires
knowledge of numerous variables, such as, the geometry of the fire. The heat generated by
combustion, the fraction that is emitted in the form of radiation, the possible formation of
fumes, radiation absorbed by the atmosphere, the position of the object, etc…
The criteria for affecting surfaces to be cooled according to the tanks or other fire risk in the
project, will be based on determining a distance that guarantees that the fire cannot spread
to neighboring containers. As criteria for affecting the project (in all scenarios) the equipment
or facilities that are affected by a thermal radiation flux of 12.50 kw/ m2 must be taken into
account.

120
In order to size the fire pump and the water reserve, the most risky scenario to consider in
this project is the fire in a tank, and the projection of water on 50% of the surface of the tank
wall adjacent areas that are affected by thermal radiation.

11.2.12.1 RECEPTION (JETTY ZONE)

In the Jetty zone, the current system for protect this zones combine various hydrant-monitors
connected to a foam tank with a line mixer for provide foam, with this system the loading
zone are protected, but this system isn´t the most recommendable, with the current
configuration is very difficult to manage a manual monitor, because the radiation will be very
highly in the zone in case of fire, we propose a better system with a monitor tower with
remote control in a safe zone , as minimum it´s necessary to consider the installation of
water and foam monitors in each docking point. Water screens or curtains (Hidroshields)
must also be installed along the loading point of the jetty zone, to separate possible fire risk
in a ship from loading point. All the facilities of firefighting must be manually and remotely
operated from one point adequately separated from the risk point.

11.2.12.2 STORAGE TANKS

Only some tanks have installed Fire Fighting system, in this cases the fire protection system
of the tanks is directly connected to hydrant network with a tie-in and a gate valve, this is not
an automatic mode for protect the tanks, with this system in case of fire you need to go to the
valve and open in the system, normally this system does not work in case of fire because
any operator can´t support the radiation of the burned tank. Also is necessary to protect the
tank, with a water spray system and a foam system, in accordance with OISD-117 Fire
Protection Facilities for Petroleum Depots, Terminal, Pipeline Installation & Lube Oil
Installation standards.

 Water flow calculated, for cooling a tank on fire at a rate of 3 lpm/m2 of tank shell
area.
 Water flow calculated, for exposure protection for all other tanks falling within a radius
of (R +30) m from centre of the tank on fire (R-Radius of tank on fire) and situated in
the same dyke, at a rate of 3 lpm/m2 of tank shell area.
 Water flow calculated, for exposure protection for all other tanks falling outside a
radius of (R+30) m from centre of the tank on fire and situated in the same dyke, at
a rate of 1 lpm/ m2 of tank shell area.

121
  Spray nozzles shall be directed radially to the tank at a distance not exceeding 0.6 M
from the tank surface.

Foam solution applicable rate for cone roof tanks shall be taken as 5 lpm/m2

In the fixed roof tank, the foam discharge it´s done normally intersuperficially, the tanks must
have the followings foam chambers.

TABLE 18- FOAM CHAMBERS FOR TANKS

Foam Chambers
Tank Diameter (meters)
(No)

Above 18 & up to 20 2

Above 20 & up to 25 3

Above 25& up to 30 4

Above 30 & up to 35 5

Above 35 & up to 40 6

Above 40 & up to 45 8

Above 45& up to 50 10

Source: TR

An additional foam chamber will be installed for tank more than 60 diameters meters for each
465 m2.

For floating-roof tanks the discharge method is in the top of seal.

Fixed foam discharge outlets located above the mechanical shoe seal, above a tube seal
water shield, or above a secondary seal shall be used in conjunction with a foam dam.

The following methods shall be permitted for application of fixed foam discharge outlets:

- Fixed foam discharge outlets mounted above the top of the tank shell

- Fixed foam discharge outlets mounted on the periphery of the floating roof.

122
 TABLE 19- SEAL TYPES FOR TANKS

Maximum Spacing Between Discharge

Outlets With
Seal Type Minimum Minimum
Application Rate Discharge Time
305 mm Foam 610 mm Foam
Dam Dam

Mechanical soe seal 12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m

Tube seal with metal 12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m

weather shield

Fully or partly combustible 12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m

secondary seal

All metal secondary seal 12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m

Source: TR

Where the fixed foam discharge outlets are mounted above the top of the tank shell, a foam
splash-board is necessary due to the effects of winds.

The detection for floating-roof and fixed tanks will be doing with a fiber optic wire. This
system IS composed by a control unit and the wire, the system is highly recommended to
protect zones like a tank farm, early detection allows time for automatic or manual
extinguishing and draining volatile fuels.

This system is very sensible, can detect an increasing of temperature in a specific point, the
system easily adapts to retrofit or new installation in both internal and external floating tank.

For a floating roof tank the wire will be installed in the seal along the perimeter of tank, for a
fixed tank the wire will be installed in monitor gauge points, vent arear or manholes.

123
 FIGURE 6- MONITORING TANKS

Source: TR

A confined pool fire, is a fire produced by the combustion of fuel spill within a boundary or
perimeter where confines the mass of hydrocarbon. Boundaries can be made up of walls that
enclose a certain area. Fire or liquid fuel fire requires a point of ignition, the oxidizer (oxygen
in the air) and the triggering of the reaction. For this type of fire (pool fire). This type of risk
exists in any tank or container or pool that stores hydrocarbons, as well as in areas that
handle hydrocarbons capable of suffering spills and catching fire, for this type of fire is very
highly recommended use flame detectors.

Flame detectors utilize optical technologies to detect flames. Flames are known to emit
electromagnetic radiation in the infrared (IR), visible light, and ultraviolet (UV) wavelengths
depending on the fuel source. Because of this, optical flame-sensing technologies have been
developed utilizing UV, UV/IR and multi-spectrum infrared. These products rely on line-of-site
detection of the radiation emitted in the spectral bands to determine if a flame is real.

124
Consider whether the potential flame you are looking to detect will be hydrocarbon based or
non-organic. With Hydrocarbon flames, a combination of methane and oxygen produce
carbon dioxide and water. This type of fire creates a UV signal reading at 0.2 microns and IR
signal reading at 2.7 microns and 4.5 microns. Hydrogen flames only produce water
molecules and therefore we do not see the same CO2 peak that a hydrocarbon flame is
known to produce.

Optical flame detectors come with a “field of view” range, similar to the lens on a camera.
Taking the field of view range into account will help determine how many detectors are
needed to cover an installation or a specific area within the installation.

FIGURE 7- FLAME DETECTOR SPACING

Source: TR

In addition, a sufficient number of portable or on-car extinguishers, located in accordance

with the requirements of OISD 117 Standard, in a visible position, easily accessible and
strategically around retention pails and preferably near stations of pumping, access to the
buckets and face / discharge facilities. The storage park area will be covered by monitors (or
monitors mounted on hydrants) whose function will be to cool tanks and spheres. The kind of
monitor will be according to stored products.

11.2.12.3 PUMP HOUSE

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the pump house.

The fixed extinguishing system based on water-foam for the protection of hydrocarbon
dispatch pumps must have the necessary elements to apply a design regime of not less than
20.4 lpm/m2, all according to OISD 117 Standard They will be protected with at least two

125
nozzles provided that the correct coverage of the equipment is ensured, preferably oriented
to cover suction and discharge flanges.
The detection system can be done electrically, using heat detectors (Fenwall detectors) or it
can be done with a pneumatic detection system using sprinklers.

Fenwall detectors are highly reliable and have good resistance to operation from non-hostile
sources. They are also very easy and inexpensive to maintain. On the down side, they do not
function until room temperatures have reached a substantial temperature, at which point the
fire is well underway and damage is growing exponentially. Subsequently, thermal detectors
are usually not permitted in life safety applications. They are also not recommended in
locations where there is a desire to identify a fire before substantial flames occur, such as
spaces where high value thermal sensitive contents are housed.

The locations in the building will be done using the figure below that shows the typical
coverage for fire detectors:

A spot type heat detector will cover all points located within 0.7 times the listed spacing. The
listed spacing for heat detectors is S= 50 ft (15.3 m)

11.2.12.4 LOADING SYSTEM

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the loading areas

The fixed extinguishing system based on water-foam for the protection of hydrocarbon
loading areas (loading trucks and wagon loading) must have the necessary elements to
apply a design regime of not less than 6.5 lpm / m2 (0.16 gpm / p2) for a period of 10 minutes,
all according to OISD 117 Standard

Also the system must be completed with additional discharge of the foam monitors installed
neared of the loading zones.

The detection system will be done with fenwall thermal detectors combined with flame
detectors.

11.2.12.5 HYDRANTS

Hydrants will be installed following the design codes of OISD 117 Standard. They must be
secured to the pipe and anchored, in accordance with the requirements of OISD 117
Standard

126
The hydrants must have a connection diameter with the main pipe not less than 6”. Each
hydrant must be equipped with an individual shutoff valve located on the bypass that
connects to the main network. Between every two hydrants an exterior hose cabinet with
hoses for hydrants will be installed.

11.2.12.6 MONITORS

Fixed water or water / foam monitors will be installed at strategic points, in areas with a
thermal impact of less than 5.1 Kw / m2, and around or within areas where a fire risk has
been identified. The fixed monitors will be autonomous or installed in hydrants.

In particular, monitors will be installed in hydrants located around process areas and storage
and transfer facilities for toxic, flammable or LPG products.

The monitors will be foam-water monitors around the hydrocarbon storage areas such as
diesel and gasoline.

11.2.12.7 FIRE PUMP

With the pressure and flow data of the existing pumps in the installation, the capacity of the
pump is insufficient. Therefore it is necessary to install new pumps, the pumps have to meet
the water demand of the scenario with the highest risk, in this case the highest risk is a fire in
tank PT-5, and the affected tanks by the fire radiation, tanks PT-6, T-462, T-468, T-469, T-
470.
The pumps shall be capable of discharging 150% of its rated discharge at a minimum of 65%
of the rated head. The Shut-off head shall not exceed 120% of rated head.
The pumping group it will be composed by 3 diesel pumps supplied at 50%.
The water reserve tank doesn´t need to be calculated, the water supply comes from an
inexhaustible natural source.

The design of the fire pump installation must be in accordance with NFPA 20 codes and
OISD 117 Standards

11.2.13 EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT

The MPL facility has an oily water collection system, using underground networks that
discharge into an open pool, where the water and hydrocarbon are separated by gravity.

127
Improvement of the contaminated water treatment system is included in the scope of the
project.

Facilities and equipment will be designed so that water discharged to the outside of the
Storage Facility will have a hydrocarbon content that is below the limits allowed by the
regulations. In order to reach these limits, an analyzer and flow measurement system will be
available that will record in real time the hydrocarbon content and the discharge flow, not
allowing the exit if this content exceeds the pre-set limits, and therefore returning it to the
start of treatment. This system facilitates the control of the discharge in real time, as well as
allowing the elaboration of weekly, monthly and annual statistics with the stored records.

There is a plant for each terminal; each of them is according to document 24020-GEN-M-SP-
004-00 Effluent Treatment Plant Specification (included in Section 6. Employer’s
Requirements, item 6.6.2 FEED which is part of sub-section 6.6 Supplementary Information)

11.2.14 GENERAL ELECTRICAL MODIFICATIONS

11.2.14.1 ELECTRICAL LOW VOLTAGE CABLES

To feed the motor pumps from the iMCC, new low voltage cable will be installed using
armored cables and cable glands for hazardous areas. Low voltage electrical cables shall
have the following features:

o Cables shall be designed according to IEC 60502.

o All cables shall be flame-retardant and fire-resistant in accordance with IEC 60332-1
and IEC 60332-3-24 (Category C), respectively. Halogen emissions (CLH) shall be less
than 15 %, measured by the test stipulated in IEC 60754.

o All cables shall be suitable for installation in hazardous areas where there is a risk of
fire or explosion.

o The rated voltage of the cables shall be 0.6/1 kV, and be applied to all the power,
lighting and control circuits covered by the typical operating voltages (115, 230, 400
and 500 V).

o All conductors shall be copper, in accordance with IEC 60228.

o Conductors shall be class 5, in accordance with IEC 60228.

o Cable insulation shall consist of an extruded layer of cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE),

high module ethylene-propylene rubber (HEPR) or any equivalent material, suitable for

128
 an operating temperature of 90ºC and a short-circuit temperature of 250ºC. The
minimum thicknesses and insulation properties shall be those defined in the IEC
60502-1 standard.

o The cables to be installed in hazardous areas shall be armored type.

o Cables must be resistant to Hydrocarbons and oils.

o The armor shall be made from galvanized steel wire, unless another alternative is
defined. The characteristics, dimensions and test requirements shall comply with the
IEC 60502-1 standard.

11.2.14.2 CABLE GLANDS FOR ARMOURED CABLES

Cable gland shall have the features listed below:

o Be made of brass or stainless steel, protection degree IP 66, Exd/Exe for connection
with IICT6 equipment metric thread.

o Cable entries with cylindrical thread must have a waterproof bed joint in order to
guarantee the degree of protection of the enclosure on which they are installed.

11.2.14.3 JUNCTION BOXES

Junction boxes shall be installed wherever necessary and shall meet the following
requirements:

o They shall include cable glands, stoppers and terminals installed.

o Construction material shall be one of the following:

 Aluminum alloy with reinforced walls to allow holes for at least 5 thread screw.

 Polyamide/polyester reinforced with fiberglass.

o All boxes shall have a protection degree of IP 65 or higher.

o The protection level against impacts for the aluminum alloy or thermoplastic boxes
shall be IK08 or higher.

11.2.14.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION CABLE ROUTING

From the new iMCC to the motor pumps, new cable will run aerial or buried, where
applicable

129
- Aerial cable routing

Aerial cable routing shall be made on cable trays, preferably in the vertical position,
conveniently secured to the structure.

Cable tray shall have the following characteristics:

o Types:

 Perforated metal cable tray (for secondary cable distribution).

 Metal ladder tray (for main cable distribution).

o Material: Stainless steel hot-dip galvanized.

o Cable trays shall be designed according to IEC 61537.

o In areas of very high corrosion, cable trays can be made of PVC or similar.

The cable tray and the cables shall be laid, so that the structure offers a physical
protection for the cables. Cables shall be conveniently tied to avoid ondulation, with a
maximum separation between ties of 1200 mm (47 inch) for horizontal routing and 500
mm (20 inch) for vertical routing or horizontal routing with vertical position. Definitive ties
shall be corrosion resistant.

Cable trays and/or cables shall not be attached to process piping.

Cables shall be preferably mounted on a single layer, taking no more than 60 to 70% of
the cable tray’s capacity. When the entire installation is aerial, cables can be laid on two
layers, using the appropriate derating coefficients.

- Underground cable routing

Cables running under roads shall run in PVC conduits of at least 150 mm
(6 inch) internal diameter, with thick walls, high pressure, embedded in concrete.

Inspection pits shall be installed every 20 m (66 ft) in straight stretches and at all
changes of direction.

Inspection pits shall be placed at both sides of road crossings and when there is a
change from underground to aerial.

Routing of underground conduits shall be designed to avoid floods; therefore adequate

drains shall be provided at lower points.

Used and reserve conduits shall be sealed at both ends to avoid obstructions.

Cables can be buried directly in the ground whenever possible.

130
 The layout of cables shall be evaluated for each situation, so that there will be no
interference due to capacitive and/or inductive effects.

11.2.14.5 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

A Lightning Protection system according to NFC 17-102 will be designed in the FEED for
protection of all types of structures and open areas. The protection device proposed is a
“Lightning Rod with Early Streamer Emission (ESE) System”.

The main characteristics to considerer for ESE are the following:

- High level of protection

- Shall preserves its initial properties after each discharge.

- The device doesn't offer any resistance to discharge conduction.

- Lightning rod without electrical components. Maxim durability guaranteed.

- It doesn't need external power supply.

- Operation guaranteed in any atmospheric condition.

- High resistance to temperature. Maximum temperature: 125ºC.

- High resistance to weather conditions and corrosive atmospheres.

- Maintenance free.

The specific function of lightning rod with ESE is producing an upward stream of ionized
particles that will channel the eventual electrical discharge from its origin.

Installation:

- The tip of the lightning rod should be located, at least two meters above the highest
building or element to be protected.

- A head-mast adapter piece is required in order to attach the lightning rod to the mast
selected for its installation.

- The lightning rod should be connected to a grounding point by way of one or various
conducting cables which will go down, whenever possible, the exterior of the
construction with the shortest and straightest possible trajectory.

131
 - The earth termination systems, whose resistance should be the lowest possible (less
than 10 ohms), should guarantee the most rapid possible dissipation of the lightning
current discharge.

Protection level shall be calculated according to NFC 17-102 (Lightning Risk Assessment).

11.2.14.6 LIGHTING SYSTEM

Outdoor Lighting system:

The main objective of industrial outdoor lighting system consists on supplying the quantity
and quality of illumination system that provides the maximum requirements of security and
comfort to operating personnel.

For external areas, will be designed a High Mast Flood Lighting System. Led lighting fixtures
is proposed with the aim to reduce cost and save energy due to their highly energy efficient.

Required lighting level for each area will be accomplished by installing the appropriate
number of lighting fixtures on each single lighting tower.

The illuminance suggested by standards is 20 lux for general outdoor areas. Considering
towers of 20m height with 3 or 4 300W floodlights LED.

Plant lighting circuits shall be fed from dedicated lighting distribution switchboards.

Outdoor lighting circuits shall be designed for automatic switching via photo-electric
relays. Control circuits for photo-electric relays shall be 'fail-safe', i.e., to switch the
lights on if a fault occurs in the photo-electric relay.

Indoor Lighting system:

An indoor lighting system will be designed for the new indoor installations with the following
illumination level where applicable:

- Control room 300-400 Lux

- Electrical room 300-400 Lux

- Pump house 100-150 Lux

- Truck Loading area 100-150 Lux

The lighting installation shall be designed so that ceiling lighting

groups can be switched off independently to suit operators' needs.

132
11.2.14.7 EARTHING NETWORK

When working on small expansions in existing installations, the original philosophy shall be
maintained whenever possible unless the new design improves or delivers clear technology
advances.

The following elements shall be connected to the existing earthing network:

- Electrical Rooms

- Electrical panels

- Piping

- Structures and other metal containers without electrical parts

- Instrumentation systems and circuits

- Lightning and surge arrester

- Tanks

Truck and Wagon Loading earthing

The earth connection is necessary to eliminate static currents during loading and/or
unloading operations.

Vehicles shall be earthed using an automatic lock mechanism that shall prevent loading /
unloading the lorry or tank wagon unless static electricity has first been discharged. An alarm
shall signal if earthing is not correct.

Weighing platforms will be connected to the main earth network. The system shall be
permanently connected to earth during the load / unload operations.

11.2.15 PRODUCT CHANGES IN STORAGE TANKS AT MEGHNA TERMINAL

Contractor will be responsible to develop all documents, drawings (P&IDs, layouts, plot
plans, detail drawings, etc), Data Sheets, Specifications, Hazop, studies, etc., corresponding
to EPC scope with the products indicated in FEED, but including the change of products that
will be stored in tanks indicated below, according the last information provided by OWNER:

1) The product of Tank T-453 was previously MS. But now it is being converted to an HOBC
tank. So, in the future the Product of Tank T-453 will be HOBC.

2) The product of Tank T-464 was previously HOBC. But now it is being converted to an MS
tank. So, in the future the Product of Tank T-464 will be MS.

133
11.3 JOCL

11.3.1 CONTROL SYSTEM

11.3.1.1 CONTROL SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The Control System will be designed, based in an open architecture that integrates complex
sub-systems and package units to obtain optimized control of the terminal. The architecture
diagram indicated below will be taken as a basic design for the development and detailed
engineering for the Control System. See drawing 24020-JAM-I-DW-500-00 Control System
Architecture JOCL (included in Section 7).

11.3.1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

For the design of the Control System, the following design criteria will be following at least:
 The design will allow the plant to operate continuously, 365 days a year, 24 hours a
day.
 The design should ensure the greatest ease of operation, supervision, maintenance
and integration of systems.
 There will be independent control and supervision functionality for each of the plant's
production and storage systems.
 Future extensions and integrations of existing equipment and systems in the plant or
new construction will be allowed.
 Service guarantees will be offered regarding Hardware, Software and Spare parts
availability.
 Programming standards will be followed, aimed at good maintenance, improvement,
updating and extensions of the system.
 There will be control of failure actions, alarms and transitions, within safe operating
situations.
 Control System will incorporate current technologies of modern systems, like DCS
(Distributed Control System), PLC (Programmable Logic Controller), SCADA, etc.
being any local option valued by JAMUNA terminal.
 The System must integrate functions of measurement, regulation control, automation,
protection, communication and interfaces with the other sub-systems, data storage
and generation of reports, trend graphs, alarms and events.

11.3.1.3 INTEGRATION SYSTEM

According to above drawing, the control system will interface with other sub-system as
detailed in the following:

134
  Inventory Tank System (ITS)
 Flow Metering System
 Motor Operated Valves System (MOV)
 Motor Control Center System (MCC)
 Access Control System (ACS)
 Weighbridge Truck System (WTS)
 Tank Management System (TMS)
 Enterprise Resources Planning (ERP)

Communication with Sub-systems shall be carried out through control system cards or
through the control modules. All communication shall be based on:

 Bi-directional communication (both reading and writing).

 Control System shall act as master on the communicating link.
 Using Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP and/or OPC.

 In series using the RS-232C, RS-422 or RS-485 standards when apply.

 A suitable communications protocol for multi-drop connections and widely accepted in

the industrial environment (Preferably Modbus).

11.3.1.4 ERP SYSTEM

As it is shown in Control System Architecture (Figure 8), the highest level will be an ERP
System Server.

ERP system shall integrate with TMS (Terminal Management System), gathering the
required Process & Metering information along with Access Control System information to
provide:

 Procurement Management

 Supply Chain Management (i.e. Tank Storage, Loading Areas)

 Asset Management (Operation & Maintenance)

 Human Capital Management

In addition, ERP can include:

 Project management and accounting

 Reporting & Analytics

135
  Financial Management

Optionally, ERP System can be hosted in the Cloud. It shall comply with Cybersecurity
International Standards (i.e. Network Isolation / Secure Architecture, Subsystems
Maintenance & Security Policies) and COMPANY’s Cybersecurity Plan.

ERP System interface with TMS shall use RFC (Remote Function Call) interface protocol, so
as to simplify programming of communication processes between systems and manage
error handling.

11.3.1.5 CONTROL ROOM BUILDING PROPOSAL

See drawing reference 24020-JAM-I-DW-501-00 Control and cabinets room layouts. Jamuna
Terminal (included in Section 7).

11.3.1.6 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

With the aim to support the new DCS (Distributed Control System) and ESD (Emergency
Shutdown) systems, will be designed and UPS to supply safety voltage and guarantee their
correct functioning in case of a black out.

The UPS will have the following main characteristics:

o It shall be designed as per in IEC 62040-3.

o Each unit shall have a 400 V, 50 Hz, three-phase power supply with neutral connected
directly to earth. The protective conductor shall be separated from the neutral.

o The system shall admit variations in voltage and frequency, both singular and
combined, in ranges between ±10% and ±5% respectively, without affecting its
operation and without causing overheating.

o UPS output voltage: 400/220V, 3Ph+N.

o The equipment must be designed to supply a minimum load with a power factor
between 0.4 inductive and 0.9 capacitive.

o The equipment shall be designed to work continuously with the specified load, and
shall also be capable of supplying 150% of the rated load for 60 seconds through the
inverter, with output characteristics within the specified tolerances.

o The batteries shall be of the Li-Ion type, with a minimum autonomy of 30 minutes.

136
 o UPS system shall have the configuration as per the following drawing 24020-JAM-E-
DW-002-00 UPS Single Line Diagram JOCL (included in Section 7).

11.3.2 MODIFICATIONS FOR TRUCK LOADING

The liquid hydrocarbon dispatch procedure works as follows:

 The truck is weighed on the plant entrance before reaching the loading area, to check
the tare of the vehicle. The weight is reflected in the computer of the corresponding
operator.

 Before the truck is located on the filling island, the corresponding pre-operational
checks are carried out, both administrative and security.

 Once the pre-operational checks have been carried out, the truck is placed on the bay
designated to load, where it´s locked, grounded and connected to the overfill
detection system.

 The loading process begins, it will be from bottom or top of the truck, until the
flowmeter reaches the authorized quantity, or the overfilling probe detects that is full.

 When the loading process is finished, is necessary to disconnect the followings:

 Vapor recovery hoses

 Hose or loading arm

 Overfilling system

 Grounding connection of the truck.

A new truck loading zone will be built, the total dimensions will be 51 meters (large) x 12
meters (wide), and it will be consisting to the following areas:

 Loading Area, this zone will have 6 bays and top loading arms.

 Drum loading Area, this zone will have 2 bays and top loading arms.

The construction of the new truck loading station will be built in different phases, until it´s
finished the old truck loading will be kept, so that the plant continuous to be operational, is
necessary to build a new platform and bays with loading arms, this platform and loading
arms will give more security for the operator works.

137
The work area of the loading arms is defined on the drawing 24020-JAM-T-DW-004-00-S1 to
S2 Jamuna Truck Loading Zones Details (included in Section 7).

The truck loading zone includes 6 double dispatch bays for the loading of 2 trucks. Each
island will have 4 loading arms, the dimensions of the loading arms shall will be designed
following criteria:

 The loading arm will be operated in all the assigned loading zone.
 In the loading moment, the truck will be situated on the loading area as marked on the
ground.
The materials of the loading arm will be the following:
 Pipes: ASTM A 106 Gr B or API 5L Gr B
 Flanges: ASTM A 105
All the material will have a minimum rating of #150. The hoses to be supplied must be listed
by UL (Underwirted Labotatories) in accordance with Item 9.5 of API 2510 Code.

The rotating joints must be provided with a simple lubrication system, to be able to carry out
maintenance without disassembling the loading arm.

A system must be in place to prevent the arm from leaving the safety limits, this system will
prevent by interlock that loading arm go out the safety zone. Additionally, a locking system
shall be also included to lock the arm in the resting position when not in use.

All the equipment’s will be delivered fully finished with protective paint and finish for specific
marine and tropical application.

TABLE 20- TANK TRUCK LOADING - JAMUNA

LA according
to
VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY 24020-JAM- Loading Arm SIZE CONNECTION
RECOVER
T-DW-004-
S1/S2
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna HSD 1 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading LA-1 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna HSD 1 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading LA-1 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna JBO 1 LA-1 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna HSD 2 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna HOBC 2 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna MS 2 LA-2 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”

138
 LA according
to
VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY 24020-JAM- Loading Arm SIZE CONNECTION
RECOVER
T-DW-004-
S1/S2
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna HSD 3 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna HOBC 3 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna MS 3 LA-3 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna SKO 4 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna FO 4 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”
Tank Truck Charging Rod for ø
Jamuna HSD 4 LA-4 Top Arm ø 4" Yes
Loading 2,5”

Source: TR

Civil works and materials

The structure material for covering the new truck loading station and for operating platforms
will be hot rolled structural steel sections, complying with ASTM A36.

The platform floor will be formed with hot galvanized steel grating.

The structure will be covered with steel sheet profile.

A reinforced concrete foundations system, including anchor bolts in order to fix the structure,
will be provided.

11.3.3 MODIFICATIONS FOR WAGON LOADING

Rail Wagon Loading system will be made by hoses for all products. The location of each
loading point is included in figure 8. In case the loading point for required product exists in
this location, this point will be maintained, but in the case it doesn’t exist for that product in
the location, a new one will have to be created.

To improve and automate the system as much as possible, it will be necessary to install a
flowmeter for each product on the different loading bays.

139
FIGURE 8- EXISTING AND PROPOSED RAIL WAGON LOADING FACILITY IN JAMUNA
TERMINAL

Source: TR

The Rail Tank Loading facility expansion is colored in blue in previous figure. Civil works of
this expansion (foundations, structures, etc.), are not included in the project scope. The
scope of works includes only the Mechanical (piping, valves, loading arms, hoses,
etc.), Electrical and Instrumentation works.

11.3.4 MODIFICATIONS FOR BARREL LOADING

For barrel loading zone is necessary to build a new barrel loading bays with top loading
arms, the barrel zone will be built after the truck loading bays in the same loading area, a
new platform will be built in each bay to facilitate the barrel loading process at the rear of the
barrel truck, this platform will give more security for the operators when are loading drums.

The materials of loading arms will be the following:

 Pipes: Pipes: API 5L Gr B or ASTM A 106 Gr B

 Flanges: ASTM A 105

140
All the material will have a minimum rating of #150. The hoses to be supplied must be listed
by UL (Underwirted Labotatories) in accordance with Item 9.5 of API 2510 Code.

The rotating joints must be provided with a simple lubrication system, to be able to carry out
maintenance without disassembling the loading arm.

A system must be in place to prevent the arm from leaving the safety limits, this system will
prevent by interlock that loading arm go out the safety zone. Additionally, a locking system
shall be also included to lock the arm in the resting position when not in use.

All the equipment’s will be delivered fully finished with protective paint and finish for specific
marine and tropical application.

For the drum loading zone will build the following loading positions:

TABLE 21- BARREL LOADING – JAMUNA

LA according
to VAPOR
FACILITY ZONE PRODUCT BAY Loading Arm SIZE CONNECTION
24020-JAM-T- RECOVERY

DW-004-S2
Barrel Charging Rod
Jamuna HSD 5 LA-5 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading of ø 2.5”
Barrel Charging Rod
Jamuna MS 5 LA-5 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading of ø 2.5”
Barrel Charging Rod
Jamuna SKO 5 LA-5 Top Arm ø 4" No
Loading of ø 2.5”

Source: TR

11.3.5 MODIFICATIONS FOR JETTIES LOADING AND UNLOADING OPERATIONS

At present, there are a lot of operations in the Lightering Jetty and in the side of the main
jetties, where a really wide range of different barges and vessels that load and unload
products.

Then, the operations of loading and unloading is advisable to continue being through hoses
and flanges.

The inputs and output of products will be measured by flowmeters integrated in the control
system and of course in the inventory systems, but no new loading and unloading facilities
are planned.

141
11.3.6 MODIFICATIONS IN PUMPING STATIONS

11.3.6.1 INTELLIGENT MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE (IMCC)

The existing starters MCC will be dismantled, and modern MCCs (intelligent) will be installed
in a new dedicated electrical room located near of the pump House, including ETP, UPS,
Lighting and MOV Panels. The proposal for automation is to define a new iMCC for the
Pump House. This iMCC will be able to interact with the new Distributed Control System
(DCS) and the new Emergency Shutdown (ESD).

The new iMCC shall be fed from the main existing Low Voltage Switchgear. For this plant, 1
iMCCs will be designed with the following main characteristics:

o A system comprising control modules, central unit(s), a serial bus connecting the
control modules to the central unit and a communication facility enabling connection of
the central unit to a distributed control system (DCS) through a Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC).

o The general bars shall be dimensioned, at least, for the incoming circuit breakers rated
current at the maximum temperature of the environmental conditions.

o Short circuit current: ≤ 36 kA, 1 second duration.

o Motor starter included in the MCC.

o The enclosure of the switchboard shall ensure a degree of protection against solid
foreign bodies and water of no less than IP41 according to the IEC 60529 Degrees of
protection provided by enclosures.

o The complete switchboard shall comply with Form 4b as indicated in IEC 60439 -1,
with separation panels between connection terminals for external power cables.

o Withdrawable motor starters.

o The proposed Motor starter systems (starter installed inside de IMCC whenever
possible) shall be as follows:

 Soft Starter (SS) in substitution of Y-Δ starter, providing a controlled ramp-up to full
speed by gradually increasing voltage to the motor terminals during startup. SS for
motors ≥ 37 kW (50 HP).

 DOL (Direct on line) for motors < 37 kW (50 HP).

142
  Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) if required by the process, only for new motors
with duty type service S9 Acc. to IEC 60034-1.

o Starter Control Unit (SCU) modules shall be suitable for mounting in the motor
starter/feeder compartments or in an adjacent (common) compartment.

o The interface between the installed starter/feeder unit and the communication bus
within the Assembly shall be an integral part of the starter/feeder. The starter/feeder
compartment shall remain withdrawable and the connection to the communication bus
shall be a single connection using self-centering plugs and sockets.

o The iMCS software shall allow access for engineering purposes to any SCU, on or off
line. Facilities to change set points, prepare or examine motor trend analysis, etc., shall
be provided. Access to vital motor settings and DCS (Distributed Control System)
configuration shall be password protected.

o The communication interface bus between the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Ethernet
Switches and the SCUs shall withstand electromagnetic disturbances and be fully
protected against short circuits or any other failure without loss of communication.

o For every motor starter 1 Rotary switch with two fixed positions: Local-Remote, 1 pole
(in one position it closes one contact and in the other it closes another) shall be
installed in order to make a control selection (locally or remote from DCS).

o iMCC shall be designed as per IEC 61439-1/2.

o The Electrical Control Architecture proposed shall be as per drawing 24020-GEN-E-

DW-501-00 iMCC Electrical Control Architecture (included in Section 7).

11.3.6.2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU)

In order to control de motors locally, will be designed an RCU for every motor with the
following main characteristics:

o The control stations shall be designed for hazardous area. The type of protection
shall be a combination of "increased safety" and "flameproof" methods. Made of glass
fiber reinforced polyester (GRP).

o Elements that could cause sparks, such as pushbuttons, shall be flameproof.

o RCU and cable glands shall be certified and marked in accordance with the pertinent
standards.

143
 o The marking shall conform to the requirements of applicable law and regulations.

o IP-65 (protection degree)

o Each RCU shall include the following elements:

 1 Green sensitive pushbutton with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts. Start.

 1 Red sensitive pushbutton with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts. Stop.

 1 Local/Remote hand switch

An independent Mushroom Pushbutton for hazardous area will be located at the pump house
in order to interact with the ESD-iMCC and provoque a safety emergency stop to the motors
in case of necessity with the following main characteristics:

 1 Red interlocked mushroom pushbutton, with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts, with

unlocking upon extraction. Emergency Stop.

 IP-65 (Protection degree).

 GRP (Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester) case.

11.3.7 LEVEL GAUGE AND INVENTORY SYSTEM

From the point of view of Instrumentation & Control, the Level Gauge and Inventory System,
(henceforth called Inventory Tank System) is the only automated system found in the plant.

The main purpose is to have a balance of product in each tank of the terminal, but there is
not a global mass balance, which should be a correlation of the input, output and storage of
the products.

In JAMUNA terminal, an ENRAF Inventory Tank System installed is based on radar

technology. The same system will be implemented in tanks that do not have the ENRAF
system for inventorying tanks.

11.3.7.1 ACTIVITIES TO INCLUDE FOR AUTOMATION

 Expand the Inventory Tank System over 100% of tanks farm and integrate all of them
into the existing loop communication ENRAF controllers (CIU prime and CIU plus).

 Integrate the complete Inventory Tank System into the new main DCS (Distributed
Control System). ENRAF controllers, shall be integrated to the DCS, via Control Bus
Modbus TCP/IP communication standard.

144
  Implementation of an automatic overfilling prevention system (AOPS). The AOPS will
be designed to terminate flow to the protected tank in the event of loss of power. The
equipment will include an uninterruptible power supply, sensors, a safety logic solver
and final control elements.

11.3.7.2 INSTRUMENT REQUIRED FOR EACH TANK (ENRAF-HONEYWELL)

 One Smart Radar Level Instrument.

 One Temperature Transmitter (connected to Smart Radar Level as temperature

compensator).

 One Pressure Transmitter (connected to Smart Radar Level as pressure compensator).

 One Tank Side Indicator (local digital indicator connected to Smart Radar Level and
installed at the foot of the tank to see the level in real time).

 AOPS (recommended from a different supplier):

o One radar level (2 in one) with SIL level switch.

o Pressure and temperature sensors (for compensation, when needed)

11.3.7.3 OPERATION MODES

The Inventory Tank System is completely autonomous, so it can record levels, product
calculations and tank availability, among other functions.

Automatic mode: Local mode is not considered. Any data recording operation will be
automatic mode from the operations screen in the same Inventory System located in the
Control Room. In the same operating console, the operator will automatically take decisions
to align valves and initiate the tank filling sequence, prior notice of availability tank from
ENRAF system.

See drawing 24020-GEN-I-DW-001-00 Typical General Control Diagrams for Instruments

(included in Section 7).

11.3.8 INLETS OF STORAGE TANKS (DOUBLE BLOCK & BLEED VALVES)

The tank storage operations commonly face the risk of contamination and loss of volume If
isolation valves leak. Currently some line blinds are installed in the plant piping system to
avoid leakage, but the use of line blinds for segregation involves a long, costly, and

145
hazardous process of drain down, lockout, and tagout. The Traditional gate valves in double
block-and-bleed configuration installed, may produce loss of fuel from the open bleed.

In order to avoid leakage and product loss, double block and bleed valves will be used, they
are highly recommended as they offer simple, provable and tank-side isolation, ensuring
valve integrity.

The use of this type valves will bring the following benefits:

- Zero leakage. Valves withstand frequent cycling, and have drop tight seal shut off up
and down stream.

- No shear forces. The valve seals are separated from the body, and are maintained at
this state during plug rotation. This eliminates abrasion forces from seals and extends
seal life.

- One double-block&bleed block. If any leakage occur, it would be eliminated via the
bleed.

- In line maintenance: It is possible to inspect and replace the sealing slips with the
valve still in line.

11.3.9 VALVES MOTORIZATIONS

11.3.9.1 MOTOR OPERATED VALVES (MOV)

Motorized valves shall be electrically actuated and will be communicated in a ring topology
with high availability, and interconnected to the Main Control System via Master Station
Rotork Unit. MOV related to Emergency Shutdown shall be hardwired directly to ESD
System.

The motorized valve shall be also equipped, at least with the followings components:

 Local displays (Field)

 Selector with Local/Remote Control (Field)

 Open/Close/Stop Local Control (Field)

 Open/Close/Stop Remote Control (Configured in DCS control room)

 ESD Relay Contact (Hardware in ESD: Emergency Shutdown System)

146
  Hand Operation: (Direct drive handwheel to provide reliable emergency manual
operation in the event of a power supply failure. Includes padlockable hand/auto clutch
for safe operation even when the motor is running.

A Rotork Master Station unit will control a certain set of MOVs (about sixty MOVs per Master
Station), with a redundant communication path to provide a high availability for the DCS
(Distributed Control System) in case of communication failure and spurious trips. Master
Station should communicate with all MOVs to:

 Controlling actions of opening/closing valves

 Monitoring the state, alarms and analog variables

 Exchanging data through the Communication Bus

 Self-Diagnosis features with automatic fault location indication and communication

performance data signaling

The Master Station shall be connected to:

 Main DCS through the communication Control Bus via Modbus TCP/IP protocol

 ESD (Emergency Shutdown) for emergency stop events related with safety control
sequences. The connection shall be conventional wiring to the ESD cards terminals.

See drawing 24020-GEN-I-DW-001-00 Typical General Control Diagrams for Instruments

(included in Section 7).

11.3.9.2 MOTORIZED VALVES PANELS

Will be defined Ex rated local panels for Motor Operated Valves (MOV), suitable for outdoor
installation in hazardous areas with the aim to feed motor valve actuators; thirty (30) circuit
breaker per panel as per drawing 24020-GEN-E-DW-502-00 Typical MOV Panel Scheme
(included in section 7).

MV Panels shall have the main characteristics listed below:

o The distribution switchboards shall be manufactured with a rigid and undeformable

reinforced steel plate structure with a metallic enclosure or, glass fiber reinforced
polyester (GPR).

o The thickness of the structure plate shall be no less than 2mm.

o The external enclosure of the switchboard will ensure a degree of protection against
the entry of solid bodies of no less than IP65.

147
11.3.9.3 FLOW METERING SYSTEMS

The automated registration and control of the Mass Balance, provide the possibility to
contrast inputs and outputs of the products in the Terminal, so that it is mandatory to record
them to obtain the mass accurate balance in the plant, when inputs and output are added
with the inventory tanks. The Most important metering points are:

 Metering point in the loading arms for dispatching to the trucks and drums

 Metering points in pipes, as input from jetty or refinery

 Inventory Tanks, as a storage products in the tanks.

In Flow Metering for pipes with custody transfer between vendor and buyer, the balance of
product in the Terminal have to be done with high quality measurement, so that Fiscalization
system for flow measurement systems needs to have, a compensation algorithmic which
could be implemented in a local Flow computer. This kind of fiscal measurement would allow
to have an accurate Balance of the plant, with compensation mechanisms. So Flow
computer is needed, to calculate the flow compensated in Temperature and pressure, in a
monophasic state of the flow, which Is liquid in this case, due to the liquid hydrocarbon.

In this kind of installation Skid, the conditioning of the flow process in mandatory, having:

 Filtration and De-aeration of the flow product, to have monophasic product

 Flow Metering, with temperature compensation, and Pressurization and flow

computer, which aims to calculate de Total flow transferred.

 Control Valves, which allows to control pressure of the flow which go through the
flow, and assure not to have bubble in the measurement procedure.

 All devices integrated to a Flow Computer

 Could have a Proving stage connections, which aims to recalibrated and

certificate the Metering System by Third parties Organization.

A compact metering for loading trucks include similar component than the Skid Metering, but
in a compact format of installation:

 Filter and deaerator

 Flow computer

 Temperature and pressure transmitter, if apply compensation flow.

148
  Outlet Control Valve.

When some downloading bays are needed, the skid of metering for several loading arms
should be installed as a compact skid.

In the next table, we try to identify the specific application of the Flow Metering, into the
different relative locations in the terminal and principal of measurement for instruments
(ultrasonic, Coriolis, etc).

TABLE 22– MESUREMENT MODELS

MEASUREMENT MODELS

PRODUCT LOADING CUSTODY MEASUREMENT

HOSES METERS MODELS WHERE MEASURE
MOVEMENT ARM TRANSFER MODEL

MEASURE
SHIP/BARGE X X SKID/INDIVIDUAL CORIOLIS JETTY/TERMINAL
METER
SHIP/BARGE
RECEPTION (LIGHTERING) X INDIVIDUAL METER CORIOLIS JETTY/TERMINAL

MEASURE
PIPE
X SKID/INDIVIDUAL CORIOLIS TERMINAL
(REFINERY)
METER

STORAGE INVENTORY ENRAF TANKS

POSITIVE
TANK TRUCK X X MEASURE SKID TERMINAL LOADING BAY
DISPLACEMENT

RAIL CAR X X MEASURE SKID CORIOLIS RAIL CAR GANTRY

LOADING SHIP/BARGE
INDIVIDUAL METER CORIOLIS JETTY
SYSTEM (INTERNAL)
SHIP/BARGE
X X INDIVIDUAL METER CORIOLIS JETTY
(BUNKERING)
POSITIVE
DRUM/BARREL X X MEASURE SKID TERMINAL LOADING BAY
DISPLACEMENT
POSITIVE
TANK TRUCK X X MEASURE SKID TERMINAL LOADING BAY
UNLOADING DISPLACEMENT
SYSTEM POSITIVE
RAIL CAR X X MEASURE SKID RAIL CAR GANTRY
DISPLACEMENT

Source: TR

11.3.10 OPERATION SEQUENCIES AND MODES

This chapter clarifies the basic principles and general technical requirements of the control
and supervision of the terminal's hydrocarbon tank farm. The specific details of the
automation and control system will be defined in general drawing, equipment specifications,
control system documents and diagrams to be developed by EPC contractor later in detail

149
engineering. The following criteria have been considered in the design of the terminal Control
System:

Three (3) zones or areas of the terminal have been distinguished:

 Product reception area (Jetty and Refinery pipeline)

 Product storage area (Tank Farm).

 Dispatch Area (Delivery trucks, Delivery rail wagons and Delivery ships)

The integration of field instrumentation and packaged equipment has been considered in all
areas associated with the Terminal.

The Control System will be configured based on drawing 24020-PAD-I-DW-500-00 Control

System Architecture POCL (included in Section 7).

11.3.10.1 LEVEL OF CONTROLS

There will also be three levels of automation: Field level, Control Level and Supervision Level

Field Level:

The field level is constituted by the field instruments, motorized valves, bus gateways, input /
output signal cards. The interface between the Field Level (instrumentation) and Control
Level will be made in conventional cabling for analog signals and communication cabling
under protocol Modbus TCP/IP for communicated signals.

Control level:

The control level consists of control system controllers and package units sub-systems. The
control elements in this level are communicated each other with the operation and
supervision system through a redundant Ethernet Control Bus. Also, at this level, the
operating sequences, the safety interlocks and the terminal control logic are executed.

Supervision Level:

The supervision level is represented by the Operating Stations, Engineering, Printers and
remote terminals of the sub-system units.

Level dedicated only to users of the control system, instant and massive data management,
and communication with the Company's document management system.

This level includes:

 Application Servers

150
  Engineering Stations

 Operating Stations

 Report and alarm printers

The integration of the following systems has been considered for the three (3) areas
considered.

Product reception area (Jetty, Refinery pipeline and SPM):

- Flowmeter System of the jetty Ship unloading and flowmeter of refinery pipeline.

Product Hydrocarbon Storage Area:

- Inventory Tank System, based on volume measurement technology ENRAF type and
accessory equipment.

- Remote Control of Pumps Group for delivery products.

- Remote Control of Pumps Group for transfer of products between tanks.

Dispatch Area:

- Truck Delivery Weighing System

- Remote Control of Pumps Group for delivery products.

- Flowmeter System for Trucks delivery products

- Flowmeters System for Rail wagons delivery products

- Identification and Management System for Truck delivery through electronic cards.

11.3.10.2 OPERATION MODES

Automatic Mode:

Is produced based on the control sequence steps implemented in the terminal control logic
operation that will be described in the corresponding functional documents. The Start/Stop
permissive must be met regarding to maintain the safety operation in all the terminal. In
control room, the supervision and operation will be made through screen operation stations,
indicators and buttons in automatic mode.

Manual Remote Mode:

151
The operator performs the Start/Stop operation from existing pushbuttons on the Operator
Stations Screens. Previously, the Start/Stop permissive stablished in the control logic must
be met.

Local Mode:

The Start/Stop will be carried out by the operator in the field through the Local Stations at the
foot of each electrical equipment. Through the local/remote selector (field) it will be possible
to Start/Stop the equipment locally and from the control room it will be possible to view the
operating mode by means of a confirmation signal. There will be two (2) different local
modes: from local stations in the field and from control room in the operation screen of Main
Control System.

11.3.11 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

The installation's fire-fighting system will be dimensioned considering the highest possible
individual risk.
Thermal radiation received by vulnerable elements located in the vicinity of fires requires
knowledge of numerous variables, such as, the geometry of the fire. The heat generated by
combustion, the fraction that is emitted in the form of radiation, the possible formation of
fumes, radiation absorbed by the atmosphere, the position of the object, etc…
The criteria for affecting surfaces to be cooled according to the tanks or other fire risk in the
project, will be based on determining a distance that guarantees that the fire cannot spread
to neighboring containers. As criteria for affecting the project (in all scenarios) the equipment
or facilities that are affected by a thermal radiation flux of 12.50 kw/ m2 must be taken into
account.

In order to size the fire pump and the water reserve, the riskiest scenario to consider in this
project is the fire in a tank, and the projection of water on 50% of the surface of the tank wall
adjacent areas that are affected by thermal radiation.

11.3.11.1 RECEPTION (JETTY ZONE)

In the Jetty zone, the current system for protect this zones combine various hydrant-monitors
connected to a foam tank with a line mixer for provide foam, with this system the loading
zone are protected, but this system isn´t the most recommendable, with the current
configuration is very difficult to manage a manual monitor, because the radiation will be very
highly in the zone in case of fire, we propose a better system with a monitor tower with

152
remote control in a safe zone , as minimum it´s necessary to consider the installation of
water and foam monitors in each docking point. Water screens or curtains (Hidroshields)
must also be installed along the loading point of the jetty zone, to separate possible fire risk
in a ship from loading point. All the facilities of firefighting must be manually and remotely
operated from one point adequately separated from the risk point.

11.3.11.2 STORAGE TANKS

Only some tanks have installed Fire Fighting system, in this cases the fire protection system
of the tanks is directly connected to hydrant network with a tie-in and a gate valve, this is not
an automatic mode for protect the tanks, with this system in case of fire you need to go to the
valve and open in the system, normally this system does not work in case of fire because
any operator can´t support the radiation of the burned tank.

Also is necessary to protect the tank, with a water spray system and a foam system, in
accordance with OISD-117 Fire Protection Facilities for Petroleum Depots, Terminal, Pipeline
Installation & Lube Oil Installation standards.

 Water flow calculated, for cooling a tank on fire at a rate of 3 lpm/m2 of tank shell area.
 Water flow calculated, for exposure protection for all other tanks falling within a radius
of (R +30) m from centre of the tank on fire (R-Radius of tank on fire) and situated in
the same dyke, at a rate of 3 lpm/m2 of tank shell area.
 Water flow calculated, for exposure protection for all other tanks falling outside a radius
of (R+30) m from centre of the tank on fire and situated in the same dyke, at a rate of 1
lpm/ m2 of tank shell area.
 Spray nozzles shall be directed radially to the tank at a distance not exceeding 0.6 M
from the tank surface.

Foam solution applicable rate for cone roof tanks shall be taken as 5 lpm/m2

In the fixed roof tank, the foam discharge it´s done normally intersuperficially, the tanks must
have the followings foam chambers.

153
 TABLE 23- FOAM CHAMBERS FOR TANKS

Tank Diameter (meters) Foam Chambers (No)

Above 18 & up to 20 2

Above 20 & up to 25 3

Above 25& up to 30 4

Above 30 & up to 35 5

Above 35 & up to 40 6

Above 40 & up to 45 8

Above 45 & up to 50 10
Source: TR

An additional foam chamber will be installed for tank more than 60 diameters meters for each
465 m2.

For floating-roof tanks the discharge method is in the top of seal.

Fixed foam discharge outlets located above the mechanical shoe seal, above a tube seal
water shield, or above a secondary seal shall be used in conjunction with a foam dam.

The following methods shall be permitted for application of fixed foam discharge outlets:

 Fixed foam discharge outlets mounted above the top of the tank shell

- Fixed foam discharge outlets mounted on the periphery of the floating roof.

154
 TABLE 24– SEAL TYPES FOR TANKS

Maximum Spacing Between

Discharge Outlets With
Minimum
Minimum
Seal Type Application 305 mm Foam 610 mm Foam
Discharge Time
Rate Dam Dam

Mechanical soe seal 12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m

Tube seal with metal

12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m
weather shield

Fully or partly
combustible secondary 12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m
seal

All metal secondary seal 12.2 l/min·m2 20 min 12.2 m 24.4 m

Source: TR

Where the fixed foam discharge outlets are mounted above the top of the tank shell, a foam
splash-board is necessary due to the effects of winds.

The detection for floating-roof and fixed tanks will be doing with a fiber optic wire. This
system is composed by a control unit and the wire, the system is highly recommended to
protect zones like a tank farm, early detection allows time for automatic or manual
extinguishing and draining volatile fuels.

This system is very sensible, can detect an increasing of temperature in a specific point, the
system easily adapts to retrofit or new installation in both internal and external floating tank.

For a floating roof tank the wire will be installed in the seal along the perimeter of tank, for a
fixed tank the wire will be installed in monitor gauge points, vent arear or manholes.

155
 FIGURE 9- MONITORING TANKS WITH TWO DTS INSTRUMENTS FOR FULL
REDUNDANCY

Source: TR

A confined pool fire, is a fire produced by the combustion of fuel spill within a boundary or
perimeter where confines the mass of hydrocarbon. Boundaries can be made up of walls that
enclose a certain area. Fire or liquid fuel fire requires a point of ignition, the oxidizer (oxygen
in the air) and the triggering of the reaction. For this type of fire (pool fire). This type of risk
exists in any tank or container or pool that stores hydrocarbons, as well as in areas that
handle hydrocarbons capable of suffering spills and catching fire, for this type of fire is very
highly recommended use flame detectors.

Flame detectors utilize optical technologies to detect flames. Flames are known to emit
electromagnetic radiation in the infrared (IR), visible light, and ultraviolet (UV) wavelengths
depending on the fuel source. Because of this, optical flame-sensing technologies have been
developed utilizing UV, UV/IR and multi-spectrum infrared. These products rely on line-of-site
detection of the radiation emitted in the spectral bands to determine if a flame is real.

Consider whether the potential flame you are looking to detect will be hydrocarbon based or
non-organic. With Hydrocarbon flames, a combination of methane and oxygen produce
carbon dioxide and water. This type of fire creates a UV signal reading at 0.2 microns and IR
signal reading at 2.7 microns and 4.5 microns. Hydrogen flames only produce water

156
molecules and therefore we do not see the same CO2 peak that a hydrocarbon flame is
known to produce.

Optical flame detectors come with a “field of view” range, similar to the lens on a camera.
Taking the field of view range into account will help determine how many detectors are
needed to cover an installation or a specific area within the installation.

FIGURE 10-FLAME DETECTOR SPACING

Source: TR

In addition, a sufficient number of portable or on-car extinguishers, located in accordance

with the requirements of OISD 117 Standard, in a visible position, easily accessible and
strategically around retention pails and preferably near stations of pumping, access to the
buckets and face / discharge facilities. The storage park area will be covered by monitors (or
monitors mounted on hydrants) whose function will be to cool tanks and spheres. The kind of
monitor will be according to stored products.

11.3.11.3 PUMP HOUSE

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the pump house.

The fixed extinguishing system based on water-foam for the protection of hydrocarbon
dispatch pumps must have the necessary elements to apply a design regime of not less than
20.4 lpm/m2, all according to the OISD 117 Standard They will be protected with at least two
nozzles provided that the correct coverage of the equipment is ensured, preferably oriented
to cover suction and discharge flanges.

157
The detection system can be done electrically, using heat detectors (Fenwall detectors) or it
can be done with a pneumatic detection system using sprinklers.

Fenwall detectors are highly reliable and have good resistance to operation from non-hostile
sources. They are also very easy and inexpensive to maintain. On the down side, they do not
function until room temperatures have reached a substantial temperature, at which point the
fire is well underway and damage is growing exponentially. Subsequently, thermal detectors
are usually not permitted in life safety applications. They are also not recommended in
locations where there is a desire to identify a fire before substantial flames occur, such as
spaces where high value thermal sensitive contents are housed.

A spot type heat detector will cover all points located within 0.7 times the listed spacing. The
listed spacing for heat detectors is S= 50 ft (15.3 m)

11.3.11.4 LOADING SYSTEM

There´s no firefighting system installed to protect the loading areas

The fixed extinguishing system based on water-foam for the protection of hydrocarbon
loading areas (loading trucks and wagon loading) must have the necessary elements to
apply a design regime of not less than 6.5 lpm / m2 (0.16 gpm / p2) for a period of 10 minutes,
all according to the OISD 117 Standard standard.

Also the system must be completed with additional discharge of the foam monitors installed
neared of the loading zones.

The detection system will be done with fenwall thermal detectors combined with flame
detectors.

11.3.11.5 HYDRANTS

Hydrants will be installed following the design codes of OISD 117 Standard. They must be
secured to the pipe and anchored, in accordance with the requirements of OISD 117
Standard.

The hydrants must have a connection diameter with the main pipe not less than 6”. Each
hydrant must be equipped with an individual shutoff valve located on the bypass that
connects to the main network. Between every two hydrants an exterior hose cabinet with
hoses for hydrants will be installed.

158
11.3.11.6 MONITORS

Fixed water or water / foam monitors will be installed at strategic points, in areas with a
thermal impact of less than 5.1 Kw / m2, and around or within areas where a fire risk has
been identified. The fixed monitors will be autonomous or installed in hydrants.

In particular, monitors will be installed in hydrants located around process areas and storage
and transfer facilities for toxic, flammable or LPG products.

The monitors will be foam-water monitors around the hydrocarbon storage areas such as
diesel and gasoline.

11.3.11.7 FIRE PUMP

With the pressure and flow data of the existing pumps in the installation, the capacity of the
pump is insufficient. Therefore it is necessary to install new pumps, the pumps have to meet
the water demand of the two scenarios with the highest risk

The pumps shall be capable of discharging 150% of its rated discharge at a minimum of 65%
of the rated head. The Shut-off head shall not exceed 120% of rated head.

The pumping group it will be composed by 3 diesel pumps supplied at 50%.

The water reserve tank doesn´t need to be calculated, the water supply comes from an
inexhaustible natural source.

The design of the fire pump installation must be in accordance with NFPA 20 codes and
OISD-117 Standards.

11.3.12 EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT

The JOCL facility has an oily water collection system, using underground networks that
discharge into an open pool, where the water and hydrocarbon are separated by gravity.

Improvement of the contaminated water treatment system is included in the scope of the
project.

Facilities and equipment will be designed so that water discharged to the outside of the
Storage Facility will have a hydrocarbon content that is below the limits allowed by the
regulations. In order to reach these limits, an analyzer and flow measurement system will be
available that will record in real time the hydrocarbon content and the discharge flow, not

159
allowing the exit if this content exceeds the pre-set limits, and therefore returning it to the
start of treatment. This system facilitates the control of the discharge in real time, as well as
allowing the elaboration of weekly, monthly and annual statistics with the stored records.

In order to locate the new Effluent Treatment Plant at Jamuna Terminal it is necessary the
following works:

- Relocation of an existing firefighting piping adjacent to existing tank T-003 (HSD)

- Installation of two (2) new submersible pumps inside the existing manhole at the end
of the actual drainage net. These two pumps will send the effluents to the new
Effluent Treatment Plant.

- Interconnection from the new Effluent Treatment Plant to the final drainage delivery
point at the battery limit with MPL.

There is a plant for each terminal; each of them is according to general document 24020-
GEN-M-SP-004 Effluent Treatment Plant Specification (included in Section 6. Employer’s
Requirements, item 6.6.2 FEED Package which is part of sub-section 6.6 Supplementary
Information).

Facilities and equipment will be designed so that water discharged to the outside of the
Storage

11.3.13 GENERAL ELECTRICAL MODIFICATIONS

11.3.13.1 ELECTRICAL LOW VOLTAGE CABLES

To feed the motor pumps from the iMCC, new low voltage cable will be installed using
armored cables and cable glands for hazardous areas. Low voltage electrical cables shall
have the following features:

o Cables shall be designed according to IEC 60502.

o All cables shall be flame-retardant and fire-resistant in accordance with IEC 60332-1
and IEC 60332-3-24 (Category C), respectively. Halogen emissions (CLH) shall be
less than 15 %, measured by the test stipulated in IEC 60754.

o All cables shall be suitable for installation in classified areas where there is a risk of
fire or explosion.

160
 o The rated voltage of the cables shall be 0.6/1 kV, and be applied to all the power,
lighting and control circuits covered by the typical operating voltages (115, 230, 400
and 500 V).

o All conductors shall be copper, in accordance with IEC 60228.

o Conductors shall be class 5, in accordance with IEC 60228.

o Cable insulation shall consist of an extruded layer of cross-linked polyethylene

(XLPE), high module ethylene-propylene rubber (HEPR) or any equivalent material,
suitable for an operating temperature of 90ºC and a short-circuit temperature of
250ºC. The minimum thicknesses and insulation properties shall be those defined in
the IEC 60502-1 standard.

o The cables to be installed in classified areas (risk of fire and explosion) shall be
armored type.

o Cables must be resistant to Hydrocarbons and oils.

o The armor shall be made from galvanized steel wire, unless another alternative is
defined. The characteristics, dimensions and test requirements shall comply with the
IEC 60502-1 standard.

11.3.13.2 CABLE GLANDS FOR ARMOURED CABLES

Cable gland shall have the features listed below:

o Be made of brass or stainless steel, protection degree IP 66, Exd/Exe for connection
with IICT6 equipment metric thread.

o Cable entries with cylindrical thread must have a waterproof bed joint in order to
guarantee the degree of protection of the enclosure on which they are installed.

11.3.13.3 JUNCTION BOXES

Junction boxes shall be installed wherever necessary and shall meet the following
requirements:

o They shall include cable glands, stoppers and terminals installed.

o Construction material shall be one of the following:

 Aluminum alloy with reinforced walls to allow holes for at least 5 thread screw.

161
  Polyamide/polyester reinforced with fiberglass.

o All boxes shall have a protection degree of IP 65 or higher.

o The protection level against impacts for the aluminum alloy or thermoplastic boxes
shall be IK08 or higher.

11.3.13.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION CABLE ROUTING

From the new iMCC to the motor pumps, new cable will runs aerial or buried, where
applicable

- Aerial cable routing

Aerial cable routing shall be made on cable trays, preferably in the vertical position,
conveniently secured to the structure.

Cable tray shall have the following characteristics:

o Types:

 Perforated metal cable tray (for secondary cable distribution).

 Metal ladder tray (for main cable distribution).

o Material: Stainless steel hot-dip galvanized.

o Cable trays shall be designed according to IEC 61537.

o In areas of very high corrosion, cable trays can be made of PVC or similar.

The cable tray and the cables shall be laid, so that the structure offers a physical
protection for the cables. Cables shall be conveniently tied to avoid ondulation, with a
maximum separation between ties of 1200 mm (47 inch) for horizontal routing and 500
mm (20 inch) for vertical routing or horizontal routing with vertical position. Definitive ties
shall be corrosion resistant.

Cable trays and/or cables shall not be attached to process piping.

Cables shall be preferably mounted on a single layer, taking no more than 60 to 70% of
the cable tray’s capacity. When the entire installation is aerial, cables can be laid on two
layers, using the appropriate derating coefficients.

- Underground cable routing

Cables running under roads shall run in PVC conduits of at least 150 mm
(6 inch) internal diameter, with thick walls, high pressure, embedded in concrete.

162
 Inspection pits shall be installed every 20 m (66 ft) in straight stretches and at all changes
of direction.

Inspection pits shall be placed at both sides of road crossings and when there is a change
from underground to aerial.

Routing of underground conduits shall be designed to avoid floods; therefore adequate

drains shall be provided at lower points.

Used and reserve conduits shall be sealed at both ends to avoid obstructions.

Cables can be buried directly in the ground whenever possible.

The layout of cables shall be evaluated for each situation, so that there will be no
interference due to capacitive and/or inductive effects.

11.3.13.5 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

A Lightning Protection system according to NFC 17-102 will be designed in the FEED for
protection of all types of structures and open areas. The protection device proposed is a
“Lightning Rod with Early Streamer Emission (ESE) System”.

The main characteristics to considerer for ESE are the following:

- High level of protection

- Shall preserves its initial properties after each discharge.

- The device doesn't offer any resistance to discharge conduction.

- Lightning rod without electrical components. Maxim durability guaranteed.

- It doesn't need external power supply.

- Operation guaranteed in any atmospheric condition.

- High resistance to temperature. Maximum temperature: 125ºC.

- High resistance to weather conditions and corrosive atmospheres.

- Maintenance free.

The specific function of lightning rod with ESE is producing an upward stream of ionized
particles that will channel the eventual electrical discharge from its origin.

Installation:

163
 - The tip of the lightning rod should be located, at least two meters above the highest
building or element to be protected.

- A head-mast adapter piece is required in order to attach the lightning rod to the mast
selected for its installation.

- The lightning rod should be connected to a grounding point by way of one or various
conducting cables which will go down, whenever possible, the exterior of the
construction with the shortest and straightest possible trajectory.

- The earth termination systems, whose resistance should be the lowest possible (less
than 10 ohms), should guarantee the most rapid possible dissipation of the lightning
current discharge.

Protection level shall be calculated according to NFC 17-102 (Lightning Risk Assessment)

11.3.13.6 LIGHTING SYSTEM

Outdoor Lighting system:

The main objective of industrial outdoor lighting system consists on supplying the quantity
and quality of illumination system that provides the maximum requirements of security and
comfort to operating personnel.

For external areas, will be designed a High Mast Flood Lighting System. Led lighting fixtures
is proposed with the aim to reduce cost and save energy due to their highly energy efficient.

The lighting fixture model and description are indicated below as an example:

Required lighting level for each area will be accomplished by installing the appropriate
number of lighting fixtures on each single lighting tower.

The illuminance suggested by standards is 20 lux for general outdoor areas. Considering
towers of 20m height with 3 or 4 300W floodlights LED.

Plant lighting circuits shall be fed from dedicated lighting distribution switchboards.

Outdoor lighting circuits shall be designed for automatic switching via photo-electric
relays. Control circuits for photo-electric relays shall be 'fail-safe', i.e., to switch the
lights on if a fault occurs in the photo-electric relay.

Indoor Lighting system:

An indoor lighting system will be designed for the new indoor installations with the following
illumination level where applicable:

164
 - Control room 300-400 Lux

- Electrical room 300-400 Lux

- Pump house 100-150 Lux

- Truck Loading area 100-150 Lux

The lighting installation shall be designed so that ceiling lighting

groups can be switched off independently to suit operators' needs.

11.3.13.7 EARTHING NETWORK

When working on small expansions in existing installations, the original philosophy shall be
maintained whenever possible unless the new design improves or delivers clear technology
advances.

The following elements shall be connected to the existing earthing network:

- Electrical Rooms

- Electrical panels

- Piping

- Structures and other metal containers without electrical parts

- Instrumentation systems and circuits

- Lightning and surge arrester

- Tanks

Truck and Wagon Loading earthing

The earth connection is necessary to eliminate static currents during loading and/or
unloading operations.

Vehicles shall be earthed using an automatic lock mechanism that shall prevent loading /
unloading the lorry or tank wagon unless static electricity has first been discharged. An alarm
shall signal if earthing is not correct.

Weighing platforms will be connected to the main earth network. The system shall be
permanently connected to earth during the load / unload operations.

165
11.3.13.8 GENERAL RECOMENDATIONS

According to the information sent by JOCL, the MV / LV transformer has a capacity of 500
kVA, being the sanctioned load (licensed) 400 kW, and the maximum load reached at any
instant of 380 kW, leaving an available electrical power of 20 kW.
Taking into consideration the above information, the automation project requires increase the
sanctioned load and therefore to change the existing power transformer for one of more
capacity to be defined in the FEED.
Additional electrical loads derived from the project automation:

 New Effluent Treatment Plant

 HVAC in Control and Electrical Rooms
 UPS
 New External Lighting
 Fuel loading facilities

166
12 CONTRACT DESIGN PHILOSOPY

12.1 INTRODUCTION

In the JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals, auxiliary systems and permanent camp shall be
designed, engineered and constructed to assure safety, environmental licenses and law
compliance, reliability, quality, efficient manpower utilization, operability and maintainability.
Throughout all Work phases the installations must be designed and constructed giving
maximum priority to personnel and Equipment safety. Particular consideration shall be given
to:
Maintaining criteria of safety, health and the environment during all Contract phases at the
highest possible levels.
Minimizing Capital Expenditure.
Maximizing the reliability and ease of maintenance of the Equipment.
Maximizing Plant automation
Maximizing the use of available space abiding to minimum Equipment spacing practices and
standards.
Minimizing / optimizing utilities consumption. CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the use
of energy is as low as reasonably possible.
The works in JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals shall include equipment and systems that
have been commercially proven for a minimum of 2 years. The use of any technology,
including design or material of construction, that is new or unproven in OWNER’s opinion, or
any Equipment having a size or capacity exceeding that previously built and operated
successfully by others shall have prior OWNER approval.

12.2 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING CRITERIA

12.2.1 GENERAL

Design capacity, feedstock and product specifications and quantities are identified in the next
documents included in section 6.6.2 FEED:
- 24020-PAD-D-IN-005-00 Design Basis POCL
- 24020-MEG-D-IN-005-00 Design Basis MPL
- 24020-JAM-D-IN-005-00 Design Basis JOCL
Terminals Efficiency will have to fulfil the requirements established in the EPC Contract.
The works in JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals shall be designed with a design life of 25
years.
The JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals shall be capable of continuous operation at one
hundred percent (100%) of the design production capacity, as well as the specified turndown
rate, identified in the OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION.

167
CONTRACTOR shall give back to back process performance guarantees for licensed
processes.
Plot plan arrangements shall be prepared based on spacing consistent with the TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS and the OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION. Plot plan arrangements
shall be consistent with the layout provided in said OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION.
Final plot plan arrangement proposed by CONTRACTOR shall be approved by OWNER.
Plot plan arrangements shall take into consideration optimization, constructability and the
practicality of future expansion, and should identify space for future process equipment
specified in OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION or authorized by OWNER.
Design of buildings new facilities shall meet TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. Review and
approval by OWNER of designs shall be obtained by CONTRACTOR in the earliest stages of
design and throughout the lifetime of the Contract.
Any substitutions by CONTRACTOR of deemed ‘equivalent’ material or Equipment shall be
subject to approval by OWNER.
Access roads to all operating areas shall be paved. Process areas shall have adequate
concrete paving. CONTRACTOR shall provide spillage channels and impounding basins as
required in the OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION around Equipment and all other areas
where spillage may occur during operations or maintenance activities. In all other areas,
graded stone or similar material shall be provided.
The process design shall look for homogenization and normalization of equipment
(flowmeter, actuators, instruments, valves, loading arms, switchgear, etc.)

12.2.2 EQUIPMENT

Critical rotating and/or reciprocating equipment, including their associated auxiliary

components, shall be analyzed to ensure that the reliability of the mechanical train is not
adversely impacted by the failure of a single auxiliary component. In general, spare critical
rotating equipment shall not share auxiliary components with the prime rotating equipment.
That is, the loss of an auxiliary component shall not affect the availability of both the prime
and the spare equipment.
Critical rotating and/reciprocating equipment shall include an upper level system capable of
collecting all signals from HMI and send them remotely should be included.
Special attention shall be given to standardization and interchangeability of Equipment and
spares.
Equipment purchased for this Contract shall comply with the noise level criteria as specified
by local regulations and TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS to achieve the specified in-plant,
plant boundaries and community noise levels. Equipment noise levels are specified
elsewhere herein and shall be guaranteed by the Equipment manufacturer and verified with
test data.
Equipment purchased for this contract shall conform to emission standards as specified by
legislation and TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. The emission levels of equipment shall be
guarantee by the equipment manufacturer and verified with test data.

168
12.2.3 OPERATIONS

The detailed design of the storage tank plants shall be based on requirements of P&IDs and
overall strategy designed by CONTRACTOR.
The process control system (PCS) for the JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals shall be
designed to continuously produce on-specification product over its full range of operability, as
specified in the documents:
- 24020-PAD-I-SP-005-00 Specification for Process Control System POCL
- 24020-MEG-I-SP-005-00 Specification for Process Control System and ESD MPL
- 24020-JAM-I-SP-005-00 Specification for Process Control System and ESD JOCL
It shall automatically adjust controls to correct for disturbances caused by changing weather,
process or terminal conditions. The control system shall provide for the orderly control of the
JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals transients during start-up, normal shutdown, and
emergency shutdown
Operations shall be controlled from a dedicated control room with outside operators who
perform the operational tasks in the JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals. It should be possible
for a control operator to monitor all important variables, and to be alerted to abnormal
operations by an alarm system, so that outside staff can be informed in a timely manner. In
cases where an outside operator’s attention to Equipment and systems is required on more
than a periodic basis, local indicators, or control panels shall be provided to the extent
necessary to accomplish the job safely and reliably.
The JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals shall be designed and instrumented using a minimum
manual operation concept.
Metering skids shall be provided for products balance fiscalization.
Should any local or national Bangladeshi regulation, in force as per the Effective Date, apply
to the metering facilities, it shall be up to the CONTRACTOR to fulfill it by upgrading design.
CONTRACTOR shall inform OWNER of any required changes after the Effective Date.

12.2.4 PLANT CONTROL SYSTEMS IN JOCL, MPL AND JOCL TERMINALS

The JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals Control Systems Design basis is described in the
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.
The JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals Control Rooms (CR) shall require uninterruptible
power supplies for the DCS (Distribute Control System) and any other Safety instrumented
System. The CR, shall also require appropriate air conditioning and filtration equipment to
meet the DCS environmental specifications and requirements. Lighting incorporated into the
design shall permit effective (no glare) operator use of CR displays.
The term “SIS” Safety Instrumented System shall be used for a general protective /
Emergency Shutdown (ESD). The SIS shall consist of transmitters and valves and a safety
Programmable Electronic System (PES) suitable for the Safety Integrity Level (SIL). The SIS
shall provide critical interlocks and shutdown based on manual push buttons or a potentially
dangerous abnormal condition detected by a field sensing device(s). The basic system

169
design for a SIS system shall follow the requirements and general guidelines given in the
OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION and the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. The
following provisions, however, shall be specifically adhered to:
The PES (Programmable Electronic System) design shall be certified for the required SIL
according to IEC 61508. OWNER’s requirements shall be followed.
Safety Instrumented System shall be designed strictly IEC 61511 standard. A Safety life
cycle shall be planned, presented for approval and upon approval follow up of it. OWNER
will participate actively in the verification and validation phases as well in audits and
assessments.
Contractor shall be responsible of the delivery of manuals and procedures for maintenance
and proof tests to operators.
The TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS define application of smart transmitters, tank gauging,
analyzers, cabling, spare capacity, and other instrumentation.
CONTRACTOR shall carry out a control room human factor assessment, determining how
many operators will use the facilities provided to operate the Terminals, and also to respond
to incidents. The output from the human factors assessment shall be taken into consideration
for the design of the control room.

12.2.5 MAINTENANCE

Whenever practical JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals, Equipment design and layout shall
allow access by portable or mobile equipment.
Permanent maintenance facilities shall be provided wherever repetitive and frequent
activities are anticipated. The need for other permanent maintenance facilities, such as
special platforms not used for normal operations, trolley beams, cranes, shelters, etc., shall
be individually evaluated to minimize operating and maintenance cost. Provision of mobile
equipment maneuvering space must also be considered when making such an evaluation.
Certain maintenance and operational equipment such as overhead cranes, hoists, and
monorails are to be shown on the plot arrangement or equipment lists.
Care shall be taken in the piping design to ensure that valves, control valves, orifice plates,
differential pressure (d/p) cells, and other instrumentation items which require regular
maintenance are accessible from grade or platforms. The use of mobile platforms shall be
avoided. All unit valves and operator attended instrumentation shall be operable from grade
or fixed platforms.
JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals facilities shall be designed with readily accessible isolating
valves, located at project information that shall permit blocking in and blinding without the
shutdown of other areas of the overall Terminals. These valves shall be tagged and labeled
and readily accessible at grade or from fixed platforms.
As an essential part of field engineering design, documentation shall clearly and completely
reflect the “as-built” JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals in the detail necessary to permit
convenient retrieval of information to support maintenance and troubleshooting activities. All
documents shall be indexed and cross referenced to give access to and continuity among all
engineering documents used in routine maintenance and troubleshooting.

170
13 DESIGN AND DETAIL ENGINEERING

CONTRACTOR shall consider the information contained in the Technical Specification as

general guidance and starting point for the development of the detailed design and
engineering phase of the WORK. CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for any use of such
technical information in the performance of the Work. All technical information included in
the OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION, including the information contained in the
Technical Specifications included therein, as of the Effective Date shall be verified by
CONTRACTOR for completeness and accuracy with respect to the design.
CONTRACTOR is advised that the job has to be undertaken as a complete Project and that
any such natural development or necessary adjustment of the OWNER FURNISHED
INFORMATION during the WORK performance period will not entitle CONTRACTOR to
raise a Request for Change. The Technical Specification shall be in any case the minimum
requirement.
The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for carrying out a consistency check of the OWNER
FURNISHED INFORMATION and for issuing a complete set of specifications afterwards that
shall be submitted to OWNER for approval.
The CONTRACTOR shall take into account to develop the Detail Engineering the
Constructability consideration included in the following documents (which are included in
Section 6. Employer’s Requirements, item 6.6.2 FEED Package which is part of sub-section
6.6 Supplementary Information):
- 24020-MEG-D-IN-004-02 Recommendations for construction MPL.
- 24020-JAM-D-IN-004-01 Recommendations for construction JOCL.
- 24020-PAD-D-IN-004-01 Recommendations for construction POCL.

13.1 FEED ENGINEERING VALIDATION

CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have verified, treated and developed “as if it were its
own” all information contained in the Technical Specification, including all its annexes. If
CONTRACTOR find any data which in its opinion is unclear, not correct, or not adequate for
it to perform the WORK, then CONTRACTOR must give full details in its Proposal, together
with all assumptions made for meeting the requirements of the Engineering. CONTRACTOR
is invited to provide any further information it deems pertinent to the performance of the
WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for safe operability and maintainability of the Terminals.
CONTRACTOR shall bring to OWNER’s attention any modification to the Plant Design that
can improve safety, operability or maintainability.
No claim or request for change will be equally accepted in case of detection of unforeseen
obstacles, obstructions or other unfavorable situation that neither the studies supplied by
OWNER nor CONTRACTOR’s supplementary studies or investigations could bring to
evidence.
The EPC contractors will assume fully responsibility for all necessary engineering design of
their scope of work.

171
The documents provided by OWNER represent a minimum standard from which
CONTRACTOR shall develop the Contract specific drawings, specifications and standards
necessary to complete the Work. Any deviations from the OWNER’s minimum standards are
subject to approval.
Contractor will perform the facilities detail engineering; having to take as a basis the
requirements provided by the applicable Standards and Codes.
The documentation developed in FEED is included in Sections 6 and 7.
During execution of FEED, a Topographical Survey, a Geotechnical Survey and an
Environment Impact Assessment Study have been carried out and they must be considered
as initial data and must be verified and completed by CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR shall review, adapt and develop the design included in the FEED (civil,
piping, electrical and I&C, firefighting documentation) with the topographical and
geotechnical information provided in the FEED. If deemed necessary, the CONTRACTOR
shall carry out new topographical and geotechnical studies for the correct performance of the
detailed engineering works and the construction of the planned facilities.
Any modification that the CONTRACTOR considers necessary to make to the FEED design
must be previously approved by the OWNER or his PMC and shall not entail any extra cost
as it is included within the scope of the CONTRACTOR.
It is made clear and agreed upon that no claims arising from missing information in the
submitted FEED will be accepted.
It is understood that with the submittal of this report, CONTRACTOR accepts and undertakes
to be fully responsible for such design, which will be used as input to define the final
ACCEPTANCE TESTS and design guarantee bases, on the grounds of which
measurements and comparisons about the performance of the different components and the
JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals as a whole will be carried out.

13.2 HAZARD AND OPERABILITY ANALYSIS (HAZOP)

This study shall be carried out by a third party specialists and Owner will participate actively
in their development, OWNER must approve this study. The specialist, who will perform the
study must be approved by the OWNER, must have proven expertise on the subject and the
observations that may arise from the studies will be taken into consideration in the facilities
project.
The report containing the answers to the recommendations should be issued within 10
working days after issuing the HAZOP report.
In the event that the need of including instrumentation or additional equipment, should arise
from these studies result, it is set forth that development of the engineering necessary for the
modifications as well as the purchase and assembly of additional elements will be
considered within Contractor’s scope, resulting in no right to claim additional cost.
Contractor shall be responsible for the execution of the HAZOP study on the facilities at the
Detail Engineering Stage.

172
The HAZOP study on the Detail Engineering will be carried out on consolidated PID drawings
(when OWNER comments of the first revision have been incorporated).
The HAZOP developed at FEED stage could be used as reference.

13.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Contractor, shall, through his Quality System, apply the methods and procedures that
guarantee the satisfaction of the guidelines regarding Design, Scope of Contract, Technical
Specifications, Environment and Safety Requirements and any document included within the
OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION.

13.4 DETAILED ENGINEERING

The EPC contractors will assume fully responsibility for all necessary engineering design of
their scope of work.
The documents provided by OWNER represent a minimum standard from which
CONTRACTOR shall develop the Contract specific drawings, specifications and standards
necessary to complete the Work. Any deviations from the OWNER’s minimum standards are
subject to approval.
Contractor will perform the facilities detail engineering; having to take as a basis the
requirements provided by the applicable Standards and Codes.

13.4.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Contractor will submit for OWNER’s consideration the Software to be used for the
preparation of the Engineering:
The use of the Autocad 2D Software will be accepted for all Detail Engineering Drawings.
The use of the SAP 2000 or Staad Pro Software will be accepted for all Detail Engineering
Structural calculations.
Vendors’ documentation will be drawn up with the same Software system used by
Contractor. It must carry out the coordination of its vendors’ pieces of equipment and/or
systems and it will integrate such coordination to the Detail Engineering as a whole.
Contractor will be responsible for carrying out the documentation distribution. The distribution
chart will be defined during the Project Kick-off Meeting.
Contractor must supply each engineering document developed such as specifications,
drawings, procedures, etc. to OWNER in editable digital format (.doc , .xls , .dwg, etc)
For Revision, contractor may submit electronic documents in Acrobat Reader (PDF) format.

173
13.4.2 ENGINEERING EXECUTION PLAN

Contractor shall present the Engineering Execution Plan for OWNER’s approval at least with
the information required in Section 6 item 6.1.2 General Requirements of the ITB completely
developed.

13.4.3 SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

The equipment, systems, engineering, design and material specifications and requirements
which have been prepared and contained in OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION and the
Technical Specifications shall be strictly followed and developed in the execution of the
scope of Work in order to match required functionalities. Any proposed deviations or
exceptions to this document must first be approved and confirmed by the OWNER prior to
being implemented in the execution of the scope of Work.
The specified codes, standards and regulations and directives which must be followed and
adhered to are described and referenced within the applicable Technical Specifications. Any
additional mandatory code, standard, regulation or directive to the ones that are specified in
the Technical Specifications must be followed as well.
The requirements of codes and standards shall be considered as minimum. The
requirements specified in OWNER´s Technical Specifications shall always be followed,
unless specific contradictions with local laws exist. The requirements of any other applicable
Technical Specifications for the PROJECT shall only be followed if they are stricter than the
ones on the codes and standards. Where possible discrepancies may arise among different
specifications, the OWNER will be informed and will decide which shall apply. In other cases,
the strictest interpretation shall apply.
OWNER may request at any time, any calculation, justification or document that OWNER
considers necessary to satisfy OWNER in regard to the high quality levels required for this
type of Terminals.

13.4.4 CONSTRUCTION SITE SURVEYS

All site survey required for engineering development shall be considered by Contractor. All
cost related to surveys are part of Contractor´s scope.
For performance of in site surveys, measurements and any other work in Terminals, during
the Design stage, Contractor and / or Subcontractor’s staff must comply with the admission
requirements stipulated by OWNER.

13.4.5 DOCUMENTATION IDENTIFICATION AND FOLLOW UP SYSTEM

Contractor will issue a “Project Documents General List” in which will be integrated all
Vendors’ Documents and will keep updated. In such list each document status, with its
record, different reviews submission dates, return dates, evaluation, and any other datum
that can certainly determine each document’s status must be clearly observed.

174
13.4.6 PLOT PLANS

CONTRACTOR shall prepare a detailed layout drawing, that accurately depict and
dimensionally locate, all parts of each Terminal JOCL, MPL and POCL. All items on the plot
plan shall be located in coordinates, using the established Plant Survey Grid or Coordinate
System.
Plot Plan for each Terminal shall also include the following information:
- All roads, including center line coordinates and crossroads pavement elevations.
- Details of process areas layout. These details shall be drawn at a larger scale.
- Structures shall include layout details for every elevation in plan and in elevation.
- Structures and pipe racks, columns alignments shall be identified and shall include
their coordinates.
- Elevations of the main trays in pipe racks.
- Positions of operation and maintenance platforms, stairs and ladders in equipment and
structures.
- Top elevations of the walls in pits.
- All the coordinates or distance in order to define exactly the equipment referenced to
foundations, structures, buildings and other elements position.
- Delimitation of the spaces that have been foreseen for maintenance and,
consequently, have to remain free of obstructions.
FEED Phase plot plans are included in the present ITB package.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals plot plans for OWNERN
approval within one (1) month of the Effective Date.
CONTRACTOR shall prepare detailed aboveground and underground arrangement drawings
showing electrical and control cables, drain systems, water, and fire protection systems, with
referenced dimensions. The underground and aboveground drawings shall be “As-Built” to
reflect the final, constructed configuration of all aerial and buried services.

13.4.7 PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS

CONTRACTOR is responsible for the development of the Process P&IDs. CONTRACTOR

shall add to the P&IDs all the information gathered and changes arising during Detailed
Engineering. CONTRACTOR shall inform OWNER of all changes to P&IDs so that OWNER
can place any comments that are deemed appropriate.
CONTRACTOR shall maintain the P&ID format as established by OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall complete the P&IDs with the following information and prepare all
additional P&IDs required to complete the JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals definition:
Detail sheets showing standard configurations and legends.
Equipment, instrument and piping line numbering.

175
TAG numbering shall be made following flow of streams and in a sequential and logical
manner
Data for Equipment, as purchased (including materials of construction, design temperature
and pressures). This includes data from any purchase orders placed by OWNER prior to
Contract award and assigned to CONTRACTOR.
Package diagrams units or skid units’ diagrams, using the same line identification,
symbology, etc. as other P&ID of the plant
Final equipment elevations based on purchased Equipment and CONTRACTOR’s hydraulic
and mechanical design of the JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals.
Verify the information stated on the diagrams links and the coherence among diagrams (line
continuations, etc.)
Dismantling diagrams (issued just to show dismantling works)
Existing diagrams updated without dismantled facilities and including new facilities
Double Block and Bleed Valves (DBB), MOV valves and relief valve sizing.
Final lines sizing in accordance with the requirements of purchased equipment information
and pipe routings.
Any modifications required as a result of final operating and maintenance reviews. This may
include lines for start-up, circulation and line cleaning procedures.
All valves, including process vent and drain valves, final isolation blinds are to be shown.
Hydrostatic vent and drain valves should not be shown.

13.4.8 EQUIPMENT LISTS

Preliminary Equipment lists are provided in the OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION (that
are included in Section 6.6.2 FEED PACKAGE), and are the followings:
- 24020-PAD-M-EL-001-00 Equipment list POCL
- 24020-MEG-M-EL-001-00 Equipment list MPL
- 24020-JAM-M-EL-001-00 Equipment list JOCL
CONTRACTOR shall maintain the Equipment lists, updating them with Vendor data as
Equipment is purchased and information becomes available. The Equipment lists shall
include, but not limited to, basic Equipment dimensions; operation, design and test
conditions; capacity/duty; metallurgy and protective coverings (paint, insulation, liners,
fireproofing and special coatings).

13.4.9 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND DATA SHEETS

The selection criteria of JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals Equipment shall include the
following:

176
 Meets OWNER requirements.
Meets Project Specifications.
Quality of materials and assembly.
Maintainability.
Reliability.
Efficient operation for the process.
Conforms to all Applicable Codes and Laws.
Meets Electrical Area Classification.
The Equipment supplied shall not be limited to the items specified in the Equipment List.
There is auxiliary Equipment and support structure, which is not in the Equipment List, but is
required for the operation and maintenance of the plant. The supply of all Equipment
required to provide a fully functioning and operational plant is the responsibility of
CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR shall verify Equipment elevations, pump hydraulics and driver selections,
and the operating conditions of the Equipment.
Equipment shall provide casing vent and drain and block valves.
Preliminary Equipment data sheets are provided in the OWNER FURNISHED
INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR shall review and confirm the design requirements.
CONTRACTOR shall provide complete data sheets with Vendor information as Equipment is
purchased and additional information is received. CONTRACTOR shall update/revise data
sheets supplied by OWNER as required.

13.4.10 ROTATING EQUIPMENT

Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of the design and project of the
mechanical equipment, for processes and services, following the applicable guidelines, rules
and specifications of these Bidding Terms and Conditions. The documentation to be
prepared by Contractor shall be, at least, the following:
Calculation Notes, datasheet, and technical specifications of Pumps included in unloading
trucks, drain collection drums and ETP packages.
Calculation Notes, datasheet, and technical specifications of packaged units.

13.4.11 EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANTS

The treatment plant included in each of three Terminals shall be designed and built in
accordance with the Technical Specification: 24020-GEN-M-SP-004-00 Effluent Treatment
Plant Specification.
CONTRACTOR shall check and confirm the adequacy of the requirements designs provided
by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall confirm the adequacy of all data included in Data Sheets:
- 24020-PAD-M-DS-003-00 Effluent Treatment Plant Data Sheet. PADMA TERMINAL

177
 - 24020-MEG-M-DS-003-00 Effluent Treatment Plant Data Sheet. MEGHNA
TERMINAL
- 24020-JAM-M-DS-003-00 Effluent Treatment Plant Data Sheet. JAMUNA TERMINAL

13.4.12 PACKAGED EQUIPMENT

All packaged equipment shall be designed, fabricated and supplied in accordance with
Technical Specifications for the specific type of Equipment.

13.4.13 PIPING

Contractor shall be responsible for making the project of the piping works for processes and
services, following the guidelines of the developed FEED, as well as the applicable rules and
specifications.
Contractor shall at least perform the following:
Piping class technical specification.
Special items technical specifications.
Plant drawings and pipe laying cross-sections. The piping layout drawings shall include the
following information:
 North of plant and real North arrows both in piping layout drawing and in the key plant
(in the right margin of the drawing)
 Coordinates of pipe axis or references of distances of pipe axis regarding other pipe
axis or another physical element, such us, rack pillars, equipment center lines, etc.
 Coordinates or references of distances to changes of direction (elbows), connections
of branches, connection of instruments, by-passes, etc.
 Pipes elevations regarding to the floor.
 Identification of the pipe supports and their elevation regarding to the floor.
 Include the numbers of all the lines that enters or exit the drawing at the drawing
limits.
 Coordinates of the drawing limits.
The pipe layout shall include all the pipes, instruments and fittings that are set on the P&IDs,
such us, instrument gauge connections, small diameter branches, by-passes to control
valves, reversible discs, drains, etc.
The lines, instruments and fittings shall follow the arrangement set on the P&ID, such us,
relative position of connection of branches, type of endings, etc.
The number of all the lines that are numbered on the P&IDs and are included on the line list.
Tags of all the instruments, equipment, structural supports, etc.
Changes of insulation, diameter, piping class, number of lines, etc. shall be marked on the
pipe route.

178
 Code of the drawings related to the piping layout, such us, the line list, P&ID drawings, plot
plan, etc.
Booklets of supports, standard, special and elastic, and support location drawings.
Isometric booklets, with their corresponding material list, identification of piping class. Where
applicable, the following shall be indicated: Radiography, heat treatment, corrosion cleaning
and protection.
Isometric for lines for steam trace and lines for jacketed pipes, including the same
information as stated above
Isometrics shall clearly indicate the instrument and related equipment’s TAGs and any other
dimensional information required for construction, as levels, field welding (FW), etc.
Piping flexibility analysis.
Typical plan of traced piping.
Lines List.
Piping and accessory material calculation.
List and execution procedure of Tie Ins, including tie-ins sketches

13.4.14 CIVIL / STRUCTURAL / ARCHITECTURAL

CONTRACTOR shall develop the corresponding Basis of Engineering Calculations and

Drawings.
Foundations and earth Work shall be designed in accordance with the recommendations of
the Geotechnical Report and relevant codes and specifications.
Design calculations for structural steel and reinforced concrete shall be done according with
BNBC code in SI units.
Design drawings shall be presented in SI units.
Contractor shall be responsible for the Project Civil Works, based on the guidelines of the
developed FEED; project specifications; International Standards; current legislation in
Bangladesh; soil conditions and seismic characteristics of the worksite. Contractor shall at
least perform the following:
Topographic Surveys as required for the Detail Engineering Design and Construction of the
facilities.
Complementary Geotechnical studies required for the Detail Engineering Design and
Construction of the facilities.
Technical specification and drawings for site in accordance with the geotechnical
recommendations.
Structures and Buildings engineering and construction included in these Bidding Terms and
Conditions, including calculation notes, general and detailed drawings, steel bending
schedule, insert steel plates, anchor bolts, miscellaneous steel structures, installation
drawings, etc.

179
 Calculation Notes, drawings, bar bending schedules for foundations of rotating and static
equipment, piperack foundations and steel structure.
Calculation Notes, technical specifications and drawings of rain drain systems and
contaminated rain drains.
Calculation Notes, technical specifications, bar bending schedules and foundations for
building structure including brickworking drawings, and auxiliary utility facilities, carpentry,
etc.
General housing development, roads and pavements, general and detailed drawings: roads,
pavements, parking lot and sidewalks.
General project and detailed drawings of fence if required in detail engineering.
Underground Cable Routing trenches, road crossing concrete duct banks for power and
instrument conductors and piping
Calculation Note, general and detailed drawing of steel structures, equipment supports and
shed structures.
Calculation Note, general and detailed drawings of steel structure in platforms for access,
operation and maintenance activities, including stairs, ladders, hand rails, toe plates, etc

13.4.15 PLANT ELEVATIONS AND BENCHMARKS

Established survey control points on the Site shall be shown on drawings and specifications.
CONTRACTOR is responsible for any necessary excavation, trimming, filling, levelling and
re-compaction of fill required for paving, roads, foundations, pier, manhole, pit wall and other
groundwork.

13.4.16 GEOTECHNICAL STUDY

The Geotechnical Study (included in Section 6 Employer Requirement´s, unit 6.6.4

Geotechnical Study), covers investigations carried out for the JOCL, MPL and POCL
Terminals in FEED phase to determine founding conditions and soil profiles.
The CONTRACTOR shall review the Report and determine if necessary, an additional
investigation in order to establish the criteria for:
 Shallow and deep foundation design
 Site preparation, excavation, backfill and dewatering
 Piles
 Equipment foundations
 Roads, parking, final grading and paving
 Chemical attack on buried concrete
Any conclusions drawn from the Geotechnical Study shall be the sole responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for verification of the findings of the
Geotechnical Report and to identify and obtain any further information necessary to complete

180
 the detailed design and the Construction of the JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals facilities in
the scope of work.

13.4.17 SITE PREPARATION

The site preparation required for the civil and structures facilities shall be calculated and
designed during detail engineering by CONTRACTOR.
Previous in an early stage demolition drawing shall be develop by the CONTRACTOR.
All works of demolition, remove or relocation of existing facilities above and underground, to
place the new ones are included in the scope of work of the CONTRACTOR.

13.4.18 DRAINAGE

Contractor has to develop a Technical Specification to define general requirements for

Underground Drainage Systems, what has to be approval by Owner.
Manholes shall be provided at intersections of main drainage lines and every 50 meters or
every two 45º changes of direction for inspection and maintenance purposes.
Manholes shall have a minimum internal plan dimension of 1.0 m x 1.0 m. Where necessary,
gas tight seals and ventilation shall be provided.
Heavy-duty covers shall be used in areas subject to vehicular traffic.
No drainage piping shall be installed under foundations.
Drainage piping shall not be located within a zone of forty-five degree (45) below horizontal
from the extreme edge of soil bearing foundations.
Underground system drawings shall include all the dimensions, elevations, materials,
coordinates and references required for construction.

13.4.19 PILING

CONTRACTOR shall determine the need for and type of piling where analysis shows a
requirement to support loads and/or to restrict displacements. The piles shall be designed
considering loading type, corrosiveness of soil and/or ground water.
Piles may be designed to carry applied loads using both end bearing and friction taking into
account the criteria stated in the Geotechnical Report. A PΔ analysis shall be performed if
vertical piles are required to resist lateral loads. Group effects shall be taken into account
when evaluating pile capacity and settlement. A safety factor to be agreed with OWNER
shall be applied to pile design. The effects of cyclic loading shall be considered where
applicable. Timber piles shall not be used.

13.4.20 TRENCHES

Design of trenching for cables, pipes etc. shall require verification that the proposed routing
is free from underground obstructions or interferences.

181
13.4.21 CONCRETE PAVING OF PROCESS AREAS

The plant Process areas shall be finish paved with concrete.

During construction, timber mats shall be used to spread load for support of cranes and other
heavy equipment.
The minimum slope of paving shall be 1:100.

13.4.22 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS AND STRUCTURES

Reinforced concrete foundations and structures shall be designed using the limit state design
method, or other recognized design codes such as BNBC and the international codes
referenced in the Bangladeshi code.
The design of concrete foundations shall consider appropriate dead load, live load,
Equipment/piping loads, wind load and seismic loads imparted to the foundation. Effects of
dynamic loading and impact shall be considered where appropriate.
The foundations for structures, buildings, pipe racks, and shelters shall be designed either as
spread footings or as piled foundations in accordance with the recommendations of the
Geotechnical Study.
CONTRACTOR shall prevent deterioration of concrete from sulphate and chloride attack by
the selection of the appropriate type of cement and proper mix design, adequate coating and
cover of reinforcement and coating of concrete as per geotechnical study recommendations.

13.4.23 STRUCTURAL DESIGN

Load calculations shall be performed in accordance with the actual use and occupancy loads
applicable to the installations as per codes and standards but shall not be less than specified
in the Technical Specifications.
Live loads shall consist of moveable loads, including personnel, tools, portable machinery,
permanently stored materials for operations and temporarily stored materials during
maintenance. Standard live loads are detailed in the Technical Specifications.
Wind load computations shall be based on the design parameters given in the Technical
Specifications.
Earthquake load shall be defined as the horizontal static forces equivalent to their design-
effect to the dynamic loads created by ground motion during an earthquake. JOCL, MPL and
POCL Terminals structures shall be designed for earthquake in accordance with BNBC.

13.4.24 STRUCTURAL STEEL

Structural steel shall be designed using the appropriate codes, standards and load factors.
The grades of structural steel used shall be compatible with their use and exposure to
ambient conditions.

182
 Pipe racks and pipe supports shall be constructed using either structural steel or reinforced
concrete.
Welding electrodes shall be compatible with the base material.

13.4.25 STEEL STRUCTURES

Galvanized serrated grating shall be used for all platforms and stair treads.
Stairs, ladders, platforms for access for operational maintenance and monitoring duties shall
be provided in accordance with the Technical Specifications.

13.4.26 PAINTING AND COATING

Painting and coating shall be made in accordance with the Technical Specifications of the
Project that Contractor will submit. This specification will have to be approved by Owner
CONTRACTOR shall deliver a dossier specifying the painting scheme, color or coating,
extend on field works and on shop works, etc. to be applied for lines, equipment, structures,
saddles, etc.

13.5 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

Instrumentation and Control system design will be developed by a MAC (Main Automation
Contractor). Contractor will have full responsibility for MAC Contract.
Contractor shall develop MAC Tender documents with all information required by MAC to
develop his activities.
All related procurement activities and contract management will be part of Contractor Scope.
MAC will execute the instrumentation and systems detailed design.
Technical requirements related to Systems, Telecommunications and their integration is
described in Instrument and Control documents included in Section 6, item 6.6.2 FEED.
CONTRACTOR shall supply and install fully functioning instrumentation and control systems
in accordance with this scope of Work. CONTRACTOR´s Work and all Equipment and
materials supplied by CONTRACTOR shall be in complete accordance with the requirements
of the Instrumentation and Control Systems specifications listed in OWNER FURNISHED
INFORMATION (included in Section 6, item 6.6.2 FEED)
CONTRACTOR shall design the PCS (Distributed Control System or DCS), SIS (Emergency
Shutdown System or ESD) and Fire and Gas System for the JOCL, MPL and POCL
Terminals as dictated by standard engineering practices, OWNER and CONTRACTOR
HAZOP reviews and SIL Assignations.
DCS (Distributed Control System), ESD (Emergency Shutdown), Fire and Gas and security
shall be from OWNER designated Suppliers (in accordance with the Accepted Manufacturers
List contained elsewhere herein), with a predefined architecture and components that
CONTRACTOR shall adapt to its final design according to the Technical Specifications set
forth in the OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION

183
Operator interfaces to the control Systems shall be located in the Control Room (CR).
Operator interfaces contained in the Control Room shall be connected to remote control
panels provided by package Equipment Vendors (flowmeters skids, ETP, etc.).
The central component of the Plant integrated control Systems is the Distributed Control
System (DCS). This System provides the operator interface in the Control Room and is
connected to field instruments, control devices and other sub-systems. CONTRACTOR’s
design shall be based upon the information provided in the OWNER FURNISHED
INFORMATION.
CONTRACTOR shall perform all DCS point and loop configurations, programming, graphic
screen development, report development, alarm screen configurations required to provide a
complete functioning control System for the efficient operation of the Plant. All programming
and configuration necessary to incorporate the PES (Programmable Electronic System), and
other PLCs (Programmable Logic Controller), or serial communication devices shall be
supplied by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall completely test and debug all
configurations, programming and graphics. A completely functioning System shall be
demonstrated to OWNER at the Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) and at the Software
Integration Functional Test (SIFT). CONTRACTOR shall develop the procedures for these
tests and shall submit these test procedures to OWNER for approval prior to commencing
the FAT and SIFT.
CONTRACTOR shall perform all PES point configuration and programming required to
provide a complete functioning PES/ESD safety control System for the efficient operation of
the Plant. CONTRACTOR shall completely test and debug all configurations and
programming. A completely functioning System shall be demonstrated to OWNER at the
DCS Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) and at the Software Integration Functional Test (SIFT).
CONTRACTOR shall develop the procedures for PES testing and shall incorporate these
test procedures in the DCS FAT and DCS SIFT.

13.5.1 FIRE AND GAS DETECTION SYSTEM

CONTRACTOR shall supply and install all of the Fire Alarm System and the Gas Detection
System requirements of the Terminals. All required pull stations, horns, strobe lights, smoke
and fire detector/sensors shall be provided by CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR shall purchase the Fire Alarm System and the Gas Detection System from
OWNER designated Suppliers in accordance with the Accepted Manufacturers List
contained elsewhere herein.
CONTRACTOR shall supply and install all necessary wiring for the Fire Alarm System and
the Gas Alarm System within each Terminal boundaries.

13.5.2 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION

CONTRACTOR shall size, select, specify, procure, receive, calibrate, install, and checkout
field instrumentation and associated power and signal cabling, in accordance with this Scope
of Work.

184
13.5.3 FIELD INSTRUMENT ROOMS

If required by design, CONTRACTOR shall design, layout and install field instrument rooms
to house control Systems Equipment and associated power, grounding, and signal cabling.

13.5.4 DRAWINGS AND OTHER DOCUMENTATION

In addition to the requirements of the Project Instructions as relating to drawings and

documentation, CONTRACTOR shall develop all construction drawings and other
documentation required to complete the Plant or for OWNER record purposes as follows:
- Drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:
- Cause and Effect Diagrams/Logic Diagrams/Logic Narratives.
- Loop Diagrams.
- Instrument Location Plans.
- Instrument Installation Details (for electrical, process and pneumatics specific
installations not covered by the Project standard drawings, including tracing details).
- Wiring Schedules (Junction Box, Marshalling Cabinet, DCS (Distributed Control System),
PES (Programmable Electronic System), PLCs (Programmable Logic Controller), Fire
and Gas Detection Systems, Machinery Monitoring Systems, and other Systems).
- Cable Schedules.
- Wiring Philosophy Drawings.
- Network Interconnection Drawings (DCS, PES, Analyzer System, Vibration and
Temperature Monitoring System, Turbine Governor and Compressor Anti-Surge and
Performance Controls, Fire and Gas Detection System and other Systems).
- Relay Cabinet Layout Drawings and Wiring Diagrams.
- Local Panel Layout Drawings and Wiring Diagrams.
- Special System Block Diagrams/Architecture Drawings (Analyzer System, Vibration and
Temperature Monitoring System, Turbine Governor and Compressor Anti-Surge and
Performance Controls, Fire and Gas Detection System, Security/ Surveillance Systems
and other Systems).
- Fire Fighting Data Sheets
- Fire Fighting P&ID
- Fire Fighting Layout (Water Spraying Systems, Foam System, F&G Systems, Gas
Extinguishing Systems)
- Fire Fighting Line List
- Fire Fighting Cause/Effect Matrix
- Fire Fighting Control Architecture

185
- As-Built Layout & Documentations
All formats for the aforementioned documentation shall be presented to OWNER for approval
within one (1) month from Effective Date of Contract.
Documentation shall include but not be limited to the following:
- I.S.A. Instrument Data Sheets.
- Narrative Logic Descriptions.
- Control Narratives.
- Complex Loop Descriptions.
- Instrument Index (Design and Engineering).
- SIL documentation (SIL Assignation, SIL Verification, SRS document, Operation and
Maintenance Manuals, etc.) and Plant Safety Inspection.
The format for above documentation shall be in accordance with OWNER’s approved
standard format.
While integrating the control & safety Systems, JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals contractor
shall take into account all safety related systems, whether they are located within boundaries
of the Terminals. All those safety related elements shall be shown in the Shutdown Matrix
(Cause & Effect Matrix) and its logic represented in Logic Diagrams to be implemented in
Control & Safety System. JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals contractor shall be responsible of
acquiring all information needed to accomplish this task, especially that from existing and
operating installations.

13.5.5 CALCULATIONS

CONTRACTOR shall perform calculations that are applicable to instrumentation and control
Systems for the JOCL, MPL and POCL Terminals. Calculations shall be performed in order
to provide a safe and adequate installation and to verify final sizing/selection of Equipment
and materials. Calculations shall include, but not be limited to the following:
- On/Off Control Valve Sizing.
- Relief Valve Sizing – All cases shall be examined.
- Flow Element Sizing.
- Flow measuring skid pressure drop calculation.
- Tank Level Sketches (identifying transmitter range, zero suppression/elevation, and
alarm setting/trip point calculations).
- Voltage Drop Calculations (i.e., digital outputs to solenoids).
- Power Supply Coordination (for supply to and distribution within control Systems
Equipment).
- Sound Level Calculations for control Systems Equipment.
- Thermowell Vibration (frequency) Calculations.

186
- Intrinsically safe circuits calculation.
- SIL Verification calculations for every SIF.
- Fire Fighting Systems Calculations

13.6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

The extent of the electrical System and the general approach and basis for the electrical
design, equipment, materials and installation are described in the FEED books, included in
the OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION.
Contractor is responsible for making the design and project of electrical installations and
equipment, following the guidelines of FEED engineering, applicable rules and specifications,
as per these Bidding Terms and Conditions. Contractor shall prepare, at least, the following
documentation:
- Single-line, three-line and functional diagrams of all electric equipment and switchboards
(general and particular).
- Technical Specifications, datasheet and material requirement for the purchase of the
following equipment, at a minimum:
- Variable Speed Drivers if apply
- UPS, battery back-ups
- Power transformers if apply
- Boards and MCCs of LV
- Auxiliary services boards
- Electric motors
- LV automatic transfer,
- Protective device,
- Surge arresters
- Lay Out drawings of electrical equipment to be installed in the plant area.
- Detailed studies of load flow for the different operational conditions of the plant, short
circuit, motor start-up, harmonic and inter-harmonics studies if apply, grounding grid
calculation, protection selectivity studies, lightning protection study.
- Electric routing plots (general and detailed).
- Booklet of standard Grounding assembly, lighting, drive power and command, mains,
etc.
- Design of the systems of general, road and localized lighting; calculation notes, technical
specifications, lay-out plots of lights, electric routings, for the new plant and the new
buildings (electrical and control rooms).
- Calculation Note of the Power Cables and control.

187
- Designs of boards and equipment wiring, and terminals booklet.
- Hazardous Area Classification drawings
- List of equipment and power consumption. Dimensional verification of boards and
equipment based on the actual consumptions of all loads and of the plant’s auxiliary
utilities.
- Calculation Notes and installation drawings of grounding systems and atmospheric
protection.
- Layout of installation and electric routing of the Process, Electrical and Control buildings,
as well as of the LV electric boards and Control System.
- Electric routing drawings of the plant drive force and command with dimensional detail of
piping, trays and conduits in each area.
- Calculation Sheet of Electrical Material: Electric wires, Illumination, drive force and
command, grounding, atmospheric discharge protection, accessories necessary for
facilities.
- Material requirement for the purchase of electric materials: Wires, lighting, drive force
and command, grounding, cathodic protection, general materials for electric mains.
- Technical specifications and assembly procedures, pre-commissioning and
commissioning of electrical installations.

13.6.1 POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION/ METERING/ CONTROL/ ALARM AND

MONITORING

CONTRACTOR shall refer to the Technical Specification contained in the FEED books.
The Power System of the three Terminals shall include protection devices which
continuously detect and monitor System quantities such as frequency, current, voltage,
power and energy. The devices employed shall be of the electronic type, employing the best
available technology to provide the most effective and quickest separation (interruption
action) and isolation of the required parts of the Power System, upon the monitored
quantities being above or below the respective protection device settings. The protection
devices shall be also used to provide alarm level status prior to reaching the interruption level
for a particular Power System quantity.
The Power System of the Terminals shall provide all necessary power and energy metering
Systems required for continuous monitoring.
The detailed descriptions of the specific configurations, device function and operation logic
requirements for the Power System protection, metering, control, alarm and monitoring shall
be finalized by CONTRACTOR.

188
13.6.2 ENGINEERING DESIGN CALCULATIONS

The engineering and design calculations and their basic references and assumptions shall
be recorded and maintained for review and/or approval by OWNER during the lifetime of the
CONTRACT.
At least, the following calculations shall be performed:
- Load flow for the different operational conditions of the plant
- Short circuit
- Motor start-up
- Re-acceleration calculations
- Harmonic and inter-harmonics penetration studies
- UPS sizing calculations
- Grounding grid
All engineering and design drawings, data sheets and applicable calculations supplied by
electrical Equipment and Systems manufacturing companies shall be recorded and
maintained for review and/or approval by OWNER at any time during the lifetime of the
overall Project.
All electrical and associated Systems and electrical Equipment supplied shall be engineered
and designed based on and in accordance with all of the respective and applicable Electrical
Philosophy and Technical Specifications contained in the FEED books included in the
OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION, criteria, drawings, standards, codes, and regulations.
The use of any proposed deviation from these requirements must be pre-approved by the
OWNER in writing.

13.6.3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS CODES, STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTATION

CONTRACTOR’s scope of Work includes the preparation of all types of documentation in

accordance with the Electrical Philosophy and the FEED books included in the OWNER
FURNISHED INFORMATION.

13.6.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ASSEMBLY STANDARDS

The electrical installation assembly standards to be utilized shall be provided by the

CONTRACTOR. These standards shall cover material assembly details for motor/control
stations; grounding; lighting; cable/tray; underground cable (direct burial, duck bank, conduit,
trench); aboveground conduit and all other required miscellaneous installation assembly
details.
Each individual installation assembly detail provided by the CONTRACTOR shall contain a
detailed assembly elevation diagram containing item number/code call outs and an item bill
of materials list which gives the item description, size, rating, etc. and the quantity.

189
A complete set of electrical installation assembly standard drawings shall be submitted for
review and approval by OWNER.

13.6.5 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT NUMBERING SYSTEM

Within the first (1) month after CONTRACT award, CONTRACTOR shall prepare a
numbering and tagging system for OWNER approval. This will be completed for all
equipment, line numbers, instruments, wiring and all electrical systems that have a
numbering system.

13.7 DELIVERABLES TYPICAL LIST

During tender process, bidders shall submit a typical deliverable list, including at least the
following:
- Technical description, including the scope of supply, list of standards, list of tests to be
performed, list of documents, drawings and a list of studies to be performed during
detailed engineering phase.
- List of deviation/exception to the Project Technical Specification
- List of electrical, mechanical, Instrumentation and control equipment showing the
identification of the all project equipment and its location on the layout drawings.
- Preliminary Technical data sheets of the main electrical equipment, loading arms, control
system, level gauge and inventory system, electrical actuator for motor operated valves
(MOV), flow metering skids, Effluent Treatment plant (ETP) and weight bridge.
- Terminal points scheme showing the limit of supply.
Bidders shall submit a complete deliverable list, for the development of the Detail
Engineering
Although during the progress of the engineering work, CONTRACTOR will develop a large
quantity of documents, only some of them are to be sent to OWNER for approval.
During tender process, bidders shall submit a typical deliverable list based on the List of EPC
Deliverables provided in Section 4 Particular Conditions of Contract, Appendix 7 List of
documents for approval or review. In the mentioned list, there have been described many of
the different activities which must be performed by CONTRACTOR to develop the Project
and the required deliverables to be sent to OWNER.
It is understood that the deliverables shall be sent to OWNER every time they are formally
issued within the CONTRACTOR organization, unless otherwise specified.
However, should the OWNER wish to perform any check on any of the activities that do not
yield a deliverable, the CONTRACTOR will give on request to OWNER any other document
that may be asked for, with no extra charge to OWNER.
When a material requisitions and specifications are asked to be sent to OWNER as a
deliverable, CONTRACTOR will handle every issue of these documents, even including the

190
‘as-built’ requisitions (which will take into account every modification or addition to the initial
scope of supply, even performed at site by erection, pre-commissioning or commissioning
purposes). Requisitions sent to OWNER will attach the related data sheets, completed as
much as possible for the current degree of equipment definition).
In case that, after receiving comments to any of the deliverables, CONTRACTOR does not
agree with them, he shall return to OWNER the answer in 5 labour days. Otherwise,
CONTRACTOR shall be understood to fully include the mentioned comments.

191
14 PROCUREMENT ACTIVITIES

14.1 MATERIALS SUPPLY, LOADING, SHIPPING AND UNLOADING.

The EPC contractors will assume full responsibility for the procurement of material and
equipment, including bulk material, fabrication, testing and delivery of their scope of work.
Owner has considered as Long Lead Items the following:
- Control System
- MOV valves
- Level gauges and Inventory System for tanks
- Loading arms
- Metering skid

As an integral part of the Project Execution Plan, the Contractor shall submit a Supply Plan
indicating the guidelines to be followed as regards:
- Organization and staff in charge of supplies management.
- Logistics and supplies procedures.
- Supply sources.
- Expediting.
- Vendors’ Quality control.
- Packing, insurance and freights.
- Foreign Trade
- Materials Control.
- Progress measurement and reports
Contractor shall include in all its sub-contracts and equipment purchasing contracts the
clauses as per Sections 3 and 4 of the Contract.

14.2 PROCUREMENT MANAGEMENT

In order to carry out the Project in accordance with the scope of the works, Contractor shall
purchase, inspect, insure, transport and expedite every equipment and material that may be
required to accomplish the proper execution of the works.
Therefore, Contractor shall issue in his name the Purchase Orders, Contracts, Letters of
Intent and other commercial documentation that may be required for the procurement
management.
Contractor shall pay any required license related to the goods

192
Contractor shall supply consumables for the facilities Construction, Commissioning and
Start-up stages.
The supply of spare parts for the Commissioning and Start-up stages shall be performed
pursuant to the recommendations of the equipment manufacturers.
Likewise, the Contractor shall make available to OWNER the quotes of the spare parts
recommended by the equipment manufacturers for two years of operation.
The supply of services, equipment, tools, materials and consumables shall be carried out in
accordance with the Project applicable codes and regulations, blueprints, data sheets,
technical specifications and standards.
Contractor shall efficiently and professionally perform the management of Supplies ensuring
the compliance with the time limits provided for in the purchase orders and, consequently,
the time limits established in the Project General Schedule.
In order to accomplish said purpose, Contractor shall carry out the follow-up of the different
stages of Engineering Development; supply; manufacture; tests; packaging; dispatch, etc.
relevant to the suppliers of equipment and materials.
Contractor shall appoint the staff responsible for the integral management of supplies in
order to ensure that the purchased items are manufactured, tested, packaged, insured,
handled, shipped, and maintained in accordance with the applicable technical and
commercial documentation.
The person in charge of the Contractor Supplies shall coordinate the tasks of the personnel
responsible for engineering, purchase, legal affairs, management, quality control, foreign
trade and manufactures so that the supplies are timely carried out pursuant to the Project
requirements.
OWNER may, at its own discretion, witness tests of materials and equipment in the facilities
of the Contractor’s vendors. For such purpose, Contractor shall notify the representative of
OWNER thirty (30) days prior to the date of the test so that OWNER can arrange for its
representatives to attend the tests/inspections.
Contractor shall gather the documentation of material certification and keep record of it in
furtherance of performing the tracking of the material to be incorporated in the Project.
The delivery of the quality files or “Data Books” shall be a part of the supply of each material
and/or equipment vendor.
By means of its Engineering, the Contractor shall be liable for calculating the materials to be
purchased and the determination of the surplus, which shall be added to the purchase
requirements as a reserve for use, waste, replacement due to breakage, loss or the like.
Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, storing, protecting and watching the equipment
and materials that may be incorporated to the work until the Facilities Provisional
Acceptance.
Contractor shall solely be responsible for performing the complaints to his suppliers upon any
incompliance, to the Insurance Companies upon breakage or losses. Contractor shall also
request the enforcement of the applicable guarantees.

193
Contractor shall hire at its own expense the specialized services for technical assistance
during the stages of Assembly, Pre-commissioning, Commissioning and Start-up in
accordance with the recommendations of equipment manufacturers and vendors.
In case of importation of goods and equipment in application of the suspension of custom
duties’ special regimes for temporary import, CONTRACTOR will assume all costs and
liabilities derived from the application of said regimes including guarantee costs required for
such application. In addition, CONTRACTOR will be entitled to reimbursement of all taxes
applicable, except for import VAT, solely in case that, because of a decision of the OWNER
the import regime is changed from temporary import to definitive import (consumption). This
reimbursement will not apply if the change of customs regime is made due to negligent or
default by CONTRACTOR or SUB-CONTRACTORS on the accomplishment of the
conditions of the regime applied, including non re-export or change of regime in the delays
legally established. No reimbursement to CONTRACTOR will apply as well for any penalty
arising from the application of suspension customs regimes and derived from default or
negligence of CONTRACTOR or SUB-CONTRACTOR.
For the ITEMS pre-purchased by OWNER, once the contract is awarded, all pending
procurement activities described above will be part of contractor scope.

14.3 MATERIALS INSPECTIONS

Materials shall be immediately inspected upon their arrival at the site and their compliance
with the documents of the Project. The materials shall be identified so that they may be
individualized at all times in order to allow their traceability and their compliance with the
relevant quality certificates.
Pipes shall be identified in accordance with the API Standard, ASME A-106 Gr.B and it shall
be verified on site that their characteristics comply with the Engineering documentation and
standards.
CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the piping Vendors list supplied by OWNER. In case
CONTRACTOR proposes to supply piping material from a Manufacturer which is not
included in the OWNER´s Vendor list, this Manufacturer must be certified with API 5L/ASME
A-106 and must be approved by OWNER.
Likewise, flanges, valves, connections, welds, nuts, bolts, hoses, tees, elbows, quick-closing
couplings and electrodes, among others, shall be identified in order to allow their traceability
and their compliance with quality certificates.

194
15 CONSTRUCTION

The EPC contractors will assume fully responsibility for the erection, installation, testing, and
mechanical completion of their scope of work.

15.1 ENVIRONMENTAL, SAFETY, AND HEALTH

Achieving and sustaining zero accidents as well as overall Environmental, Safety, and Health
(ES&H) excellent are key project objectives and important to OWNER and Partners values.
The Contractor shall be preparing a detailed ES&H Execution Plan for the project. The ES&H
Plan shall be address the different safety aspects of the work area.
The CONTRACTOR shall be establishing arrangements for first aid and medical facilities to
provide medical services for all personnel at jobsite. The emergency responded team will
normally be available.
All employees will attend the basic orientation plus ES&H.
The CONTRACTOR shall comply fully with all the requirements of Section 3 General
Conditions of Contract, Item A.15 Safety, Security and Protection of the Environment.

15.2 CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES

The Temporary Facilities on site necessary to ease the Construction and Assembly tasks
shall be entirely defined in a project developed for such purpose. Its main objective shall be
to timely make the facilities available so that the works may be duly carried out.
The temporary facilities shall be determined including, among others, the following:
- Main tool room and secondary tool rooms within the work area.
- Warehouses, closed and open, by specialty.
- Offices / Rooms
- First Aid Room / Ambulance service.
- Surveillance facilities.
- Fencing to limit the areas of tool rooms / Camp site / Works.
- Camp site / Dining room / Equipment.
- Office equipment.
- Smoking areas.
- IT and communication network.
- Waste Recollection / Classification / Disposal.
- Areas to park work equipment and heavy means of transport.
- Areas to park vehicles for personnel transportation.
- Fire protection facilities.
- Definition and division of the Pedestrian and Vehicular Circulation.

195
- Temporary facilities drainage management.
- Personnel Identification System.
- Signs.
- Disinfection Plan and Fumigation Schedule.
- Electric Power Generation.
- Drinking Water Supply.
- Specific and General Lighting.
- Designation of specific sites for flammable materials storage.
- Contingency Plan.
- Portable toilets
The following matters shall be clearly defined in the Temporary Facilities Project Plan:
- What is required?
- When is it required?
- Who performs the task?
- Who is responsible for timely achieving the objective?
- What labor and transportation and lifting equipment are required in order to build the
Temporary Facilities?
- Performance and follow-up of a schedule with a completion date for the facilities
compatible with the commencement date for the works on site.
- The construction features for the different buildings, such as bearing structures; fixed or
prefabricated.
- The different storage areas for: equipment; pipelines prefabrication; flammable materials
areas; strategic areas to locate the elements for fire extinction.
- The roads for internal circulation of vehicles and pedestrians; parking for light and heavy
vehicles, cranes, ambulances, etc.
- The stages for supply and assembly of the different pieces of the temporary facilities
components.
- General and detailed plans comprising every facility and auxiliary service, complemented
by a technical report, the description and estimate of buildings, furniture, office
equipment; the estimate of materials and the list of the permanent personnel for cleaning
and maintenance services.
By means of a wire fence, CONTRACTOR shall isolate the work areas from the operating
facilities in order to monitor the movement and entrance of the construction personnel to the
production area. Such measure is aimed at avoiding that the construction activities have an
adverse effect on the safety standards of the operation. This may be accomplished by
establishing monitored pedestrian and vehicular lines complemented by a differential system
of work permits for both areas so delimited.

196
15.3 INSPECTION

OWNER shall perform the Work Technical Inspection through its own staff or through
designated third parties, hired for such purpose.
Communications between the Inspection and CONTRACTOR shall be in written and
according to the procedures established in the OWNER’s Rules. Notwithstanding the
aforesaid, CONTRACTOR or his authorized representatives shall be in permanent contact
with the Inspection.

15.4 CONTRACTOR TEAM

- CONTRACTOR shall have Quality Inspectors Team available at work, which shall be
responsible for the compliance with the Inspection Plan.
- CONTRACTOR shall have Support Technical Staff available at work (Engineering
Office) for supporting the Construction and Assembly activities.
- CONTRACTOR shall have Planning and Management Control Staff available at work.

197
16 MECHANICAL COMPLETION, PRE-COMMISSIONING, COMMISSIONING & START
UP

16.1 GENERAL

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the Mechanical Completion, pre-commissioning,

commissioning and start-up assistance of all new equipment and modifications within the
work.
CONTRACTOR shall propose registers and procedures formats and submit to OWNER for
approval. Following acceptance, these will be used to record all inspections, checks and
tests for Mechanical Completion, pre-commissioning and Commissioning of the plant.
Pre-commissioning and Commissioning shall be organized by sub-systems according to the
sequence agreed with the OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for selecting and mobilizing an experienced team of
specialists and vendors where applicable, who will be familiar with the roles and
responsibilities and other requirements associated with each step of the Mechanical
Completion, pre-commissioning and commissioning and production start-up sequence(s).
Organization of personnel and staffing of key positions shall be agreed with and approved by
the OWNER.
Contractor Construction Manager is responsible for the Mechanical Completion of the scope
of work.
Contractor Commissioning Manager is responsible for the Commissioning completion of the
scope of work. In addition the responsibilities include control of the Mechanical Completion
and Commissioning databases.
OWNER will be responsible for carrying out the Production Start-Up of the terminals with the
assistance of the Contractor’s Commissioning team and Vendors when necessary.
Performance guarantee tests shall be carried out by a joint team between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR will be responsible for the development of all the procedures for Pre-
Commissioning, Commissioning, Start-Up and Performance tests.

16.2 DEFINITIONS

16.2.1 SYSTEM

Major subdivision of an installation, being either process or utility, which performs a major
operational function of the each terminal. The system includes all the various equipment that
allows it to operate.

198
16.2.2 SUBSYSTEM

Subdivision of a system that performs a partial operational function to the system, with no or
little interference from the other subsystems. Several equipment with the same function in
the system, main packages are typical examples of subsystems.

16.2.3 SYSTEM PACKAGE

A collection of documents that pertains specifically to an identified system, the review of

which will verify that the system is Mechanically Complete and is Ready for Commissioning.
Civil Work packages (concrete, grouting, paving, and structural steel), shall be prepared and
maintained by geographic area within each Terminal.

16.2.4 SYSTEM PRE-COMMISSIONING

System pre-commissioning activities include the non-operating checks, inspections, testing,

cleaning, flushing, blowing, drying, adjusting, cold aligning, etc. of equipment, piping,
instrumentation, and electrical to bring the system to Mechanical Completion and the state of
being Ready for Commissioning.

16.2.5 FUNCTIONAL TESTS

Functional Tests shall be carried out on all Equipment comprising the Terminals as required
by CONTRACTOR and shall include verification of all technical requirements set out in the
Technical Specifications.
Functional tests include live tests performed on each instrument, telecommunication, and
electrical elementary function (loop testing for example).

16.3 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PHASES OF COMPLETION

The phases of completion for each Terminal involve the steps defined under Section above.
The purpose of these activities is to confirm that every piece of equipment in each Terminal
operates per the design. The goal of these verifications is to introduce feed to the Start Date
System and the Plant in a safe and trouble free manner, and to establish routine production
status in the shortest possible time.
The work associated with Mechanical Completion, Pre-Commissioning and Commissioning
can be divided into three phases as follows.
- Phase 1: Preparatory work.
- Phase 2: Mechanical Completion/ Pre-commissioning.
- Phase 3: Commissioning and Production Start-up.
Whilst the phases may overlap across the facilities as a whole, they will be sequential for
each system or sub-system.
Subsystems shall be Ready for Commissioning (RFC) when all Pre-commissioning activities
are completed.

199
Subsystems shall be Ready for Start –up (RFSU) when all Commissioning activities are
completed.
Systems or group of Subsystems shall be Ready for Operation (RFO) when all Start –up.
completed.

FIGURE 11- RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PHASES

Source: TR

16.4 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION, SEQUENCING AND TRACKING

16.4.1 DEVELOPMENT OF SYSTEM PACKAGES

CONTRACTOR shall implement a careful planning of activities, including the definition of the
system packages, to achieve the successful Mechanical Completion and Commissioning of
the facilities.
CONTRACTOR shall make detailed preparations to ensure that work will proceed
expeditiously and safely and that all schedule and milestone dates shall be met.
CONTRACTOR is responsible to develop the System Packages for approval. Development
of the packages shall begin early in the Detailed Engineering phase and shall continue to be
refined throughout Engineering and Construction.
The principle steps to be executed are as follows:
- System Identification and System Sequencing for orderly Terminals Start-up.

200
- Definition of Subsystems.
- Definition of temporary facilities to enable equipment commissioning.
- P&IDs and Electrical One-line Diagrams marked-up to identify each System.
- Inclusion of Engineering Data; equipment data sheets, instrument data sheets, electrical
one lines, plot plans, loop diagrams, process narratives, etc.
- System Completion Priorities and Scheduling, covering Mechanical Completion and
Commissioning
- Identification and Preparation of System Packages.
- Progress Tracking.
- Sign-off of System Packages.

16.4.2 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND SEQUENCING

To permit progressive Mechanical Completion and Commissioning, and to control and

manage the process, the Terminals will be divided into discrete Systems taking into account
the phases of construction in truck/barrel loading bays, level gauge and inventory tank
system, flowmeter skid, ETP, etc.
All equipment, cabling, piping, instrumentation, etc. contained within a defined physical limit
will be allocated to a particular system. A system will be defined by utilizing a code number
and will be graphically represented by showing the limits of the system on relevant P&IDs.
Systems may be sub-divided into sub-systems to facilitate Mechanical completion and
Commissioning of part systems, which may benefit the schedule for completion.
CONTRACTOR shall establish and submit to OWNER for approval a detailed
system/subsystems initial start-up sequence in accordance with the main Start-up milestones
or guidelines.
This activity shall be led in parallel with the partition of the installation into systems/
subsystems, as the partition shall be devised so that it matches the requirements of the start-
up sequence: equipment due to start at different points in time of the initial start-up sequence
(typical: duty and stand-by equipment) must not be part of the same subsystem.

16.4.3 DEFINITION OF SUBSYSTEMS

A subsystem is a further subdivision of a system that performs a given operational function,

with no little interference from the other subsystems for the commissioning execution.
The Pre-commissioning and Commissioning operations, shall be prepared, carried out, and
reported by subsystem.
The subsystems shall be defined so as to be independent as possible, not too small, yet to
manageable size.

201
The list of subsystems shall be established so that it is compatible with the requirements of
the terminals initial start-up sequence: equipment or parts of the each terminal, started-up at
different steps of the start-up sequence shall not belong to the same subsystem.
CONTRACTOR shall define the limits and contents of each subsystem.
CONTRACTOR shall define the limits and contents of each subsystem by marking-up on
Engineering and Vendor’s PIDs and Single Line Diagrams all lines, vessels, mechanical
equipment, electrical feeders, bus bars, belonging to that subsystem.
A system of colour coding shall be used to differentiate several subsystems appearing on the
same document, PID or Single Line Diagram.
CONTRACTOR shall issue for approval a set of marked-up drawings showing the
subsystems definition.
The subsystems definition will not require up-dating on every later issue of PID's and Single
Line Diagrams, unless addition of major lines or equipment has taken place. However, a
revision of the subsystems marked-up drawings will be issued on "Approved for
Construction" documents and on the best available revision at start of physical
commissioning works.

16.4.4 ENGINEERING DRAWINGS MARK UPS

During the same time frame as the subsystems are defined, Engineering Drawings shall be
marked-up to designate to which System/subsystem components belong. These drawings
would include all P&IDs and Electrical single line Diagrams, System Numbers on
electrical/instrument loops, Piping Isometrics, underground drawings. Upon completion, the
mark-ups shall be transmitted to the OWNER for their review and approval.
Contractor shall be responsible for generating the “As Built” drawings in a new revision-issue.

16.4.5 ENGINEERING DRAWING DATA

The CONTRACTOR shall add the appropriate system designator to each component, in its
respective database file or index, after the marked-up drawings are received. This will assist
the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR's downstream construction operations in making
System sorts for scheduling, progressing, and expediting purposes
As a minimum, the Pre-commissioning/Commissioning shall gather and file the following
documentation, which will be required for the proper preparation of registers, status indexes
and execution of tests, as follows but not limited to:
- Subsystems drawings and equipment lists
- Sets of PID's and PFD's
- Lines list and associated isometrics
- Layout and general arrangement drawings
- Piping specification
- Operating manual

202
- Equipment data sheets
- Instrument data sheets, Instrument index and loop diagrams
- Logic diagrams
- F&G/ESD (Emergency Shutdown), matrixes
- Process control configuration
- F&G layout
- Electrical distribution one line diagrams
- Switchboards one line diagrams
- Cables list
- Electrical selectivity study
- Power balance
- Electrical Load List and Load Balance
- Wiring diagrams
- Lighting layout
- Vendors manuals (installation, Pre-commissioning, Commissioning, operation,
maintenance)
- Lubrication schedule
- Spare parts list
- Special tools list
- Main equipment calls for tenders.
- Hydro test P&IDs
- Chemical cleaning/flushing P&IDs

16.5 SYSTEM COMPLETION SCHEDULING

The CONTRACTOR shall develop a System Completion Schedule that shall detail the
sequencing and the earliest date that all of the Systems are required for check out, start-up
and initial operation. This schedule shall be transmitted to the OWNER. The schedule shall
be based on sequencing previously outlined and shall be reviewed and agreed upon by all
parties.
Due to the complexity of the Terminals, OWNER reserves the right to make reasonable
changes to the commissioning sequence at no additional cost to the OWNER.
Pre-commissioning and Commissioning schedule shall be carried out in detail
(resource/duration to be evaluated) and shall be checked with Construction. CONTRACTOR
shall demonstrate that the Construction schedule and plan will deliver in due time required
systems.

203
CONTRACTOR shall develop a Commissioning Strategy Document and Execution Plan
setting out the approach and methodology that will be adopted to cover the inspecting,
testing, proving and all other requirements necessary to commission the Terminal. This will
ensure that fully tested systems with all the necessary approvals will be handed over in
accordance with the schedule.

16.6 SYSTEM PACKAGE IDENTIFICATION AND PREPARATION

CONTRACTOR shall compile registers to be used for the purpose of recording satisfactory
inspection and tests for individual components, equipment, units and systems to prove
Mechanical Completion and Commissioning including functional tests. For each system, a
set of specific registers shall be complied.
Registers to be used shall be submitted for OWNER approval.
CONTRACTOR shall prepare hydrotest & leak test packages indicating test limits, test
pressure, test P&ID’s, isometrics and any other documentation required to control the testing
safe and organized manner.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that Commissioning procedures are prepared for each system
to define Pre-commissioning, Commissioning and livening up activities, and provide detailed
commissioning instructions. CONTRACTOR shall submit for OWNER approval the typical
format and content of the procedures.
System packages shall contain the following:
- System Description in narrative format.
- System Mechanical Completion List.
- Subcontractor's Certificates of Mechanical Completion.
- Mark-ups of Plot Plans, P&IDs, Electrical single line diagrams, piping drawings and any
other drawings that may be useful in defining the system boundaries.
- "System Summary Status Report" - Developed by the CONTRACTOR to indicate the
overall status of the system (e.g. total hydro tests required vs. quantity complete vs.
quantity restored; total loop checks required vs. loop checks complete, total chemical
cleaning/flushing completed against planned, etc.).
- A Piping and Mechanical Equipment section containing the following:
 "Piping Line List"
 "Hydrostatic (and/or Pneumatic) Test Checklist". - A spreadsheet showing the status
of all System hydro tests and pneumatic tests (e.g. construction complete, hydro test
complete, punch lists prepared, restoration complete, punch list complete, etc.).
 "Cleaning, flushing, drying". - A spreadsheet showing the different cleaning loops and
the various stages and status of line/equipment cleaning/flushing until final
completion.
 "Equipment List" - A listing of all Equipment included in the System with Equipment
number, description and referenced Purchase Order number.

204
  "Equipment Installation Checklist" - A spreadsheet showing the various stages of
Equipment installation from setting to sign-off.
 "Misc. Equipment Checklist" - A spreadsheet showing the status of miscellaneous
mechanical components (e.g. PSVs, TSVs, Orifice plates, gate valves, ball valves,
globe valves, check valves, etc.).
 "Material Certificate of Compliance Checklist" - A spreadsheet confirming status of
material certificates per Technical Specifications.
- An Instrumentation section containing the following:
 "Instrument Index" - A listing of instruments contained in the System, extracted from
the Contract Instrument Index.
 "Instrument Turnover Summary Sheet" - A spreadsheet showing the status of all
instruments from receipt through final loop functional checkout.
- An Electrical section containing the following:
"Electrical Index" - A listing of all major Systems electrical components.
"Electrical Turnover Summary Sheet" - A spreadsheet showing the status of all electrical
components contained in the System (e.g. motors, CCs, switchgear, motor starters, conduit
and cable tray, power panels, lighting, receptacles, etc.).
- Special Instructions or Procedures including specific safety instruction or lockout
procedures that are required.
- Vendor information and warranties, including Vendor manuals, equipment/facilities
operating and maintenance manuals, as-built specifications, and recommended safety
procedures.
- Blind List.
- A listing of all keys, special tools, jigs and templates to be turned over with the System.
- Spare Parts Lists along with copies of documentation recording the transfer of the spare
parts to OWNER.
- Management of Change Log.
- A listing of all Exception Items (if any) that are yet to be completed.
Occupancy permits shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR as part of the turnover package
for each building.
These System turnover packages should be used by CONTRACTOR's personnel on a daily
basis to document and track the completion of various construction, inspection, or
mechanical completion activities in order to be able to quickly determine the completion
status of any given package.

16.7 SYSTEM PACKAGE PROGRESSING

The progress and follow up methodology shall be defined with the OWNER and according to
project specification. Progress shall be calculated by meaning of the number of activities or
sheets remaining/complete.

205
It shall be issued to OWNER for approval a detailed pre-commissioning/ commissioning
progress/ status calculation procedure. Progress reports shall be by subsystem or by group
of activities (if presented by discipline).
CONTRACTOR shall develop a Mechanical Completion and Commissioning Status Index.
CONTRACTOR shall develop and establish a Mechanical Completion status index for each
system, against which progress can be tracked, measured and reported. A status index is a
register listing all Mechanical Completion and Commissioning records due to be completed.
CONTRACTOR personnel shall maintain a status of the progress on the completion of
package activities starting 3 months prior to commencement of commissioning activities.
CONTRACTOR personnel shall report to OWNER on the progress of System package
completion as required by the OWNER. The frequency of this reporting shall be no less than
monthly nor more frequent than daily near the end of the Contract. Reports shall be in an
agreed upon format in either tabular or graphical formats, or both.

16.8 CONTRACT MASTER PUNCH LIST

16.8.1 SYSTEM PUNCH LIST

While the Pre-commissioning, Commissioning and Start-up activities have being performed,
all discrepancies shall be recorded in the Punch List. Punch List is established for each sub-
system or equipment belonging to the sub-system.
A point is considered to be included in the Punch List if any discrepancies, damaged or
missing equipment, malfunction, missing document or any deviation from the design
drawings and specification exist, and any items that are not in conformance with the Contract
and construction documents or that require modification
Points shall be classified in three different level priorities and shall only be included on the list
when agreed with the OWNER:
- Priority “A”: Item considered as a block point for Commissioning activity of the sub-
system.
- Priority “B”: Item considered as a block point for Start-up activity of the sub-system.
- Priority “C”: Item not considered as a block point for Start-Up activity but linked to any
contractual milestone (for example Partial Acceptance, Hand-Over).

16.8.2 PREPARATION OF PUNCH LISTS

The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and maintain these Punch lists and shall issue the Punch
lists to OWNER on a regular basis.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure, where applicable, that punch lists items identify a tag number.
These lists shall be updated during the Completion activities, so as to have a precise status
of each subsystem at the Ready for Commissioning and Ready for Start-Up status.
Each Punch list item shall contain at least the following information:
- Subsystem and Equipment identification number.

206
- Discipline activity.
- Priority level.
- Defect description, corrective action to be done and action by.
- Materiel required/assistance required.
- Schedule.

16.8.3 REVIEW OF PUNCH LISTS

On a regular basis and as CONTRACTOR completes the Punch list items, CONTRACTOR
shall sign off and advise OWNER so that the Punch list item can be checked to verify that the
Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract.
The CONTRACTOR shall issue updates of the Punch list items remaining open on a weekly
basis, or more frequently if required.
Particular attention shall be paid by the Contractor to integrate in its organization the correct
level of resource in order to manage the Punch List (record, follow-up, feed-back process to
the Engineering, remedial action, etc.).
CONTRACTOR shall ensure all punch list items cleared are signed off and offered to
OWNER for countersignature.
Items may only be removed from the list by OWNER.

16.9 MECHANICAL COMPLETION

Mechanical Completion of a system or sub-system is the point at which all construction

activities are complete prior to the start of Pre-commissioning activities signified by the
completion of all relevant and appropriate inspection check records by the CONTRACTOR
and acceptance by OWNER.
All deficiencies, if any, shall be identified on a Punch list with the declaration of Mechanical
Completion.
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the involvement of the appropriate regulatory
authorities is maintained throughout and that their requirements are satisfied, including
possible third party inspections and the witnessing of certain tests.
Upon receipt of CONTRACTOR’s notice of System Mechanical Completion, OWNER will
inspect the System to confirm the status of completeness.
CONTRACTOR shall be advised of any deficiencies identified by OWNER and shall take
immediate action to correct them.
Upon completion of all deficiencies, CONTRACTOR may re-apply for System Mechanical
Completion.
Should CONTRACTOR consider a deficiency shall not impact commissioning of the System,
OWNER may apply to have the deficiency classified as ‘to survive Mechanical Completion’.

207
OWNER will review such request and if it concurs with CONTRACTOR, correction of the
deficiency will be allowed to occur - post Mechanical Completion. Prior to System
Mechanical Completion, any System Commissioning/Start-up activities must be subordinated
to the Work of construction.
During the Mechanical Completion phase the CONTRACTOR shall ensure the following:
- CONTRACTOR will ensure that P&ID check have been completed i.e. that all lines have
been “walked” and confirmed to be in accordance with the latest P&IDs.
- CONTRACTOR will ensure that all outstanding Punch List items for vendor packages
required for Commissioning, including any engineering, regulatory and certification
issues are resolved. If vendor attendance is required at site, Contractor shall make
arrangements to ensure vendor attendance in time.
- CONTRACTOR will ensure that the execution of discipline construction works aligns with
the sequence and timing of Mechanical Completion by system such that the
Commissioning of each system can commence on schedule. Contractor shall provide
reports of progress, by sub-system, based on numbers of records completed against
plan. Mechanical Completion and Commissioning checks should be closely coordinated
to avoid duplication of work. In general, checks should only be repeated if there is good
reason to do so, e.g. if they are invalidated by time or damage.
CONTRACTOR’s Mechanical Completion activities shall include, but are not limited to, the
following:
- All work including but not limited to foundations (where applicable), structures,
equipment, piping, instruments and electrical installations have been completed and all
other materials have been installed as per the design.
- CONTRACTOR shall ensure the work has been inspected and tested to demonstrate
compliance with all relevant drawings, codes, standards, specifications, data sheets and
regulations and any other applicable documents. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all
pipe strength has been completed including any chemical cleaning where applicable and
the required level of cleanliness and dryness has been achieved.
- CONTRACTOR will demonstrate the Mechanical Completion of a system or sub-system
by the provision of a Mechanical Completion dossier. The dossier will include, as a
minimum, a status index and all registers and will demonstrate to OWNER and the
Regulatory Authorities (if appropriate) that the Work has been performed in accordance
with design, standards and procedures.
CONTRACTOR shall also develop a lock out/tag out procedure prior to energizing or start up
of any system. This procedure shall also be submitted to OWNER for approval a minimum of
one (1) month prior to proposed energizing or system start up.

16.9.1 SYSTEM MECHANICAL COMPLETION

System Mechanical Completion means the mechanical completion of a System or

subsystem, this is, the Work related to the System has been completed in accordance with
the Contract, including all construction drawings, specifications, instructions and codes
incorporated therein and all associated Equipment, piping, instrumentation and electrical

208
systems are installed and that all Equipment and instrumentation requiring adjustments and
tests for which CONTRACTOR is responsible, are completed including any review
assistance, or approval required by Vendor representatives has been obtained.
Mechanical Completion of a system will be achieved:
- When all inspections and tests and all other Mechanical Completion activities have been
satisfactorily completed and recorded by the CONTRACTOR on appropriate registers, as
prescribed in the status index for all the disciplines that are applicable to that system;
- When no punch list ‘A’ items are outstanding in respect of Mechanical Completion.
- When the number of ‘B’ punch list items is acceptably small.
- When the Mechanical Completion dossier has been compiled and completed.
- When all registers are complete.
- When all drawings are marked up showing system limits and changes.
- When an agreed punch list is compiled.
- When As Built “mark ups” of drawings showing deviations from design and highlighting
changes to previous revision of the drawing have been agreed.
- When vendor and specialist contractor reports and acceptances related to equipment
installation and Mechanical Completion are included within the Mechanical Completion
dossier.
- When all relevant miscellaneous data and correspondence are included in the
Mechanical Completion dossier.
- When all preservation logs are completed to time of Mechanical Completion and are
included in the Mechanical Completion dossier.
A system will not be accepted as mechanically complete if there are any outstanding
regulatory requirements to be satisfied before commissioning of the system can commence.
For electrical systems, all tests relay setting, and checkouts must be completed prior to
energization. However, some activities require that equipment is hot, energized, or actually
running, so it shall be necessary to accomplish additional CONTRACTOR activities after
Mechanical Completion, during the commissioning or start-up phase. CONTRACTOR shall
compile a list of the activities which require to be performed after Mechanical Completion and
submit this to OWNER for approval.

16.9.2 NOTICE OF SYSTEM MECHANICAL COMPLETION

When the Mechanical Completion of a system has been satisfactorily completed, Contractor
shall submit the Mechanical Completion dossier, together with a Mechanical Completion
certificate for verification.
A system mechanical check-out is to be conducted prior to each Notice of System
Mechanical Completion by CONTRACTOR and will be verified by OWNER, after receipt of
the Notice of System Mechanical Completion. This verification shall include a review of test
reports conducted by the CONTRACTOR and SUBCONTRACTORS, such as pressure tests,
electrical measurements, loop checks, and rotational direction checks to assure that all items

209
have been completed. Detailed inspection tours shall be made to determine that features
affected by flow direction (such as flow-meters) are properly oriented; facilities for by-
passing, blocking and blinding are properly located; temporary blinds and other provisions
required only for testing have been removed; and any other mechanical condition which may
delay or complicate the start-up has been properly accommodated. CONTRACTOR must
ensure that the Vendor representatives approve the Mechanical Checkout.
When OWNER is satisfied that CONTRACTOR has accomplish Mechanical Completion, it
shall sign the Notice of System Mechanical Completion confirming that the relevant System
has successfully achieved Mechanical Completion, subject to any Punch list items.
Mechanical Completion of the Terminals shall be achieved after every System has achieved
Mechanical Completion.
CONTRACTOR shall conduct a final P&ID review prior to issuing the Notice of System
Mechanical Completion. This review is a line-by-line, feature-by-feature check of the
installation against the flow sheets. Thoroughness on the part of the CONTRACTOR is
essential to minimize Commissioning and Start-up difficulties and delays. CONTRACTOR
shall produce an “as-built” issue of the P&IDs and issue these drawings with the Notice of
System Mechanical Completion.
Upon receipt by CONTRACTOR of the Notice of Final Mechanical Completion, duly signed
by OWNER, the CONTRACTOR may commence Commissioning operations.
This notification is intended to formally notify OWNER that it can proceed with final System
P&ID checks, punch listing and review of signed off documentation.

16.9.3 NOTICE OF TERMINAL MECHANICAL COMPLETION

The Notice of Terminal Mechanical Completion means the Notice issued by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR when OWNER has signed and issued to CONTRACTOR a copy of the
Notice of System Mechanical Completion for each and every System.
Terminals commissioning shall not begin until OWNER has signed and issued to
CONTRACTOR copies of all Notices of System Mechanical Completion required for each
Terminal, confirming OWNER’s understanding that all Systems are Mechanically Complete.

16.10 COMMISSIONING

16.10.1 GENERAL

Commissioning Activities include all Work associated with running-in of the Terminals, or part
thereof.
CONTRACTOR shall develop a detailed Commissioning Plan for approval by OWNER.
Commissioning Plan Table of contents to be provided five (5) months after the Effective
Date.
Commissioning activities shall include, but not limited to the following:
- All commissioning activities as detailed in the system commissioning procedures
registers and status indexes.

210
- Functional testing of all equipment and systems to demonstrate and record that they
operate and perform consistently in accordance with the design and specifications.
- Preparation of all inspection and test records and reports.
- Preparation of red line marked up drawings showing any changes from the design
drawings.
- Compilation of Commissioning Dossiers.
During the Commissioning phase CONTRACTOR shall ensure the following:
- That all utility systems are fully operational.
- That all process systems are checked to be leak free and are ready for the first time
introduction of the process medium.
- Some pipe joints unable to be leak checked at Mechanical Completion stage due to
configuration will be checked at commissioning stage.
- Those timely arrangements are made for the appropriate vendor personnel to be present
on site during the commissioning of equipment within their scope of supply.
- That the sequence and timing of the commissioning of each system takes place in
accordance with the agreed schedule.
- That there are no Punch list ‘B’ items outstanding in respect of commissioning.
- That the involvement of the appropriate regulatory authorities is maintained throughout
and that their requirements are satisfied, including possible third party inspections and
the witnessing of certain tests.
- The Contractor shall provide reports of progress based on completion of the checklists,
worksheets and steps in the procedures, against plan.

16.10.2 READY FOR TERMINAL COMMISSIONING

A System or the Terminal is ready for Commissioning when the Notice of System Mechanical
Completion has been issued by CONTRACTOR or the Notice of Terminal Mechanical
Completion has been issued by OWNER, respectively
Commissioning activities on a system shall not commence until it is mechanically complete
and all punch list “A” items have been cleared and the relevant acceptances have been
gained from the contractor’s compliance group and that OWNER has signed the relevant
“RFC Certificate” (Ready for Commissioning Certificate.
After Commissioning of Terminal has been completed, Jet A-1 may be safely fed to the
Plant.

16.10.3 DOCUMENTATION

CONTRACTOR shall develop and issue documentation for commissioning purposes, with
the following listing as minimum requirements. This material shall be developed for
Commissioning and Operations personnel to both become familiar with the Terminal and to

211
check all systems for safety of operation. This shall be in addition to any Operations and
Maintenance manuals and any other documentation that the CONTRACTOR requires.
- Adapt the commissioning specification and issue Functional Test Sheets for the project
special equipment
- Define the list of operational tests, and issue the operational tests procedures
- Red lined P&IDs for all systems. Systems to be either highlighted or system specific
P&IDs. Red lined P&IDs shall all be in A3 format and these shall be placed either in
folders or ring binders.
- Red lined P&IDs shall have all changes listed by a numbering system and be traceable
to the Management of Change Log.
- All Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Copies Specific for Pre-Commissioning.
- All data sheets – red lined or marked up with latest revision number.
- All red lined electrical drawings.
- All red lined underground piping drawings.
- All red lined underground electrical drawings.
- All PSV test records – copies only.
- All Test run and function test records.
- Fire system test records.
- Deluge test records.
- ESD (Emergency Shutdown), test records.
- Final hydro test records.
- Records for all pipe cleaning broken out by system.
- Final reinstatement records for all piping reinstatements by system.
- Records only for all loop tests.
- Red lined Logic Diagrams, Narratives, Alarms and Set Points and Shutdown matrices.
- Prepare the Commissioning dossiers
- Planning, resource mobilization plan, etc

16.10.4 COMMISSIONING CREW

Crews for commissioning operations shall generally consist of a mixture of CONTRACTOR,

Vendor, and OWNER’s Operations and Maintenance Personnel.
Direction for this phase of the Work shall be by CONTRACTOR, and the make-up of the
crews for each activity shall be established early and responsibilities for specific functions
shall be agreed upon.
Close coordination and planning between the CONTRACTOR and other parties is essential
for safe and efficient commissioning activities.

212
16.10.5 COMMISSIONING PHASES

The Commissioning phase essentially includes the three following categories of tasks:
- Dynamic verifications that for each Terminal elementary electrical, telecommunications,
and instrumental function, performs properly according to its design criteria. Typical
examples of such tests are electrical motors uncoupled runs; instrument loops tests,
electrical breakers operation. The energization of the electrical distribution network is
part of this activity.
- Running-in and on-line tests for a significant period of the Terminal utilities (electrical,
HVAC, water, etc.), and wherever applicable, of the main process equipment in closed
loop with inert fluids. Witnessing and assistance from Operator is required to allow a
smooth transfer of the facilities from the Commissioning team to the Operator, in full
confidence, and with all the required safety.
- Piping and Vessels Preparations: A number of activities related to, such as piping drying-
out, Process leak testing, and inerting.

16.10.6 UTILITIES / CONSUMABLES

CONTRACTOR is responsible for all the utilities/consumables required to provide RFSU

(Ready For Start Up) of the Terminal.
Contractor shall carefully manage and control the utilization of equipment spare parts to
ensure that they are used economically and are not used unnecessarily.
In particular, Contractor shall identify the cause of any damage or failure necessitating the
use of replacement parts and shall take appropriate action to minimize the probability of
recurrence.
Contractor shall ensure that a warranty claim is initiated in respect of any such failed
equipment.
Contractor shall provide tools and temporary equipment required. Temporary equipment
shall include, but not be limited to items such as generators, pumps, compressors, temporary
pipe work, tanks, cabling, lighting, scaffolding, rigging etc.
Contractor shall ensure that all consumables that are specifically required for Commissioning
but are not necessarily required for normal operational purposes are on site at least 60 days
prior to the commencement of Commissioning.
Contractor shall provide all test equipment required and shall ensure that the relevant
Regulatory Authorities in advance of it being needed certify such equipment

213
16.11 START UP

16.11.1 READY FOR START UP

Plant shall be “Ready for Start-up” when all Commissioning activities are completed.
CONTRACTOR’s commissioning of a system shall be considered complete when all of the
following has been undertaken:
- All commissioning activities have been satisfactorily completed and recorded utilizing
CONTRACTOR supplied check sheets.
- All functional tests have been completed and recorded and it has been demonstrated
that the system as a whole and all the equipment within it is operating in accordance with
the design. This may require the concurrent operation or testing of inter-related systems.
- The commissioning dossier has been compiled and completed.
Commissioning of a system will not be regarded or verified as complete if there are any
outstanding regulatory requirements yet to be satisfied which would preclude production
Start-up.
CONTRACTOR will offer a Certificate of Commissioning Acceptance with the completed
commissioning dossier. OWNER will sign in acceptance when it has verified that the system
is ready for production start-up. OWNER retains the right to revoke the Commissioning
Acceptance Certificate should subsequent operation reveal that the work is not complete.
On OWNER’s signature of the Commissioning Acceptance Certificate responsibility for care
and maintenance of the Terminals shall pass to OWNER.
In addition to having completed all Commissioning activities, the following conditions need to
be met before RFSU (Ready for Start-up) status is achieved:
- CONTRACTOR's Equipment and scaffolding have been removed and the Plant
operational areas cleared from any surplus material and properly cleaned.
- Temporary connections used for Commissioning have been removed.
- The plant is ready for introduction of Jet A-1.
- The buildings are ready for occupation and the furniture and equipment has been
installed.
- Utility and offsites systems are ready to support the operation of the process units.
- All drawings, documents and operating and maintenance manuals to be provided by the
CONTRACTOR at RFSU in accordance with the Document Schedule have been given
and accepted by the OWNER’s Representative;
- All spare parts to be provided by the CONTRACTOR under the Contract have been
delivered to the Site;
- The Punch List for the Works has been agreed to by the OWNER’s Representative
Following the achievement of the RFSU (Ready for Start-up), OWNER’s Representative will
issue the corresponding Certificate to the CONTRACTOR.

214
Upon the issue of RFSU Certificate, all Works supplied under the Contract shall vest in
OWNER, but OWNER shall not assume any liability for risk of loss or damages in respect of
the Works until the issue of Provisional Acceptance Certificate.

16.11.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Operation Procedure with the detailed operating instructions, developed by the

CONTRACTOR, shall be available for the OWNER’s operations personnel six (6) months in
advance of Commissioning of the Plant. The Start-up crew must become intimately familiar
with these procedures well in advance and during dry-runs and run-ins. The Start-up of the
Plant should proceed in orderly steps, with all feasible system and safety checking between
each step.
CONTRACTOR shall provide a table of contents for the Maintenance Manual for OWNER
review and approval, six (6) months after the Effective Date. CONTRACTOR shall issue to
OWNER the Operation and Maintenance manual six (6) months prior to commencement of
Commissioning activities.

16.11.3 START UP PHASE

Start-up of the Terminals commences when Commissioning of the Terminal has been
successfully completed and when steps are taken to introduce and pass feed hydrocarbons
through the Terminal at normal design conditions.
Start-up of the Terminal is complete when the entire Terminal is operating, the process is
stabilized and on-specification. Products are produced at design rates and in accordance
with the Contract. Start-up operations are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

16.11.4 START UP AND INITIAL OPERATION

16.11.4.1 GENERAL

Start-up and Initial Operation activities involve operating the Terminal and producing on
specification Products and compliance with this TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.
The Start-up of the Terminal and Initial Operation period follows the successful completion of
the Commissioning of the same by the CONTRACTOR. During the Initial Operation, the
Owner with the assistance of the Contractor will make any operating adjustments required for
satisfactory operation of the Terminal, and begin operation of the Terminal, making any
further adjustments and settings that may be required.
Start-up activities and Performance Tests are explained in more detail under Sections below
respectively.

215
16.11.4.2 TECHNICAL PERSONNEL

During Start-up of each of the Systems and the Terminal, the CONTRACTOR shall have
sufficient experienced operations, control systems and maintenance personnel in order to
support the OWNER operations team during the Start-Up, including the following personnel
assigned at the Site (twenty-four (24) hour coverage is required):
- Operations supervisory personnel, knowledgeable and experienced in the specific
equipment/process requirements.
- Control Systems Engineers experienced and knowledgeable and who were responsible
for the DCS (Distributed Control System), PLC (Programmable Logic Controller), and
PES (Programmable Electronic System) configuration, Plant design, start-up
requirements and capable of tuning control loops to bring the Plant under automatic
control.
- Maintenance/Engineering supervisory personnel, knowledgeable and experienced in the
trouble shooting and correcting deficiencies.

16.11.5 START UP ACTIVITIES

These are all the specific activities required to prepare the oil-in and to bring the Terminals in
operation:
- Put on pipe work and vessel on line (valves, PSV, locking devices…)
- Check that all valves subject to a ‘‘locked status’’ are in the locked open or locked closed
position, in accordance with the Approved drawings and procedures;
- Check all isolations by spading and blinds are in accordance with the Approved drawings
and procedures;
- Establish the list of available equipment;
- Prepare the Interlocks of control and safety systems inhibition sheets that list the
inhibition that will be required for oil-in;
- Perform the audits and technical reviews scheduled to be necessary for the issuance of
the “ready for oil-in’’ certificate.
- Check that all punch list items needed to be cleared before start-up were treated
accordingly and that the punch lists were updated;
- Complete first fills.
- Ensure safety equipment’s and critical utilities availability and reliability.
- Carry out the final safety tests (ESD (Emergency Shutdown), deluge)
At this stage the ‘’Ready for Oil or Gas-in Certificate’’ shall be issued. This certificate is not
related to any transfer of responsibility from one entity to the other (systems are kept in
hands of the party in charge of the start-up). It relates to the specific ‘’oil/gas-in’’ milestone to
which may be associated a number of pre-requisite.

216
After issuance of the ‘’ready for oil/gas-in certificate’’ are performed all the following activities
required to start-up the plant with first introduction of the feedstock into the plant:
- Bring the process in operation (Oil-in, water injection…)
- Carry out the Performance tests to prove each Terminal and equipment and design
capacities products specifications, etc.

16.11.6 START-UP CERTIFICATE

Upon achieving Start-up of the Terminals and fulfilling all other requirements for the
Provisional Acceptance Date to occur, OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall evidence the
same by executing a certificate detailing the date of such Start-up, the production rates of the
Products and any other relevant information.

16.11.7 OUTSTANDING WORK

The OWNER’s Representative may decide to sign the RFSU (Ready for Start-up) Certificate
notwithstanding that there remain outstanding Works to be completed, subject to such
outstanding work not being of the type described in paragraph (a) below. The Parties accept
that such outstanding Works may include the provision by the CONTRACTOR of As-built
drawings and of non-critical spare parts. A list of the outstanding Works to be completed by
the CONTRACTOR so as to comply with the CONTRACTOR's obligations under the
Contract together with a timetable for the completion of the outstanding Works (including
identifying all outstanding items of work required to be completed prior to Provisional
Acceptance) shall be delivered to the OWNER’s Representative who shall either agree or
reject such list. If such list is rejected the CONTRACTOR shall make such changes as the
OWNER’s Representative shall reasonably require and shall submit such revised list for the
approval of the OWNER’s Representative.
- In no circumstances may any of the outstanding Works be treated as a Punch List Item
if, in the reasonable opinion of the OWNER’s Representative, such works being
outstanding would either individually or together with other works outstanding have a
material adverse effect upon the ability of the Works to operate safely within the design
parameters set out in the Contract and in such circumstances OWNER’s Representative
shall be entitled to withhold the issue of the RFSU (Ready for Start-up) Certificate until
such outstanding Works have been completed.
- The CONTRACTOR shall rectify or complete to the reasonable satisfaction of the
OWNER’s Representative within the time stated in the RFSU (Ready for Start-up)
Certificate any Punch List Items, and in any case before the Provisional Acceptance
Date. In the event the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, the OWNER’s Representative may
arrange for the outstanding work to be done and the cost thereof shall be certified by the
OWNER’s Representative and, at the OWNER's option, either (i) paid by the
CONTRACTOR to the OWNER, (ii) deducted from the Contract Price and/or (iii) claimed
by the OWNER under the Performance Bond or the Retention Bond.

217
16.12 RELIABILITY RUN

The Reliability Run shall include tests to ascertain the reliability of the Terminals over a
number of normal operating scenarios and its response to abnormal operating scenarios that
could be expected to occur during the lifetime of the Terminal; and many include Functional
Tests and other tests to demonstrate specified requirements of standby Equipment and auto-
changeover Equipment without causing loss, interruption or abnormal variance in the output
of the Terminal.
A detailed schedule of the Terminal’s operation shall be agreed by CONTRACTOR and
OWNER at least six (6) months prior to start of the Reliability Run; and such schedule shall
provide for, inter alia, continuous operation of the Terminals following OWNER’s
requirements, under conditions that can reasonably be anticipated in normal commercial
operation, at any load not exceeding the Terminals design limits.
The Reliability Run shall continue for a period of thirty (30) days.
The CONTRACTOR shall conduct the Reliability Run when:
- All the standard measuring and analytical Equipment for the field measurement and the
laboratory analysis is available.
- Sufficient utilities at the conditions and specifications set forth are available.
- All machinery, Equipment, instrumentation and piping are clean and performing as in
new condition.
- Favorable weather conditions are expected for the duration of the test period.
All operations for the Reliability Run shall be carried out from the Terminal’s Control Room
using the Distributed control System.
Any losses of hours due to any interruption, other than those directly and solely caused by
the fault of OWNER or due to failures of the Upstream facilities, shall be added to the end of
the Reliability Run and if: (i) any continuous interruption is longer than twelve (12) hours; or
(ii) the aggregate of all interruptions exceeds twenty-four (24) hours; then the Reliability Run
shall be restarted at the beginning.
If the Reliability Run is interrupted due to reasons beyond the control of CONTRACTOR,
except where such interruptions were requested by OWNER to prevent damages to the
Terminals (in which case CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any extension), the
Reliability Run period shall be extended by such period so as to result in the Reliability Run
period of thirty (30) days being completed.
For the follow up of the reliability run, the following conditions must be included:
- Designation of qualified staff of CONTRACTOR for follow-up
- Availability of Jet A-1 export facilities
A procedure must be produced in case that several failures happen during the reliability run,
caused by CONTRACTOR.

218
16.13 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TESTS

After successful Reliability Run has been achieved, the Terminals shall undergo the tests set
out in the Contract in accordance with the procedures agreed upon between CONTRACTOR
and OWNER’s Representative, with OWNER’s acceptance criteria as stated in the Technical
Specifications and in the Contract. The Performance Guarantee Tests are carried out to
demonstrate compliance with the performance Guarantees. A joint team between OWNER
and CONTRACTOR will be responsible for completing the Performance Guarantee Tests to
demonstrate all guaranteed values.
The results of the Performance Guarantee Tests must show that all of the acceptance criteria
are met in full.
CONTRACTOR shall provide all meters required for testing, with certification or other
acceptable proof that they have been calibrated by applicable Authorities or a recognized
independent third party chosen by CONTRACTOR after agreement by OWNER.
The Terminal Performance Test is carried out with the Terminals in stable operation during
an agreed period of time. The test is performed with the objective to verify if the installation
meets the guarantee requirements. The performance test will be conducted jointly by the
CONTRACTOR and OWNER.

16.13 1 DETAIL PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST PROTOCOL

CONTRACTOR shall prepare a detailed Performance Guarantee Test Protocol and submit
this document to OWNER for approval four (4) months in advance of completion of the
Commissioning activities. The Performance Guarantee Test Protocol will include as a
minimum:
- Testing procedures including organization and responsibilities.
- Reference to written Operating Instructions.
- Approved criteria for measuring feed, product, utility and effluent rates.
- Sample data logs.
- Written procedure for retaining samples.
The manner in which the data is to be recorded and samples taken shall be agreed between
the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR.
Samples of feedstocks, products and other necessary streams shall be collected during the
Performance Guarantee Tests in sufficient quantities to enable the CONTRACTOR to
demonstrate fulfillment of the Performance Guarantees set forth in the correspondent
Annexes of the Contract. These samples shall be taken and analyzed at frequencies and by
methods established in the above Protocol. The analysis by an independent third party
Laboratory will be accepted as correct in the event of a dispute.

219
16.14 PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE

Provisional Acceptance shall be achieved under the Contract only if the following conditions
have been met:
- RFSU (Ready for Start-up) has been achieved and all Punch List Items have been
completed by CONTRACTOR and accepted by OWNER’s Representative.
- Outstanding Punch List items at RFSU (Ready for Start-up) have been completed by
CONTRACTOR or if completed by OWNER, CONTRACTOR has paid for it.
- CONTRACTOR has obtained from OWNER's Representative a Test Certificate duly
signed in respect of all Performance Guarantee Tests carried out successfully.
- Final Design Documentation and Operating Manuals have been issued to OWNER’s
Representative with no objections in the quality, quantities and formats specified in the
Contract.
- OWNER’s Representative and CONTRACTOR have verified and agreed that all of the
foregoing requirements have been satisfied, it being understood that such verification
may not entail any requirements additional to those set out in the Contract and must be
performed within a maximum period of thirty (30) days following achievement of the last
of the foregoing requirements, which they will be deemed to have been verified for the
purposes of this Clause.
- Clearance of Site has been completed by CONTRACTOR at OWNER’s Representative
satisfaction.
Following the achievement of the conditions for Provisional Acceptance, OWNER’s
Representative will issue the corresponding Certificate to the CONTRACTOR.

16.15 TERMINAL HAND OVER

Upon the issue of a Provisional Acceptance Certificate, Hand Over milestone will be
achieved, from CONTRACTOR to OWNER. In this moment, risk of loss or damage to the
Works shall pass to OWNER and the Guarantee Period shall commence.

16.16 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

CONTRACTOR may by written notice to OWNER's Representative apply for a final

acceptance certificate (the “Final Acceptance Certificate”) only after a minimum of 24 months
after the Provisional Acceptance Date (the “Guarantee Period”), and provided that:
- The Facility has performed with a reliability equal to or exceeding the values set out in
the Reliability Guarantee or OWNER has been paid in full any Liquidated Damages for
Reliability
- Any Punch List Item noted on the Provisional Acceptance Certificate as requiring
rectification or completion shall have been so rectified or completed by CONTRACTOR
to OWNER’s satisfaction, and that such rectified and/or completed items have not
required further rectification or completion; and

220
- There shall be no Claim by OWNER against CONTRACTOR outstanding under the
Contract nor any Claim against OWNER by CONTRACTOR, by any SubCONTRACTOR
or by any other Person (including any Personnel thereof or any Authority) claiming by,
through or under CONTRACTOR or any SubCONTRACTOR; and CONTRACTOR has
delivered to OWNER a written officer’s certificate to such effect.
In the event that the Facility or any part thereof has been inactive and/or materially less
active than intended during the Guarantee Period due to repairs, replacements or any other
reason attributable to CONTRACTOR, the Guarantee Period shall be automatically extended
for the time period during which the Facility or the concerned part thereof was inactive or
materially less active.
Final Acceptance may be withheld by OWNER in the event that components of the Facility
with an aggregate value in excess of $100,000 have required repair or have been replaced,
until expiry of any extended guarantee for such repaired or replaced components. In the
event that OWNER issues the Final Acceptance Certificate before expiry of the extended
guarantee for any repaired or replaced components, such issuance and the Final
Acceptance Certificate shall be deemed to be without prejudice to the extended guarantee
for such repaired or replaced components which guarantee shall continue in full force and
effect.
OWNER’s Representative shall, within 15 Business Days after the receipt of
CONTRACTOR's application for the Final Acceptance Certificate (which shall be deemed a
certificate by CONTRACTOR that it has satisfied all requirements for, and is entitled to
receive, the Final Acceptance Certificate), either:
- Issue a Final Acceptance Certificate stating the date on which the Final Acceptance
conditions were all satisfied, and listing minor items or components of the Facility with an
aggregate value below $100,000 that need to be rectified or completed after Final
Acceptance and the date by which they are to be rectified or completed; or
- Reject the application, giving written reasons where appropriate, and indicating the
Works required to be done by CONTRACTOR to enable the necessary conditions to be
met.
Only after issuance by OWNER of the Final Acceptance Certificate shall the Facility be
deemed to have been finally accepted (the “Final Acceptance”). The date stated by OWNER
in the Final Acceptance Certificate as the date on which the conditions set out in the EPC
Contract were all satisfied shall be considered, for all purposes under the Contract, as the
date on which Final Acceptance has taken place (the “Final Acceptance Date”).

16.17 WORKS AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE

Any item noted on the Final Acceptance Certificate as requiring rectification or completion
shall be so rectified or completed by CONTRACTOR within the time stated in the Final
Acceptance Certificate. In the event that CONTRACTOR fails to effect the rectification or
completion by the time stated, OWNER shall have the right to perform such work at
CONTRACTOR's expense and such cost (or reasonable cost estimate until the actual cost is
determined, which shall in any event include OWNER internal and third Person costs) shall

221
be deducted by OWNER from any payment being made to CONTRACTOR, or shall be paid
by CONTRACTOR to OWNER immediately upon OWNER’s demand

16.18 DECOMMISSIONING MANUAL

The CONTRACTOR shall provide a Decommissioning Manual that will contain at a minimum
guidelines and instructions with respect to decommissioning of each Terminal. A
decommissioning estimate based on current value shall be included in this manual.

222
17 CONSTRUCTABILITY

17.1 CONSTRUCTABILITY PROGRAM

CONTRACTOR will take into account to develop his proposal the constructability and
sequence of the works. A sequence of construction was developed during the early phases
of the Project in the following documents (which are included in Section 6. Employer’s
Requirements, item 6.6.2 FEED Package which is part of sub-section 6.6 Supplementary
Information):
- 24020-MEG-D-IN-004-02 Recommendations for construction MPL.
- 24020-JAM-D-IN-004-01 Recommendations for construction JOCL.
- 24020-PAD-D-IN-004-01 Recommendations for construction POCL.
Contractor shall review and update these documents during the EPC. Any modification to
these documents shall be approved by OWNER and will not represent additional costs for
OWNER.
Before starting any construction activity, Contractor shall submit for OWNER’s approval the
detailed construction program indicating main milestones.

17.2 HEAVY LIFT AND TRANSPORTATION PLAN

All major Equipment (based on weight and volume) shall be considered in Construction
program and shall be clearly indicated inside Construction Plan describing the logistics
considered and the equipment required.

223
18 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT

CONTRACTOR shall develop a Construction Execution Plan describing the following points:
- Scope Management
- Time Management
- Sequential Completion
- Quality Management
- Human Resources Management
- Communications Management
- Risk Management
- Integration Management
- Field Engineering
- Construction Temporary Utilities
- Temporary Facilities
- Quality Requirements
- Environmental and Safety Management.

This document shall be approved by OWNER before the beginning of the Construction
Stage.

224
19 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

CONTRACTOR will take into account to develop the Construction the following documents
(which are included in Section 6. Employer’s Requirements, item 6.6.2 FEED Package which
is part of sub-section 6.6 Supplementary Information):
- 24020-MEG-D-IN-004-02 Recommendations for construction MPL.
- 24020-JAM-D-IN-004-01 Recommendations for construction JOCL.
- 24020-PAD-D-IN-004-01 Recommendations for construction POCL.

19.1 PRELIMINARY WORKS AND CIVIL WORKS

19.1.1 DEMOLITIONS

CONTRACTOR shall accomplish with the demolition works in order to clear the space to
locate to new facilities. A demolition sequence for each Terminal has been included in next
documents (which are included in Section 6. Employer’s Requirements, item 6.6.2 FEED
Package which is part of sub-section 6.6 Supplementary Information):
- 24020-MEG-D-IN-004-02 Recommendations for construction MPL.
- 24020-JAM-D-IN-004-01 Recommendations for construction JOCL.
- 24020-PAD-D-IN-004-01 Recommendations for construction POCL.
These documents shall be reviewed and updated by the EPC CONTRACTOR, and they are
included in Section 6 item 6.6.2. Any modification to these documents shall be approved by
OWNER and will not represent additional costs for OWNER.

19.1.2 FOUNDATIONS AND SOIL MOVEMENTS

The Reference point of the Civil Works to be performed in POCL, MPL and JOCL Terminals
shall be in the Topographic drawings (Section 6, item 6.6.3).
OWNER shall deliver the areas where constructions are to be erected in both works “as is”,
CONTRACTOR being responsible for the weeding, replanting, clearing, digging and filling
until reaching the levels indicated in the Detail Engineering developed by CONTRACTOR.
The Geotechnical Study (Section 6, item 6.6.4), attached hereto, is submitted as preliminary.
Contractor, prior to the foundations’ design, shall have to perform Geotechnical studies in the
main Buildings, Platforms for Metering skid and Loading Bay structures areas.
Equipment, supports, chambers, tanks and buildings’ foundations shall be of reinforced
Concrete.

225
19.1.3 CONTROL ROOM AND CONTROL ACCESS BUILDINGS

Contractor shall Design and Construct a reinforced concrete structure (wall, slabs and
beams) for the Control Room and the Control Access Room as a reinforced concrete
structure (columns and beams) with masonry walls.
Control room and Access building shall include raised floor to allow cable entrance and
distribution.
Ground Floor slab shall be of Reinforced Concrete, with resistance to compression in
accordance with BNBC.
The Control Room shall be pressurized and with an HVAC equipment, access building shall
include HVAC as well in accordance with project specification.

19.1.4 PUMPS’ BUILDINGS FOR THE FIRE EXTINCTION SYSTEM

Fire extinction system pumps in PADMA to be installed in an existing building. MEGHNA and
JAMUNA pump location that are show on existing facilities in FEED drawings to be
confirmed during the Detail Engineering phase.

19.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTING

The foundation kind and its elevation will respond to the requirements of the topographic
survey and the Engineering documents.
Footings/ circular footings shall be anticipated for horizontal vessels, which superficially grind
against which grind against a contact ring in correspondence with its envelope; the footings’
plant dimensions will arise from the geometrical and /or the static need, so as not to exceed
the ground allowable bearing capacity.
Pump Foundation, etc., will respond to the same premises as those established for horizontal
vessels. They shall emerge, at least, 15 cm from ground level. Their plant dimensions shall
respond to geometrical needs of the equipment and their height shall be determined so that
its weight be no less than one third of the equipment weight.
Steel structure foundation shall emerge, at least, 15 cm from ground level. Their plant
dimensions shall respond to geometrical needs of the structure and their dimension so not to
exceed the ground allowable bearing capacity.
Between the higher and the lower level of the reinforced concrete of the equipment and
structure, Grouting shall be placed. The fixation of machines and structures to the foundation
base of concrete should be done with anchor bolts.
Pre-fabricated Shed is to be constructed for each metering skid.

226
19.3 PIPE SUPPORTS

Pipe Racks, cross street bridges and isolated supports (T-post), may be made of steel
structure and reinforced concrete the sleepers. In every case, foundations shall be of
reinforced concrete and shall emerge 15 cm over the surrounding ground level.
Minimum height of cross street bridges, corresponding to the pipe racks are been indicated
in FEED drawings.
All these structural elements shall be designed and dimensioned following the guidelines set
in the engineering documents attached hereto, the applicable rules and regulations and the
Geotechnical Study.

19.4 MISCELLANEOUS

Buildings must be designed so as to enable operation and maintenance vehicles access and
maneuvers.
They will have perimeter external sidewalks of at least 1,00 m wide, constructed with
concrete of and anti-skid finishing.
Facilities shall be designed in such a way as to have an integral footpath, for the operation
personnel, in the making of their own activities, not to step on the ground or jump over pipes
or other obstacles using stairs or other accessories.

19.5 FACILITIES AND ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT

19.5.1 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM IN 400V

The distribution system in 400V will be set in accordance with the criteria established in the
following documents:
- 24020-GEN-E-SP-002 Technical specification for iMCC & MOVP
- 24020-JAM-E-IN-001 Electrical Design Basis JOCL
- 24020-MEG-E-IN-001 Electrical Design Basis MPL
- 24020-PAD-E-IN-001 Electrical Design Basis POCL
- 24020-JAM-E-DS-002 iMCC Data Sheet (JOCL)
- 24020-JAM-E-DS-003 PMOV Data Sheet (JOCL)
- 24020-MEG-E-DS-002 iMCC Data Sheet (MPL)
- 24020-MEG-E-DS-003 PMOV Data Sheet (MPL)
- 24020-PAD-E-DS-002 iMCC Data Sheet (POCL)
- 24020-PAD-E-DS-003 PMOV Data Sheet (POCL)
- 24020-PAD-E-DW-001 iMCC Single Line Diagram PADMA
- 24020-MEG-E-DW-001 iMCC Single Line Diagram MEGHNA

227
 - 24020-JAM-E-DW-001 iMCC Single Line Diagram JAMUNA
- 2420-GEN-E-DW-502 Typical MOV Panel Scheme
- 24020-GEN-E-DW-501-00_iMCC Electrical Control Architecture

19.5.2 UPS SYSTEM

The provision, assembly and commission of the UPS (400/220 Vca) system will be carried
out. The first one is devoted to backup the charges of the control, security and
instrumentation as well as of such other charges as may be critical to plant operation.
The design of the UPS systems will be commissioned in accordance with the specifications
and stipulations of the following documents:
- 24020-GEN-E-SP-003 Technical specification for UPS
- 24020-MEG-E-DS-001 UPS Data Sheet (JOCL)
- 24020-MEG-E-DS-001 UPS Data Sheet (MPL)
- 24020-PAD-E-DS-001 UPS Data Sheet (POCL)
- 24020-JAM-E-DW-002 UPS Single Line Diagram JAMUNA
- 24020-MEG-E-DW-002 UPS Single Line Diagram MEGHNA
- 24020-PAD-E-DW-002 UPS Single Line Diagram PADMA

19.5.3 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR ELECTRIC ASSEMBLY

The electric assembly will be carried out in accordance with IEC Rules, using trays and pipes
of conduit type and other certified accessories for these types of installations.
All underground routing will be made using concrete duct banks when lay under street.
Contractor must carry out the assembly of the electrical equipment in the rooms of Low
voltage as well as the installation and wiring of the cable tray to be placed in the rooms
connecting all boards and equipment.
From the Electric Room, the power, command, and light cables will be placed up to the
different consumptions.
Contractor will prepare the laying with all the system of cable trays with couplings, conduits,
junction boxes, panels, equipment, engines, push buttons, etc.
Contractor will be in charge of the laying, preparation and connection of all power, command,
and lighting and ancillary services cables for the plant. The list of main power, command and
light cables of the plant is contained in documents:
- 24020-JAM-E-EL-001 Electrical Equiment List-JAMUNA.
- 24020-MEG-E-EL-001 Electrical Equiment List-MEGHNA
- 24020-PAD-E-EL-001 Electrical Equiment List-PADMA
These lists must be detailed and amended during the development of detail engineering.

228
The conduits to connect cables to engines, buttons, light columns, equipment panels and
JBs in general will be assembled.
The identifications of conductors will be made with thermo-shrinkable tube. The identification
machine and the tubes or cassettes will be provided by Contractor.
Cables will be identified by an aluminium sheet engraved in accordance with the TAG
indicated in the cable list on each end, hoisting chamber and every 30 m in the tray.
In ground layings, conductors must be adequately protected by sand or sieved soil (stone
free), covered with bricks, tiles or red-colored concrete and a layer of soil. Above all the
laying a plastic warning mesh will be placed, which shall be provided by Contractor.
Trench coverings must be compacted and be recomposed according to their environment
(broken stone, shingle, sidewalks, etc.).
Once trenches are covered, boundary marks will be built and placed to indicate the path of
the grounded cables.

19.5.4 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

The following lighting systems will be designed, provided and installed for the plant:
- Exterior general lighting
- Interior lighting in rooms
- Spot lighting in skins and equipment surroundings
- Emergency lighting
In order to carry out the assembly of the exterior and road lighting systems, the guidelines
set forth in the following documents:
- 24020-JAM-E-CA-001 Lighting Calculation JOCL
- 24020-MEG-E-CA-001 Lighting Calculation MPL
- 24020-PAD-E-CA-001 Lighting Calculation POCL
- 24020-JAM-E-DW-300 Outdoor Lighting Layout – JAMUNA
- 24020-MEG-E-DW-300 Outdoor Lighting Layout – MEGHNA
- 24020-PAD-E-DW-300 Outdoor Lighting Layout - PADMA
Must be complied with. Installation includes mounting, set-up, assembly and anchorage of
light columns over the relevant concrete bases, besides the laying and connection of the
pertaining cables.
The detail of location, distribution and piping for emergency lighting systems will be defined
during detail engineering.
It shall design and develop the lighting so that lighting conditions help to create a safe
working environment, help to make visual tasks and create an appropriate visual
environment.

229
Therefore, the lighting must provide visual comfort being uniform, optimum, absent of
dazzling brightness, contrast with suitable conditions, with the correct colors and no flashing
lights or strobe effects.
It shall define the level of illumination in terms of tasks or activities to be done in the area to
be illuminated.

19.5.5 GROUNDING SYSTEM

Contractor must prepare a grounding connection to the existing grounding system for all the
plant for the design of which the guidelines of IEEE Std 80-2000-IEEE Guide for Safety in AC
Substation Grounding standard.

19.5.6 PROTECTION AGAINST ATMOSPHERIC DISCHARGES

Contractor must design, provide and assemble an Atmospheric Discharges System for the 3
facilities according to the specific application standards and drawings:
- 24020-JAM-E-DW-400 Lightning Layout JAMUNA
- 24020-MEG-E-DW-400 Lightning Layout MEGHNA
- 24020-PAD-E-DW-400 Lightning Layout PADMA
Provides for the criteria and guidelines for design and lay-out of capture points for the
protection system against atmospheric discharges.

19.6 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the definitive project associated with the
instrumentation, control and communications systems, following the guidelines of developed
FEED, International rules and legislation in force in Bangladesh.
CONTRACTOR must provide and install all associated instrumentation as well as such
assembly accessories as may be necessary therefore using a MAC contract with scope
definition indicated in this tender
CONTRACTOR must provide and install all junction boxes, condulets, accessories and
necessary sealers.
Contractor must perform the connection and piping of all instruments and Terminal
equipment to the control and security system, as per general guidelines developed by FEED
provided in the documents:
- 24020-PAD-I-DW-400 Process connection Hook-ups. POCL.
- 24020-MEG-I-DW-400 Process connection Hook-ups MPL.
- 24020-JAM-I-DW-400 Process connection Hook-ups JOCL.
- 24020-GEN-I-SP-004-00 Specification for electricity and instrumentation works.

230
All conductors must be identified in both ends.

19.6.1 FIRE & GAS SYSTEM

Contractor must design, provide, assemble and commission a fire and gas detection system
according to the general guidelines provided for in the following documents:
- 24020-PAD-M-SP-001 Fire fighting specification. PADMA TERMINAL
- 24020-MEG-M-SP-001 Fire fighting specification. MEGHNA TERMINAL
- 24020-JAM-M-SP-001 Fire fighting specification. JAMUNA TERMINAL
- 24020-PAD-M-CA-001 Fire fighting calculations. PADMA TERMINAL
- 24020-MEG-M-CA-001 Fire fighting calculations. MEGHNA TERMINAL
- 24020-JAM-M-CA-001 Fire fighting calculations. JAMUNA TERMINAL
- 24020-JAM-M-DT-200 Fire fighting P&ID PUMP HOUSE JOCL
- 24020-JAM-M-DT-201 Fire fighting P&ID DELUGE VALVE ROOM JOCL
- 24020-JAM-M-DT-202 Fire fighting P&ID TANKS JOCL
- 24020-MEG-M-DT-204 Fire fighting P&ID PUMP HOUSE MPL
- 24020-MEG-M-DT-205 Fire fighting P&ID DELUGE VALVE ROOM MPL
- 24020-MEG-M-DT-206 Fire fighting P&ID TANKS MPL

19.6.2 SECURITY INTEGRATED SYSTEM (SIS)

Contractor must design, provide, assemble and commission a security integrated system as
per the general guidelines provided in the documents:
- 24020-PAD-I-SP-005 Specification for Process Control System POCL
- 24020-MEG-I-SP-005 Specification for Process Control System and ESD MPL
- 24020-JAM-I-SP-005 Specification for Process Control System and ESD JOCL

19.6.3 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PCS)

Contractor must design, provide, assemble and commission a process control system as per
the general guidelines provided in the documents:
- 24020-PAD-I-SP-005 Specification for Process Control System POCL
- 24020-MEG-I-SP-005 Specification for Process Control System and ESD MPL
- 24020-JAM-I-SP-005 Specification for Process Control System and ESD JOCL

Contractor must perform the integration of the new PCS Process Control System with the
existing ITS (Tank Inventory System) of Enraf.

231
Contractor must perform the integration of units of Remote Control to the control system of
Terminals.

19.6.4 TERMINAL MANAGER SYSTEM (TMS)

Contractor must design, provide, assemble and commission a Terminal Manager System as
per the general guidelines provided in the documents:
- 24020-PAD-I-SP-007 Specification for Terminal Management System TMS - POCL
- 24020-MEG-I-SP-007 Specification for Terminal Management System TMS - MPL
- 24020-JAM-I-SP-007 Specification for Terminal Management System TMS - JOCL

19.6.5 INVENTORY TANK SYSTEM (ITS)

Contractor must design, provide, assemble and commission an Inventory Tank System as
per the general guidelines provided in the documents:
- 24020-PAD-I-SP-009 Specification for Inventory Tank System POCL
- 24020-MEG-I-SP-009 Specification for Inventory Tank System MPL
- 24020-JAM-I-SP-009 Specification for Inventory Tank System JOCL
In order to include the instrumentation for its automation, there will be required to add one
nozzle at the top and one at the side of each tank.
It will not be a hot tap but works must be done with tank liquid drained and in accordance
with API-653 – Tank, Inspection, Repair, Alteration and Reconstruction.
Contractor shall develop a procedure to be submitted for its approval describing in detail
works to be done in each phase starting with the out of service first stage.
As a minimum, the following requirements shall be considered:
1. Shell and roof nozzles shall be according to API Std 650.
2. The minimum diameter of any shell and roof connection shall be 2”, except for
temperature connections, which may be 1 ½”.
3. All the flanges of the pipes shall be WN type.
4. Nozzles with diameter equal to 2” or less shall be #300 LWN.
5. The projection of the nozzles shall be according to API Std 650.
6. All the accessories welded to the shell/roof, shall have a 5 mm reinforcement plate
and of the same material as the shell/roof, according to API Std 650.
7. Surface preparation, protective coatings and paint systems shall be applied.

Contractor shall supply all necessary, labour, equipment, appliances, materials and
consumables required to perform all the works within the limits of the contract. All equipment
and appliances shall be good quality, well maintained and entirely suitable for the intended
purpose.
Contractor shall review the proposed sequence of tank intervention and notice if there is a
required update. In any case, tanks and products out of service must not cause interference
with the Terminals operations.

232
The Procedure of the tank intervention shall include, with not limitation, the following tasks
and in accordance with API-653 – Tank, Inspection, Repair, Alteration and Reconstruction:
1. Cleaning and Gas Freeing
2. Tanks roof and shell evaluation
3. Nondestructive examination (NDE)
4. Considerations for tanks intervention – design:
a. Shell penetration
b. Roof penetration
5. Reparations
6. Shell repairs
a. Reparation on fixed roof tanks
b. Reparation on floating roof tanks
7. Testing
a. Radiographs
b. NDE
c. Hydrostatic testing
8. Finishing works, cleaning, coating and painting system
9. Recordkeeping
10. Instrument Calibration
11. Certification

The proposed sequence of tank intervention for each Terminal is in drawings:

- 24020-PAD-I-DW-103 SEQUENCE CONSTRUCTION INVENTORY TANK SYSTEM
POCL
- 24020-MEG-I-DW-103 SEQUENCE CONSTRUCTION INVENTORY TANK SYSTEM
MPL
- 24020-JAM-I-DW-103 SEQUENCE CONSTRUCTION INVENTORY TANK SYSTEM
JOCL

19.6.6 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING SYSTEM (ERP)

Contractor must design, provide, assemble and commission an Enterprise Resource

Planning system as per the general guidelines provided in the document: 24020-GEN-I-SP-
006 Specification for Enterprise Resource planning system ERP.

19.6.7 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

Contractor must design, provide, assemble and commission the Communications System as
per the guidelines provided in the following documents:
- 24020-PAD-I-SP-005 Specification for Process Control System POCL
- 24020-MEG-I-SP-005 Specification for Process Control System and ESD MPL
- 24020-JAM-I-SP-005 Specification for Process Control System and ESD JOCL
- 24020-PAD-I-DW-500 Control System Architecture POCL
- 24020-MEG-I-DW-500 Control System Architecture MPL

233
 - 24020-JAM-I-DW-500 Control System Architecture JOCL

19.7 MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY

19.7.1 PROJECT STRATEGIES FOR CONSTRUCTION AND ASSEMBLY

The constructability guidelines laid down below are based on the following notions:
- To fabricate as many mechanical and electrical components as possible in off-site
workshops, to be later positioned and interconnected in situ.
- To contribute to the achievement of the best Safety conditions during the execution of
Construction and Assembly tasks.
- To reduce Environmental Impact as a result of Work activities.
- To improve efficiency in works executed in workshop, thus reducing costs.
- Instrument pedestals, minor supports, stairs, localized lighting fixtures, etc. shall be
founded on reinforced concrete precast bases.

19.7.2 EXECUTION OF CIVIL WORK ACTIVITIES

The civil work includes, inter alia, the following activities, which shall be concluded and
approved by the Inspection, prior to the commencement of Electromechanical Works, which
shall be provided for in the Project schedule.
The purpose is to establish a sequence or order of tasks prior to Mechanical Assembly
activities:
- Weeding and clearing of Worksite area.
- Excavation, layout, filling and compression, leveling and establishment of slopes, in
order to ensure that rainwater be properly drained.
- Identification of point of coordinates and reference level.
- Work marking out.
- Execution of all equipment foundations.
- Execution of all buried pipes and covering and compression of ditches.
- Execution of all fire-extinguishing piping.
- Execution of all the underground system.
- Execution of electrical pipes and blast instruments and chambers.
- Execution of over-hanging electrical pipes for laying of feeders to lighting columns.
- Permanent marking on each base of the relevant axes of coordinates.
- Permanent marking of the Tag of the relevant piece of equipment.
- Execution of perimeter fence of the Plant in worksite area.

234
19.7.3 FEATURES OF THE EXECUTION OF MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY

The adoption of plates for the foundation of packaged equipment, the placement of concrete-
embedded steel plates, the decision to place lifting bolts at the second stage and the
execution of precast foundations for minor bases are aimed at creating the best possible
conditions of accessibility and circulation of transportation and lifting equipment, in order to
maximize safety in maneuvers and simplify assembly tasks.
Prior to Mechanical Assembly, plane surveying and altitude measurement assessments shall
be conducted with regard to all the civil works, in order to ensure that they correspond to
Engineering documents.

19.8 ORGANIZATION OF PREFABRICATION AND MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY

19.8.1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

The Construction and Assembly strategy is based on design, prefabrication and fabrication of
packaged equipment, piping, pipe-racks, platforms etc., in vendors’ or manufacturers’
workshops and their later delivery to the worksite for assembly.
Construction and Layout, in the same workshop, shall be such as to enable field assembly
and connection, with no need of welding works for the purpose of pipeline adjustment, which
entail new hydraulic tests.
It will be necessary to develop the relevant Technical Specification for the “Design and
Construction of Packaged Units”, which shall include, inter alia, the following topics: Purpose,
Applicable Rules and Specifications, General Requirements, Design and Fabrication of Skid
Structure, Design and Fabrication of Piping, Electricity and Instruments, and Preparation for
Transportation.
The foregoing action shall be supplemented by the workshop prefabrication and color assort
of piping “SPOOLS”, which may be sent to the site, with adjusted or completed sections for
their assembly in situ; as the case may be. For such purpose, it will be necessary to develop
work instructions, which contemplate the following stages: Handling of Engineering
Documents, Prefabricated Item Fabrication, Follow-Up and Record Specifications,
Identification and Preparation System for Transportation and Delivery to Worksite.
Workshop construction and delivery to site of, inter alia, ladders, special supports, lighting
towers and columns; standard supports for electricity, instruments, piping, etc., shall
contribute to the improvement of working conditions in field, and thus safety; to the reduction
of costs and terms and to the minimization of environmental impact as a result of the
generation of less waste material.
Where possible, in order to ensure the quality of the final work and the correspondence of
the different parts, equipment and pipe-rack should be fabricated in the same workshop or by
the same vendor. Otherwise, everything shall be concentrated in the same workshop, in
order to submit it and cure such defects as may have become apparent in the assembly,
prior to delivery to the worksite.

235
Structures, metering skids and packaged equipment shall be completely fabricated in
workshop. The structure of pipes and supports shall be painted. Electricity and instrument
wiring shall be made, and conductors shall be positioned and connected. Pre-commissioning
and Commissioning shall be conducted.
The relevant torque shall be applied to flanged joints; then, every nut and stud shall be
marked with paint, so that it may be verified in field that no change has occurred during the
transportation.
All support nuts, piping clamps, U bolts, etc., shall be fixed with lock washers with laps, or
else with bonds for screws.
In order to facilitate transportation, different components, such as actuated valves, safety
valves, pipe spools, operation platforms, ladders, etc., which exceed the maximum height
allowed in highway shall be dismantled in workshop and separately dispatched to the site.
Experience shows that, in order to prevent deterioration during transportation, metering skid
shall be secured with provisional supports, which shall be identified with paint of a certain
color, so as to facilitate their identification and removal from site.
As it arrives at the Worksite, the skid shall be mounted on its base and assembly shall be
completed.
Steel structure and supports shall be prefabricated and painted with the complete color
assort in workshop and then sent to the worksite for its assembly.
The Construction and Assembly strategy should be borne in mind, since the excellence of
the outcome shall depend mainly on the results of the following stages: Quality and
Dimensional Control, Prefabricated Items, Transportation Logistics, and Plane Surveying and
Altitude Measurement of the Civil Work.

19.8.2 ASSEMBLY CONSIDERATIONS

The civil work shall be executed so as to facilitate the transportation, lifting, unloading and
positioning on the bases of equipment.
It may be stated that this methodology implies that assembly operations will be safer and
simpler, as turning radiuses and the length of feathers shall be smaller.
In order for the means of transport to access the foundations, it shall be necessary to build
ramps on selected and suitably compressed soil, for the purpose of improving the access
and rolling conditions of the means of transport. The means of transport shall access the
foundation in reverse position.
The orientation of the loads on the floor of the transportation unit shall be in observance with
the methodology defined in the assembly procedure and the foregoing paragraph, in order to
prevent maneuvers for the adjustment of the load on the means of transport in situ.
The crane shall be placed by the sides of the foundation, in reverse position with respect to
the pipe-rack and its longitudinal axis shall form a 90º angle with the transverse axis of the
foundation, on which the load shall be placed.

236
Cranes, operators, and ancillary lifting items, such as slings, shackles, belts, separators,
hangers, etc., shall be certified by an entity acknowledged by OWNER.
All Assembly operations shall be supported by specific procedures, which shall be previously
approved by the Inspection of OWNER.

237
20 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE OWNER STAFF TRAINING ACTIVITIES

20.1 PERSONNEL TRAINING PLAN

20.1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES

20.1.1.1 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing specific training in each Terminal for
Operation, Maintenance, Engineering, to plant personnel designated by the OWNER who will
operate, maintain, and work at the Terminals. The overall training plan shall be designed to
ensure that all positions in the organization are filled with qualified personnel.
During the initial activities, CONTRACTOR will conduct an extensive analysis of training
needs, including knowledge and skills testing of the available work force. The training needs
analysis will define the skill levels and the number of qualified personnel available, the
methods for acquiring qualified personnel, and the overall training needs of the organization.
Appropriate training for fire and other hazards has to be given to every person working on
site, including operators, firemen as well as administrative staff, to different levels according
to their responsibility.
OWNER will be fully involved in the commissioning stage, through its staff, who will be
working under the CONTRACTOR instructions. CONTRACTOR shall train, instruct and
supervise OWNER operating staff to a standard adequate to ensure safe and efficient
commercial operation of each Terminal and to enable performance criteria to be met.
CONTRACTOR completely assumes the responsibilities derived from construction, pre-
commissioning, commissioning and start-up operations, despite OWNER personnel being
present during these operations.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that OWNER is given the opportunity to utilize any existing
simulators, including those of SUPPLIERS.
CONTRACTOR shall develop and submit the Training Plan for approval by the OWNER. The
training shall be a formal structured training course, including classroom, on-site and on the
job training.
For the purpose of this Section, such specific training in each Terminal provided by the
CONTRACTOR shall be designated as the “Training Program” which in turn will be
comprised of “Training Modules”.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the development, delivery, and execution of the
specific Training Modules that shall provide the knowledge and skills required of personnel to
operate and maintain Terminals systems, sub-systems, equipment and components.
CONTRACTOR will design the Training Modules so that at the end of the courses
CONTRACTOR can provide test assessment to confirm the participant’s proficiency,
knowledge, and skills acquired to meet the objectives of each individual Training Module.
CONTRACTOR shall submit test results to OWNER. The workers that do not reach a
minimum specified level, will repeat training course, until they improve. Should this repetition

238
be not enough to reach the satisfactory level, the CONTRACTOR will inform in writing to the
OWNER.
The OWNER will participate with the CONTRACTOR in the evaluation and in common
agreement they will determine the state of aptitude of the participants. The CONTRACTOR
will create a register of all the personnel and the Training requirements specified for each
individual. This register will be updated with the results of the courses and at their moment
transferred for its use by the department of Human Resources of the OWNER.
CONTRACTOR will include in the SUPPLIERS scope the specific training for each item.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the coordination of Subcontractor, Vendor
representatives, and OWNER training to Personnel designated by the OWNER as requiring
such training. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to incorporate these activities in the
implementation of the Training Program.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to identify the appropriate temporary training location
and facilities and specify the area where the temporary training classroom sessions and
Training Department shall reside.
CONTRACTOR shall provide on the job training to all operators and maintenance
technicians during the pre-commissioning, commissioning, and start-up activities.
CONTRACTOR shall complete the Training Program prior to Mechanical Completion of each
Terminal.

20.1.1.2 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

OWNER will be responsible for providing Operation, Maintenance, and Engineering

Personnel who have basic proficiency in the English language and basic Operation and
Maintenance knowledge. The OWNER will provide such Operation and Maintenance
personnel with such basic proficiencies prior to commencement of CONTRACTOR training.
Prior to commencement of the training, OWNER will designate to the CONTRACTOR the
Operation, Maintenance, and Engineering personnel required to take the Training Program.

20.1.2 TRAINING PACKAGES

20.1.2.1 OPERATION TRAINING PACKAGE

Package shall include but not be limited to the following topics:

- General safety (HSE policy and procedures)
- Operational and Process Safety
- Process Description
- Operating Procedures and manuals
- Normal Startup and Shutdown
- Emergency Shutdown and Emergency Plan

239
- General Instrumentation and Controls
- Control systems
- Vendor equipment operation training
- Equipment Safety
- Unit Specific Process Equipment functionality
- Basic Process Equipment design
- Routine checks
- Drawings and P&IDs review
- Process Troubleshooting
- Shift-work Health and Safety Lifestyle Practices
- Labor Risk Assessment.
- Environmental Aspects and Impacts of the new facilities.

20.1.2.2 ENGINEERING TRAINING PACKAGE

Package shall include but not be limited to the following topics:

- General Safety (HSE policy and procedures)
- Emergency Plan
- Safety Instrumented system lifecycle and IEC61508/61511 requirements
- Technology Provider Package
- Operational and Process Safety
- Process Optimization (may be this point does not apply)
- Plant Engineering
- Process Design Basis
- Energy Efficiency.

20.1.2.3 MAINTENANCE TRAINING PACKAGE

Package shall include but not be limited to the following topics:

- General safety (HSE policy and procedures)
- Emergency Plan
- Maintenance and Process Safety
- Maintenance Procedures
- Technology Provider Package Overview

240
- Instrument Safety. Safety Instrumented system lifecycle and IEC61508/61511
requirements
- Vendor equipment maintenance training
- Equipment Safety
- Electrical Safety
- Equipment Inspection
- Instrument Calibration
- Maintenance Scheduling and Planning
- Routine Maintenance
- Equipment Parts and Function
- Maintenance Repair Procedures
- Relief Valve Bench Testing
- Process Control Loops
- Drawings and P&IDs review
- Labor Risk Assessment.
- Environmental Aspects and Impacts of the new facilities.
- MV & LV Switchgear
- UPS Systems

20.1.2.4 GENERAL SAFETY TRAINING PACKAGE

This package shall be developed by CONTRACTOR and approved by OWNER.

20.1.2.5 VENDOR TRAINING PACKAGE

CONTRACTOR shall request Vendors for the appropriate training requirements. At least the
following packages will require training:
- Distributed Control System (DCS)
- SIS (ESD: Emergency Shutdown)
- Effluent Treatment Plant
- Loading arms
- Fire system.
- Metering package.

20.1.2.6 FIRE TRAINING PACKAGE

Package shall include but not be limited to the following topics:

241
- OWNER’s Fire School Training.
- 40 hours of fire Brigade training.

20.1.3 TARGET AUDIENCE

20.1.3.1 OPERATION TRAINING PACKAGE

Operation training package shall be designed to train all operation personnel including all
operators, shift supervisors, operation specialist, and two (2) production engineers.

20.1.3.2 ENGINEERING TRAINING PACKAGE

Engineering training package shall be designed to train all Engineering Personnel including
all members of the Technical Engineering group. CONTRACTOR shall include an
engineering overview training for one (1) operation specialist and all process engineers
designated by the OWNER to be located at the CONTRACTOR’s office for a duration of two
(2) weeks.

20.1.3.3 MAINTENANCE TRAINING PACKAGE

Maintenance training package shall be designed to train the day-to-day operation

maintenance personnel.

20.1.3.4 GENERAL SAFETY TRAINING PACKAGE

This training is required for all Terminal personnel, CONTRACTOR, and Subcontractors
working at the Terminal.

20.1.3.5 VENDOR TRAINING PACKAGE

This training is required for all operation and maintenance personnel.

20.1.3.6 FIRE TRAINING PACKAGE

All members of the Fire Brigade shall receive training.

242
21 MAINTENANCE AND MATERIAL STOCK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

21.1 MATERIAL STOCK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

CONTRACTOR shall include in its Material Control Procedure a stock control procedure,
including description of records for receipt, issue and balance of items.
This procedure shall be computer based and shall have sufficient details to allow status
checks to be performed at all times. The system shall have the ability to trace an item from
origin to issue.
CONTRACTOR shall maintain an Inventory Control Procedure for all spare parts and
operating supplies for input into a computerized maintenance management program.
CONTRACTOR shall input all spare parts and supplies into the computer program as they
are delivered, and a CD-ROM shall be submitted to the OWNER upon HAND OVER of each
Terminal.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the maintenance preservation of all equipment and
materials on the Site until HAND OVER. Due care shall be taken to follow the manufacturer’s
instructions in regard to periodic maintenance preservation requirements.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that equipment is not exposed to the elements which might
cause damage to it and that sensitive equipment is kept in a suitably controlled environment.
Special tools supplied by SUPPLIERS for their equipment will be properly identified and
stored for retrieval at the appropriate time. All special tools purchased for installation and
maintenance of the equipment will become the property of OWNER at HAND OVER.
CONTRACTOR shall keep all materials at any time in the site stores, in such condition as to
allow OWNER to make all the checks he wishes. CONTRACTOR may reject at any time
those materials that do not meet the Contract requirements. In any such case,
CONTRACTOR shall remove them from the Site and replace them at his own cost. If
CONTRACTOR does not remove them within the time stated by OWNER, OWNER may
have them directly removed and the expenses incurred shall be at CONTRACTOR'S account
as well as any damage resulting from such a compulsory removal. Whenever
CONTRACTOR uses, in his own interest or by his own initiative, materials whose dimensions
are larger than or whose grade is higher than those required or whose workmanship is more
accurate, this shall not give any entitlement to an increase in prices, and accounting shall be
carried out as if the materials or the work had the dimensions and quality specified in the
CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR may arrange for any tests it thinks necessary to ascertain the
suitability of Materials. CONTRACTOR will continue to be responsible for care, custody and
control, including upkeep and maintenance of each Terminal until HAND OVER.

21.2 MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Maintenance Management System (MMS) will be provided and linked to the DCS
(Distributed Control System). The DCS will provide the required data for an appropriate
maintenance program, including historical recording to allow trend analyses for maintenance
prediction programs, troubleshooting and plant operational events. There will be a unique

243
Maintenance Database populated with both dynamic data from DCS and fixed data about
equipment’s characteristics. In the first stage it will be defined the structure and main
capabilities of this system. Guideline and execution plan for addressing and incorporating the
Maintenance Management System during engineering and procurement of the PROJECT.
CONTRACTOR shall provide the following:
 Operating philosophy that corresponds to its understanding of the proposed process
design. The response should cover each key operation. (Note this is not another
process description).
 Identify the process to be used to achieve the availability requirement.
 Demonstrate how lifecycle costs will be used in the selection of equipment and
materials.

244